25+ Delicious & Easy Snack Recipes for Kids & Adults - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/lunch/snacks/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Fri, 28 Nov 2025 21:13:02 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 25+ Delicious & Easy Snack Recipes for Kids & Adults - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/lunch/snacks/ 32 32 Cottage Cheese Flatbread https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/ https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/#comments Thu, 06 Mar 2025 14:31:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80245 If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback.…]]>

If you’ve spent any time on social media lately, you’ve probably noticed that cottage cheese is having a major comeback. This viral cottage cheese flatbread recipe, created by Francesca Aralla of HealthyMumWay, is a perfect example of why—it’s simple, high in protein, and incredibly versatile.

Cottage cheese flatbread used as a wrap.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This recipe for cottage cheese flatbread calls for only 2 main ingredients—seriously, it’s that simple. A 2-ingredient recipe that takes only 5 minutes to prepare is a lifesaver for those who love to meal prep and for busy weeknight dinners. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Full-Fat Cottage Cheese: The full-fat 4% version of cottage cheese works best in this recipe, giving it the desired end texture. My favorite cottage cheese brands are Good Culture, Trader Joe’s, and Daisy. If you prefer to use 2%, Good Culture is a solid choice.
  • Eggs: I tested this recipe using large whole eggs, which is what I recommend. However, if you want to make cottage cheese flatbread with egg whites, you can do so—just be aware that your protein flatbread will end up being lighter in both color and flavor. 
  • Optional—Salt: I don’t include this as a main ingredient, as adding salt will be determined by the type of cottage cheese you end up using. Some types of cottage cheese are saltier than others, so be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding any additional salt. If you do, just a pinch will do. 
  • To Prep Pan—Cooking Spray: Have a can of cooking spray handy to ensure your baked cottage cheese flatbread doesn’t stick to the baking sheet. I prefer avocado oil spray. 

Optional Add-Ins

This simple cottage cheese flatbread recipe is endlessly customizable. Depending on which toppings, spices, sauces, and ingredients you choose to use, you can turn this into a wide variety of meals. 

A little tomato sauce, Italian seasoning, and cheese—you’ve got pizza. Choose hummus, cucumber, and red onion for a Mediterranean twist. You get the idea. Here are some of my optional add-in suggestions you can try:

  • Seasonings & Spices: Give your keto cottage cheese flatbread a bolder overall flavor by using garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, red pepper flakes, paprika or a seasoning blend like Italian seasoning. 
  • Fresh herbs: Chop up some fresh parsley or chives for a pop of color and taste. You can use fresh basil is you are using this flatbread as “pizza crust.”
  • Cheese: While this is already a high protein flatbread recipe, some additional cheese will up the overall grams of protein and add a rich flavor. Feel free to add two tablespoons of either grated Parmesan cheese or grated mozzarella. 
  • A Sweet version: While the viral recipe is served as a savory cottage cheese flatbread, I have also made a sweeter version by adding a pinch of cinnamon, a teaspoon of vanilla, and a touch of honey for a breakfast-style flatbread.

How to Make Cottage Cheese Flatbread?

It only takes a couple of simple steps to make this low carb cottage cheese flatbread. Here’s how:

  1. Prepare your baking sheet & oven: Preheat the oven to 350° degrees F. Next, line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½  by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Do not skip this step, as both of these elements make sure your high-protein flatbread will not stick to the pan. Without them, it would be hard to remove and keep them in one piece. Once ready, set it aside.
A collage of images showing how to make flatbread with cottage cheese and eggs.
  1. Blend your cottage cheese mixture: Place one cup of cottage cheese, two whole eggs, and a pinch of salt (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of your food processor. Pulse it 6-7 times in one-second intervals until it is fully incorporated but not pulverized; you do not want to liquify it. It is okay to have small pieces of cottage cheese remaining. If you do not have a food processor, you can use a hand mixer, a whisk or a blender.
  2. Spread your egg and cottage cheese flatbread: Pour the mixture onto the parchment-lined sheet pan and spread it into an even (ideally 8 by 11 inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon. An even thickness is essential for even cooking. 
  3. Bake it in the oven. Bake it in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown. Then remove it and let it cool for 5 minutes before carefully removing it from the pan. Serve it by itself, as a sandwich wrap, or as a pizza base, following the suggestions below.

How to Serve it?

This is the best cottage cheese flatbread recipe because—here’s the fun part—you get to use your creativity and choose how you want to serve it. Here are three options to get you started: 

Two ways to serve cottage cheese flatbread; as a wrap and as a pizza base.
  1. Enjoy it as is. It’s a delicious high-protein snack served plain.
  2. Make a Sandwich: Any of your favorite sandwich toppings will work here. I like to spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place three slices of provolone cheese, 2 slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite), some lettuce, and some sliced tomatoes. Gently roll the cottage cheese bread wrap around the ingredients, and then cut it in half before serving. You can also use a pre-made mix, such as chicken salad with mayo instead, which is popular on Instagram and TikTok.
  3. Make a Pizza: For a cottage cheese flatbread pizza recipe, here’s what to do: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and then spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce (or plain tomato sauce),  ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.

How to Store Cottage Cheese Flatbread

This cottage cheese flatbread recipe comes together so quickly that it’s easy to make fresh the day you plan to serve it. However, if you would like to make larger batches to meal prep, here’s how to store any extras you may have:

  • Storage: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. I recommend that you place parchment paper in between any stacks of flatbread that you have to prevent them from sticking together. 
  • Reheating: Leftover flatbread with cottage cheese can be enjoyed cold, at room temperature, or warm. If you wish to eat it warmed up, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5-7 minutes or until warmed all the way through. 

FAQs

How long to cook cottage cheese flatbread?

The overall cooking time really depends on the thickness of your cottage cheese mixture and what size pan you’re using. If you spread it out in an evenly thin layer about 8” by 11” in size as I did, it will take about 30-35 minutes to cook. If you decide to use a smaller pan and thus have a thicker layer of the mixture, your cooking time will need to be longer.

How long does it last?

If stored in an airtight container in the fridge, your flat bread with cottage cheese will last for up to 3 days. 

How many calories in cottage cheese flatbread?

One serving of this egg and cottage cheese flatbread recipe is 166 calories, with 17 grams of protein, 9 grams of fat, and 4 grams of carbohydrates. 

Can you freeze it?

Technically, yes, you can freeze it, though I prefer to serve it the same day it’s made. For the meal preppers making large batches who wish to freeze them, my main tip is to place parchment paper in between the layers of flatbread, then wrap them all in stretch film/plastic wrap to keep out moisture.

Expert Tips

While this is a very uncomplicated recipe, here are a few notes to help ensure your cottage cheese flatbread comes out as beautifully as it did in my test kitchen: 

  • Let it cool for a few minutes after it comes out of the oven. This will allow your flatbread to set and be easier to handle. Otherwise, it may stick to the paper and potentially tear when peeling it off.
  • Thickness and time of cooking time matters. If you follow this recipe’s instructions, you’ll be spreading your mixture out into roughly an 8”x11” rectangle on your quarter sheet pan. If you end up using a smaller pan, your flatbread will be thicker and require a longer baking time. 
  • Texture matters. When mixing your eggs and cottage cheese together, resist the urge to overmix them. You want the mixture to maintain a little thickness, which means some small chunks of cottage cheese are okay. You don’t want to completely puree and liquify the mixture in your Vitamix or blender. Just a few pulses of the blender, food processor, or immersion blender will suffice. 
  • How to make air fryer cottage cheese flatbread: If you’re not looking for perfection, feel free to make this recipe in your air fryer. Due to the smaller space inside the air fryer, you will want to make half a batch of this recipe at a time, so ½ cup of cottage cheese with only one whole egg. Cook it at 350 degrees F for 10 minutes. At that point, check on your flatbread, and if it isn’t cooked enough, give it another 15 minutes. When you take it out, allow it to cool before handling it and serve.
  • If you’re using egg whites, take note. Egg whites will result in a lighter flatbread. Both the color/appearance will be lighter than you see in the main recipe pictures (though the air fryer photos show an egg white version), and the flavor itself will be less robust. 
  • Be careful about adding salt. Many brands of cottage cheese are salty enough on their own and don’t require any additional salt. Taste your cottage cheese before you add any extra salt. In my recipe testing, both Good Culture and Trader Joe’s cottage cheese didn’t need any added sodium.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this flatbread with cottage cheese recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Cottage cheese flatbread topped off with deli meat, tomatoes and microgreens.
Print

Cottage Cheese Flatbread Recipe

If you’re looking for a simple, high-protein, and gluten-free flatbread alternative, this 2 ingredient Cottage Cheese Flatbread recipe is for you! Made with just two main ingredients—cottage cheese and eggs—this viral recipe is low-carb, keto-friendly, and packed with 17 grams of protein per serving. While it’s not a traditional bread, it is a great alternative as a satisfying base for wraps, sandwiches, and even pizza.
Course Breakfast, Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 166kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup whole milk cottage cheese 4%
  • 2 large eggs
  • Pinch of Salt* optional
  • cooking spray

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350°F and line a small sheet pan (I used a quarter sheet pan, which is 9 ½ by 13 inches) with parchment paper and spray the sides with cooking spray. Set aside.
  • Place one cup of cottage cheese and two whole eggs (plus any of the optional add-ins you want) into the bowl of the food processor.
    The batter in a food processor before and after it is mixed.
  • Pulse 6-7 times in one-second intervals until thoroughly incorporated but not pulverized. We do not want it to be fully liquid; it is okay to have small chunks of cottage cheese.
  • Pour the mixture onto the prepared baking sheet and spread it in an even (ideally an 8-inch by 11-inch rectangular) layer using a spatula or the back of a spoon.
    The batter spread on a sheet pan before and after it is baked.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 30 to 35 minutes or until it is lightly golden brown.
  • Let it cool for 5 minutes and carefully remove it from the pan.
  • To serve you have three options. You can:
    1. Enjoy it as is.
    2. Make a sandwich: Spread it with a thin layer of mayo (or mustard) and then place any of your favorite sandwich toppings. I like to start with three slices of provolone cheese and then layer it with two slices of deli meat (turkey or chicken breasts are my favorite) and some lettuce and sliced tomatoes. Gently roll and then cut it in half before serving.
    3. Make a Pizza: After 30 minutes of baking, remove it from the oven and spread it with ½ cup of marinara sauce, ½ to ⅔ cup of shredded mozzarella cheese, and 12-15 slices of turkey (or regular) pepperoni. Put it back in the oven and bake until the cheese is melted, for about 4-5 minutes.
    A collage of images showing how to use cottage cheese flatbread as a sandwich wrap and pizza base.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one flatbread that is about 8 by 11 inches, which is ideal for 2 servings. The nutritional facts below include the 2 ingredients listed in the recipe. They do not include the optional wrap or pizza ingredients.
  • Adding salt: Be sure to taste your cottage cheese before adding salt in the mixture. Most cottage cheese is already salty. 
  • Storing leftovers: Once cooled, store it in an airtight container for up to 3 days. If you make a few batches, I recommend placing a sheet of parchment paper between stacks of your flatbread to prevent them from sticking together. 
  • Reheating: You can serve this flatbread warm or cold. If you prefer to serve it warm, place it on a parchment-lined sheet pan in a low-heat oven of 300 degrees F for 5 minutes or until warmed all through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 166kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 182mg | Sodium: 393mg | Potassium: 170mg | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 385IU | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cottage-cheese-flatbread/feed/ 4
Baked Goat Cheese Balls https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/#comments Sun, 29 Dec 2024 17:08:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15644 Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on…]]>

Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside? I think not. I also think that goat cheese makes some of the most flavorful dishes, so make sure to try any of our Goat Cheese Recipes if you are a fan as well. 

On a side note, if you’ve ever been to Lisa Vanderpump’s restaurant, Sur, then you know all about their famous fried goat cheese balls. I know people who visit the restaurant just to order them! The good news? With our recipe, you can now recreate a baked version of the goat cheese balls at Sur right at home. They’re just as delicious but a bit lighter and perfect for any occasion.

Baked Goat Cheese Balls served on a plate by a person.

Ingredients

This baked goat cheese ball recipe is made with just a handful of simple ingredients readily available in any grocery store. We will need:

  • Fresh herbs: I love the savory mix of fresh thyme and parsley. Other herbs that would be delicious include fresh rosemary or basil.
  • Panko bread crumbs: We love the extra crisp bite of plain panko breadcrumbs, but this is your chance to have fun with the coating. While it’s not traditional, you can use Italian-seasoned breadcrumbs, Melba toast crumbs, or even swap out half the breadcrumbs for crushed pecans or walnuts. For a gluten-free option, try almond flour crackers. Simply use your food processor to break them down into fine crumbs, making it easy to coat your goat cheese balls to perfection.
  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a nice savory bite to the breadcrumb mixture. Toss in some lemon zest for a bright citrus flavor.
  • Egg: One large egg is needed to coat the goat cheese before dipping it into the breadcrumbs.
  • Dijon mustard: A hint of Dijon mustard adds a unique flavor to the egg mixture.
  • Seasonings: All you need is a sprinkle of Kosher salt and black pepper for each layer of the dipping station.
  • Goat cheese: We recommend buying a whole goat cheese log instead of goat cheese crumbles. You can buy them in 4 oz portions or a large 12 oz log.

How to Make Goat Cheese Balls?

Goat cheese bites are a quick and easy recipe that requires a quick setup of your breading station and a chill in the freezer. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Prep baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet (small enough to fit in your freezer) with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare dipping station: In a small shallow bowl, mix the fresh thyme and parsley. In another small bowl, whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and pepper. Third, toss the panko breadcrumbs and garlic powder in another small bowl.
  3. Cut goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife, we prefer unscented dental floss to cut the goat cheese into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut yourself a long (about 20 inches long) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  4. Coat goat cheese balls: Start by dipping each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture. Then, roll them in the egg mixture and allow the excess liquid to drip off. Then, gently press them into the panko mixture to ensure they are fully coated.
  5. Freeze goat cheese balls: Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Freeze for 30 minutes.
  6. Bake: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Bake the goat cheese balls for 8-10 minutes, or until golden brown.
  7. Serve: Cool slightly, drizzle with honey, and serve warm.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Talk about a goat cheese appetizer that’s a true make-ahead marvel. The best part? You can prepare these ahead of time, freeze them, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and absolutely impressive.

  • Make Ahead and freezing instructions: Follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a ziplock freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.
  • Storage: While these goat cheese bites are best served the day they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the balls of goat cheese in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5 minutes.

Expert Tips

Here are some of my helpful tips for the best baked goat cheese balls recipe:

  • Cutting the goat cheese: The goat cheese is easiest to cut when it is cold. The best method is with unflavored dental floss. However, you can use a sharp knife, but make sure to wipe the knife clean with a paper towel after each slice.
  • Set your dipping station up before starting: It’s best to prep your ingredients before starting since the process happens quickly.
  • Dredge quickly: Go through the breading station quickly and thoroughly, then pop them right into the freezer.
  • Ensure they are cold before placing them in the oven: Even though it sounds like an extra step to freeze them before baking, it helps to make the outside crispy while the inside stays soft and creamy.
  • Fried goat cheese balls: While we love the baked version, you can certainly fry goat cheese balls for a crisp, golden treat. Heat 1–2 inches of vegetable oil in a shallow skillet over medium heat until it shimmers. Fry the goat cheese balls in batches (preferably two) for 1–2 minutes, turning frequently to ensure they cook evenly and achieve a beautiful golden-brown crust on all sides.
  • Double the recipe: This recipe makes 12 individual balls—double or triple the recipe, depending on the number of people you serve. Or, make them mini by cutting the goat cheese rounds in half and reducing the baking time to 5-6 minutes.
  • Bake them right before serving: If you’re serving these goat cheese balls as an appetizer, we highly recommend serving them warm for the best experience. We like to pop them in the oven just before our guests arrive so they’re greeted with the irresistible aroma of golden, creamy goat cheese oozing with tangy, melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

Serving Suggestions

When it comes to serving baked goat cheese balls, the possibilities are as delightful as the dish itself! Whether you are planning an elegant appetizer, a show-stopping salad, or just looking to add a little magic to your meal, these versatile bites have you covered. 

Goat cheese appetizer balls served as a holiday cheese spread.
  • Appetizer: Serve them with a drizzle of honey or extra virgin olive oil. Or, add them to your Meat and Cheese Platter for a little pizzazz.
  • Salad: Enjoy a French classic and turn it into a Baked Goat Cheese Salad. This also does double duty as a delicious holiday appetizer salad or elegant weeknight dinner at home.
  • Croutons: Turn them into cheesy croutons to top off a warm, comforting bowl of soup, like creamy Butternut Squash Soup or velvety Zucchini Soup.
  • Pasta & grain bowls: Crumble them over pasta or add them to your favorite grain bowls for a tangy goat cheese twist that adds creamy texture and bold flavor.

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Baked goat cheese balls served on a plate by a person.
Print

Baked Goat Cheese Balls Recipe

These Baked Goat Cheese balls are coated with herbs, dipped in an egg-mustard mixture, and then rolled in breadcrumbs. You can prep these ahead of time and freeze them until you are ready to serve. They make the perfect appetizer for any cheese board setup and usually disappear a few minutes after they come out of the oven.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Cooling time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 Goat Cheese Balls
Calories 122kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
  • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 12-ounce log goat cheese
  • 2 tablespoons honey for drizzling (optional)

Instructions

  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh thyme and parsley in a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
  • Cut the goat cheese into 12 pieces. You can slice them using (unscented) dental floss (see notes for more*) or a knife. Roll each piece into a small ball.
  • Dip each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), then press the panko mixture gently to ensure it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
  • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until golden brown on top.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, drizzle it with honey, if preferred, and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 baked goat cheese balls, ideal for 6 servings (2 per person). The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Slicing the goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife to slice the cheese, we find it easier to use an unscented dental floss to cut it into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut a long (about 20 inches) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  • Make Ahead and freezing: The best part of this recipe is that you can prepare these ahead of time, freeze, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and impressive. To freeze, follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a freezer bag (or a freezer safe airtight container), label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.

Nutrition

Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/feed/ 2
Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts) https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/#comments Wed, 04 Dec 2024 17:52:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79176 Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as…]]>

Humans have relished in candied chestnuts, or marron glacés, since the 16th century. Marron glacé (sometimes also referred to as Marron Lyonnaise) originated in Northern Italy and France, where chestnuts thrive in the autumn and winter months. While preparing this French chestnut delicacy does take four days, the hands-on time is surprisingly minimal once your chestnuts are peeled.

If you love roasting chestnuts in the oven or over an open fire but are looking to expand your chestnut repertoire, this European classic is a must-try. Yes, the prep time for this marrons glacés recipe may be a bit lengthy, but the process is straightforward and requires no advanced skills. Plus, making these candied chestnuts at home is far more budget-friendly than purchasing them at the store—without compromising that irresistible sweetness!

Candied chestnuts in a gift box.

What is marron glacé made of? The Ingredients List:

Our recipe for candied chestnuts uses just four basic ingredients. However, the success of the end product will significantly depend on the quality of the ingredients you choose. 

Below is everything you need to look for when buying them:

Chestnuts:

It is no secret that the chestnuts are the star ingredient in this recipe. When buying chestnuts, there are a few things to pay attention to:

  • Get the freshest chestnuts you can find: If possible, we recommend hand-selecting your chestnuts to ensure they are equal in size. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and without any blemishes or mold. Feel it between your fingers to ensure the skin is not dry. Once you’re back at home, one way to test freshness is to drop your chestnuts in a bowl of water. If any float, discard them, as they’re likely hollow inside the shell.
  • Not all chestnuts are created equal: In terms of chestnut variety, the French ‘marrons’ are superior in quality as they tend to be larger in size and more tender in texture. However, it’s hard to find them here in the US. A great alternative is Italian chestnuts, sold at national supermarkets like Whole Foods and Trader Joe’s during the holiday season. For this recipe, we recommend avoiding Chinese chestnuts. While they tend to be cheaper, we find them more challenging to peel.
  • Store-bought pre-cooked and peeled chestnuts are a great shortcut: If you’re short on time or don’t have access to fresh chestnuts, you can buy them (affiliate link) from the store. One important thing to remember is you need to ensure that the only ingredient used is chestnuts. Store-bought, already-sweetened chestnuts won’t work in this recipe. 
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For The Syrup:

  • Water: You need a ratio of 1 part water to 1 part sugar to make the sugar syrup the peeled chestnuts soak in.
  • Vanilla Bean: Use a whole vanilla pod sliced in half to flavor the sugar syrup. The vanilla beans infuse into the syrup for maximum flavor. We advise you against using vanilla extract if you can avoid it. While it won’t ruin the recipe, we found that much of it evaporates along with the water as the syrup reduces.
  • Sugar: Since we do our best to use natural sugars in our recipes, we sweetened the syrup with cane sugar, but granulated white or brown sugar can also be used.

How to Make Marron Glace?

Below are the step-by-step instructions detailing the process of making glazed chestnuts. At first glance, the process might look intimidating, but once you’re done with boiling and peeling the chestnuts, the rest will take no more than 5 minutes a day.

If you’re new to boiling chestnuts, we recommend you first review our guide on How To Boil Chestnuts, as we go into all the nitty gritty details there.

  1. Score the chestnuts: Use a small, sharp knife (or a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife) to score a cross outside the shell, right across the middle or “belly” of the chestnuts. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another one, creating an X. Don’t go too deep with your cuts—you want to pierce through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.
  2. Boil the chestnuts in water: Place two cups of cold water into a medium-sized saucepan and boil over medium heat. Carefully drop the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. Towards the end, you’ll see the cut part start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
Person peeling chestnuts and images showing sugar syrup.
  1. Peel your chestnuts while they are still warm: Carefully remove chestnuts one at a time from the hot water and hold them using a clean dish towel if they’re too hot. Using a sharp knife, peel off the shell and fuzzy skin underneath. If you’re having difficulty removing it, place it back in hot water for a few more minutes.
  2. Make the sugar syrup: Place the chestnuts in a colander and rinse them under cool water. Add the sugar and water to a saucepan and bring to a simmer. Stir continuously until the sugar is fully dissolved. Continue simmering for another five minutes until the sugar syrup turns golden brown. If you are using granulated sugar, the syrup should remain clear.
Chestnuts in sugar syrup with vanilla bean.
  1. Cook the chestnuts in the sugar syrup: Add the chestnuts and halved vanilla bean into the syrup. Simmer your marrons in syrup for 10 minutes while stirring gently, being careful not to break up the chestnuts. 
  2. Set aside for 24 hours: After 10 minutes, take the saucepan off the heat, put the lid on, and let it sit on the counter for 24 hours. The chestnuts will cool down in the syrup and soak up some of the liquid as they rest.
  3. Cook the chestnuts in syrup a second time: The next day, place the saucepan back on the stovetop and gently heat the syrup until it is simmering. Continue to simmer for another 3 minutes. Remove from the heat, place the lid back on, and set aside to cool.
Marron glaces drying on a wire rack.
  1. Cook the chestnuts in syrup two more times: Repeat the process of cooking the chestnuts in syrup two more times, waiting 24 hours between each time.
  2. Place chestnuts on a wire rack: After the 4th and final round of simmering in syrup, using a slotted spoon, remove the chestnuts one at a time, draining off excess liquid. Place them onto a baking tray fitted with a wire rack. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts one by one and spread them evenly on the wire rack. Make sure you lift out any little bits that may have broken off.
  3. Dry out the chestnuts in the oven: Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as it will go) and place the chestnut tray in it. Cook the chestnuts for an hour. Remove the tray from the oven if the nuts have dried and hardened. If they’re still a bit sticky, prop the oven door open and leave the tray inside until thoroughly dried out. 
  4. Serve your marrons glaces: This French confection took effort to make and thus deserves a presentation worthy of your efforts! The best way to serve them is to individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper, paper cases, or place them in mini cupcake liners (affiliate link). 

How To Store and Freeze Candied Chestnuts?

  • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week.
  • To freeze: Store the individually wrapped chestnuts in an airtight container and freeze for up to 1 month. Defrost at room temperature.

Ways To Use Marron Glaces

This candied chestnut recipe is incredibly versatile. Once you’ve made your marrons glacés, there are many ways to enjoy these delicacies:

  • Dessert: Make a Coupe Marron. This is a French classic that, I think, is worthy of your caramelized chestnuts. Add a scoop of vanilla ice cream to a tall glass, add your candied chestnuts, and then top it with a spoonful of whipped cream. It’s a simple yet decadent dessert, perfect for holiday entertaining.
  • Breakfast: Crumble marrons glacés over your favorite oatmeal, porridge, granola, or stack of pancakes
  • Meat and Cheese Board: Adding a sweet element to a cheese and charcuterie board is perfect alongside savory bites. The nutty, sweet earthiness from these chestnuts makes a beautiful, elevated addition to your serving platter.

Expert Tips

While making this glazed chestnuts recipe is fairly simple, there are a few important details to remember. Here are some helpful tips we’ve learned along the way to ensure your first attempt is a success:

  • Patience is key when scoring and peeling chestnuts: Take your time to carefully score the outer shell and fuzzy skin, aiming to pierce the skin without cutting too deeply into the flesh. Once cooked, peel the chestnuts while they’re still hot, as the skin becomes much harder to remove once they cool. Keep a paring knife nearby to help with any stubborn bits of skin that get stuck in the folds of the chestnut.
  • Save the broken pieces: Store them in a jar; they will taste just as good. Use them as a topping for ice cream or oatmeal.
  • Heat the syrup gently: Keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
  • Watch the sugar syrup level: Towards the end, if your syrup reduces too much, the chestnuts will start sticking to the bottom of the saucepan. If that happens, feel free to add a small amount of water (¼ cup or less) to thin it out and maintain consistency.
  • Keep the sugar syrup: Don’t discard the syrup after removing the chestnuts. Pass it through a sieve and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. It’s a great alternative to maple syrup. I love it when poured into cocktails and drizzled over oatmeal and ice cream.
Candied chestnuts on a plate.

FAQs

What is marron glacé in English?

In English, marron glacé translates to candied chestnuts. It is a French candy made by simmering chestnuts in a sugar syrup until they become tender and coated with a glossy, sugary glaze.

What do marrons glacés taste like?

Marrons glacés are sweet through the center with a hard, sugared exterior and tender, nutty, sweet-tasting flesh.

Why are candied chestnuts so expensive?

Marron glacé is expensive because making them is labor-intensive and time-consuming. Each chestnut must be carefully scored, peeled, and cooked in sugar syrup over several days, requiring precision and attention to detail. Additionally, high-quality chestnuts add to the cost, making it a luxury treat.

Other Chestnut Recipes

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Marron Glace (Candied chestnuts) on a plate from the top view.
Print

Marron Glace Recipe (Candied Chestnuts)

Marron Glacé, or candied chestnuts, are a luxurious French treat you can make at home. Sweet, nutty, and delicious, but cheaper than store-bought yet just as decadent!
Course Dessert, Snack
Cuisine French
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 1 hour
Cook Time 15 minutes
Resting/cooling time 4 days
Total Time 4 days 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 240kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ lbs fresh chestnuts should give you 1.25lb/570g when peeled
  • 2 cups water more to boil chestnuts
  • 2 cups cane sugar or granulated sugar
  • 1 vanilla bean cut in half lengthwise

Instructions

  • Place the chestnut on a cutting board flat side down. Hold it firmly between your index finger and thumb and make a horizontal slit and then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X.” Make sure to score through the hard outer shell and the fuzzy skin underneath. Do your best not to cut any deeper into the chestnut flesh. Repeat the same process for all of the chestnuts.
  • Fill a saucepan with cold water and bring it to a boil. Carefully place the chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes. The cut part will start opening up as they cook, revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside. To check for doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked. Remove the pan from the heat once they are all (mostly) open.
  • Using a slotted spoon, remove one to two chestnuts at a time, as they will be hot. If needed, use a kitchen towel to protect your hands. Carefully peel away the hard outer shell and the fuzzy inner skin, taking care not to break the chestnut. If the fuzzy skin is stuck in the folds of the chestnut, use the tip of a knife or a toothpick to remove it. If the skin is stubborn, return the chestnuts to the hot water for a minute to loosen it, then try peeling again. Once done, you can discard the shells, skins, and cooking water.
  • Place the now-boiled chestnuts into a colander and give them a quick rinse. Set aside.
  • To make the sugar syrup, add 2 cups of water and sugar to a medium-sized saucepan and bring it to a simmer over medium heat. Stir it continuously until the sugar dissolves. This should take no more than 7-9 minutes.
  • Carefully add the vanilla bean and chestnuts to the sugar syrup. Let them simmer for 10 minutes, stirring once every 2-3 minutes.
  • Turn the heat off. Carefully remove the vanilla bean and discard it. Put the lid on and let it sit at temperature for 24 hours.
  • After 24 hours, return the pan to the stove and bring the sugar syrup to a simmer, cooking the chestnuts for 3 minutes. Stir the syrup and chestnuts every few seconds to keep them from sticking to the pan. Once again, remove the pan from the heat, cover with a lid, and set aside at room temperature for 24 hours.
  • Repeat this process twice, heating and cooling every 24 hours (it should be 4 times in total).
  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and place a wire rack over it. Preheat the oven to 120F (or as low as your oven can go.)
  • After the final time, carefully remove them one at a time with a slotted spoon. Let the syrup drip off as much as possible. Spread the chestnuts on the wire rack.
  • Transfer the baking sheet to the preheated oven. Bake low and slow for 1 hour*. The chestnuts should be dry and hardened on the outside. If they’re still sticky, turn the oven off, open the door, and leave the chestnuts to continue drying inside.
  • To serve, individually wrap the chestnuts in parchment paper or cellophane or place them in mini cupcake liners. Gift and/or enjoy.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 18-20 candied chestnuts, depending on the size of your chestnuts. I listed the serving as 10 (2 per person) and the nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Short on time? If you are planning to gift these candied chestnuts and make a bigger batch, you can save time by buying already cooked and peeled chestnuts. Just make sure that the only ingredient listed on the packaging is chestnuts.
  • Heat the syrup gently: As you warm up the sugar syrup, keep the sugar syrup at a gentle simmer rather than letting it boil. Also, it is best to stir regularly to prevent the chestnuts from sticking to the bottom of the pan and ensure they’re evenly coated throughout the whole process.
  • To store: Wrap each candied chestnut individually in parchment paper or mini cupcake liners. Place in a sealed container and refrigerate for up to a week. 

Nutrition

Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 3mg | Potassium: 275mg | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 15IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/marron-glace-recipe/feed/ 2
Butternut Squash Bruschetta https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/#comments Fri, 25 Oct 2024 15:11:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8033 The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up…]]>

The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up beautifully, leaving you with sweet, caramelized bits of squash. Layer that on top of a toasted baguette slice slathered with herbed goat cheese and cranberry sauce, and you will have a butternut squash crostini worthy of an elegant dinner party or casual finger food.

If you are like us, a big fan of butternut squash appetizers, be sure to check out our Butternut Squash Salad and Butternut Squash Soup, as well.

Thanksgiving bruschetta with butternut squash and cranberry sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

This easy butternut squash appetizer is easy to make with a few simple ingredients from the grocery store. We will need the following ingredients:

  • Butternut squash: Look for a medium-sized whole butternut squash heavy for its size. I prefer cutting butternut squash at home into small cubes rather than buying the precut packages. Alternatively, acorn squash, delicata squash, or any pumpkin variety can also be used in this recipe.
  • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the fruity flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Ground cinnamon powder adds an extra background warmth.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances all those butternut squash flavors.
  • Goat cheese: I love creamy goat cheese here (check out any of my Goat Cheese Recipes), but you could also use Ricotta Cheese, cream cheese, or mascarpone cheese.
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream adds extra richness and loosens the goat cheese to a spreadable consistency. Whole milk is a good substitute.
  • Scallions: Green onions add extra color and a mild onion flavor.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives us that punchy bite.
  • Fresh herbs: I love fresh parsley, but fresh thyme is a great option.
  • Crusty Bread: Hearty, thick slices of sourdough bread are divine, but you can also make No Knead Artisan Bread if you have the time or use slices of baguette for smaller bruschetta.
  • Cranberry sauce: I love to use my Maple Cranberry Sauce, which I always have in the fridge this time of year, but any leftover cranberry sauce will work.
  • Nuts: Toasted sliced almonds or walnuts add a layer of crunch and texture.
  • Honey: Floral honey elevates the butternut and cranberry with sweetness, but it is optional. Maple syrup can also be used.
  • Toppings: Feel free to add toppings such as flaky sea salt, red pepper flakes, chopped sage leaves, or rosemary for extra flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

There are several additions to this butternut appetizer, such as:

  • Balsamic glaze: Omit the honey and finish it with a tangy and sweet balsamic glaze instead.
  • Caramelized onions: Give the butternut squash an extra layer of savory flavor with rich and delicious Caramelized Onions.
  • Apple: Butternut squash and apples go so well together, so roasting some cubed apples with the squash is a delicious addition. Good apples for cooking include Fuji, Granny Smith, Pink Lady, and Gala.
  • Pomegranate seeds: Sprinkle on some pomegranate seeds for additional color and sweet, tart flavor.

How to Make Bruschetta with Butternut Squash?

This autumn bruschetta is easy to make. I like to mix the goat cheese while the butternut squash is roasting in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to roast butternut squash and prepare goat cheese mixture.
  1. Season butternut squash: Add the small chunks of butternut squash cubes to the prepared sheet pan. Toss the butternut with olive oil, cinnamon, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and black pepper and redistribute into a single layer.
  2. Roast squash cubes: Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, until fork tender and golden brown. Toss them halfway through for even browning.
  3. Whip goat cheese: In a small bowl, whisk together the goat cheese and heavy cream until smooth. Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  4. Toast bread: Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
A collage of images showing how to assemble butternut squash bruschetta recipe.
  1. Assemble bruschetta: Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture on each slice of bread, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  2. Add roasted squash: Add the butternut squash mixture and sliced almonds or walnuts. Drizzle with honey, sea salt, and fresh sage, if using.

Make Ahead and Storage

Following the right storage instructions allows you to make this butternut crostini ahead of time. This allows you to get one step ahead if serving it as a party appetizer or as part of your Thanksgiving spread.

  • Make Ahead: Roast the squash and prepare the goat cheese mixture. Store each component separately in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
  • Storage: The assembled butternut squash bruschettas will keep for one day. After that, the bread becomes soggy and soaks up too much moisture.
Butternut bruschetta being drizzled with honey.

If you try this Butternut Squash Bruschetta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Butternut squash bruschetta with goat cheese from the top view.
Print

Butternut Squash Bruschetta Recipe

A festive and colorful butternut squash bruschetta recipe featuring cinnamon-spiced roasted squash cubes atop layers of sourdough bread, goat cheese, and cranberry sauce. This is the perfect recipe to serve as an appetizer or use up the leftovers the day after Thanksgiving.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 466kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Butternut Squash

  • 1 medium sized butternut squash peeled, deseeded, and cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Goat Cheese Spread

  • 8 ounces goat cheese at room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 3 stalks scallions chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped or pressed
  • ¼ cup parsley chopped

For The Bruschetta

  • 6 slices sourdough bread or any other crusty bread
  • 1 cup maple cranberry sauce
  • ½ cup sliced almonds or chopped walnuts
  • 1 tbs Honey (or more) optional drizzle
  • Sea salt optional sprinkle to finish
  • Handful of sage leaves chopped (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread the butternut squash cubes on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with the ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, turning halfway through until tender. Remove from the oven and set it aside to cool.
  • Place the goat cheese and heavy cream in a bowl. Using a fork, stir and “whip” until smooth.
  • Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  • Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
  • Spread the bread with 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  • Add some roasted squash cubes and sprinkle each slice with almonds or walnuts.
  • Drizzle with honey, a pinch of sea salt, and chopped sage, if using.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 bruschettas, which is ideal for 6 servings. We roasted the butternut squash but you can use leftover squash as well. 
  • Enjoy warm or cold: You can enjoy the roasted squash bruschetta warm, just as all the components come out of the oven, or chilled if the squash and goat cheese have been made ahead. If you prefer it warm, rewarm leftover squash on a baking sheet in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes, until warm.
  • Smear garlic on bread: For that traditional bruschetta approach, you have two options. You can smear a raw garlic clove over the surface of the toasted bread slices, or make a paste with roasted garlic and spread it on instead.
  • Storage: While you can store the leftovers in an airtight container for one day, we think this bruschetta tastes best on the day it is made.

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 1306mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/feed/ 10
Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

What is Muhammara?

Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

Key Ingredients:

To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
  • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
  • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
  • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
  • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
  • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
  • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
  • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
  • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
  • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

How to make Muhammara?

To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

Red peppers are roasted and charred
  1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
  2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
  3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
  1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
  2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

Expert Tips:

  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

FAQs

How do you pronounce Muhammara?

Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

How Many Calories?

This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

Is This Recipe Spicy?

The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

Storage Instructions:

  • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
  • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

  • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
  • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
  • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
  • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
  • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
Print

Muhammara Recipe

Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 176kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
  • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
  • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
  • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
  • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
  • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
  • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
  • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
  • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
  • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
Elote Dip https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/#comments Mon, 01 Jul 2024 20:45:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76149 Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad…]]>

Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad strikes an irresistible balance between heat and tanginess, while Corn Black Bean Salad has all the garden-fresh, zingy undertones you could want in a side dish.

Elote corn dip in a bowl garnished with lime with chips on the side.

What is Elote Dip?

Elote dip is a creamy, corn-based appetizer that gets its flavors from traditional Mexican street corn. This recipe’s original “street food version” starts by grilling corn on the cob and slathering it with a rich mixture of mayonnaise, sour cream, and lime juice. People then sprinkle it with ingredients like cilantro and chili powder to enhance its fresher, spicier notes.

The “dip form” of this recipe takes all of the same ingredients and flavors, transforming it into a scoopable appetizer—often served with a side of tortilla chips, as a condiment for tacos, or on top of other savory mains.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Wondering why this recipe for elote dip is so irresistible? With only a few simple ingredients, this dish packs all the creamy, fresh, and spicy flavors you love in Mexican street food.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Corn: Nearly any type of corn will work in this elote dip recipe. When fresh sweet corn is in season in the summer, I prefer buying it fresh. However, you can also make this dish with canned or frozen corn if it is out-of-season (like when serving it as a part of your Cinco de Mayo spread) or if you want to simplify your meal prep. 
  • Olive oil: We used extra virgin olive oil because of its milder flavor, but you can also use an equal amount of unsalted butter.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: To ensure an even infusion of flavor, finely mince or press your garlic before adding it to your recipe.
  • Mayonnaise: Most recipes for this sweet corn dip use mayo as the base when making the creamy elote dressing. However, if you want a more decadent option, you can also make this Mexican corn dip with cream cheese instead, though your recipe will likely have a thicker consistency.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream is vital to this recipe’s cool tanginess. However, you can make a more authentic elote dip recipe with Mexican crema or use plain Greek yogurt for a lighter version.
  • Fresh lime juice and zest
  • Seasonings: I opted for a basic mix of kosher salt, ground pepper, and chili powder to season my elote dip. However, you can use an authentic Mexican Tajin seasoning or Trader Joe’s Everything But the Elote Seasoning Blend (affiliate link) for a zestier, more robust chili taste. And if you like your dip spicier, a pinch of cayenne pepper would be a welcome addition.
  • Red onion: If you prefer a milder “onion” flavor, use green onions instead of red for this recipe.
  • Jalapeno: One fresh, finely chopped jalapeno is all you need to add fresh heat to this elote cheese dip. Though I prefer removing the seeds from my jalapenos before cutting, you can achieve a spicier blend by leaving some seeds in.
  • Cotija cheese or queso fresco: These two kinds of cheese are classic choices for this dip, but almost any Mexican cheese will work. Though not traditional, you can also use feta cheese, pepper jack cheese, or Parmesan cheese if you’re in a pinch.
  • Cilantro: Fresh, chopped cilantro is an easy way to give your dip a touch of freshness and color, but you can substitute it for parsley or omit it altogether if preferred.

How to Make Street Corn Dip?

This easy elote dip comes together in five simple steps, making it a boon for first-time cooks and expert chefs alike.

A collage of images showing how to make elote dip.
  1. Saute the corn: Pour the olive oil into a large, heavy-bottom skillet and heat over medium-high heat. Add the sweet corn kernels and, stirring frequently, saute until they turn a light golden color (7-10 minutes). Note: You may need to saute your corn in two batches to ensure you don’t overcrowd the skillet. Then, add the garlic to the pan and saute for 30 seconds, stirring constantly. Remove the garlic-corn mixture from the skillet, set it aside, and let it cool for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Make the dressing: Add the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and ground pepper to a large mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  3. Assemble the dip: Add the cooled corn, red onion, jalapeno, and cilantro to the bowl with the dressing. Toss to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.
  4. Serve: Transfer the dip to a serving bowl, garnish with cotija cheese, and serve with a side of your favorite chips.

How to Serve this Mexican Street Corn Dip Recipe?

One of the best parts about this easy Mexican street corn dip is its versatility. It’s good enough to eat with a spoon, but you can also pair it with countless other dishes to make a flavorful, filling meal.

  • Chips on the side: An undeniable crowd-pleaser, this elote chip dip makes the perfect party appetizer when served alongside a bowl of tortilla chips. (Warning: Don’t expect to have any leftovers!)
  • Tacos and burritos: This creamy elote dip tastes amazing with taco recipes, balancing their savory flavor with a bright, smooth tang. In particular, I love serving it with juicy Flank Steak Tacos, smoky Brisket Tacos, and vegan Black Bean Quinoa Tacos. You can even use this easy dip as a burrito topping for an equally delicious Mexican meal.
  • Vegetable platter: Another delectable way to enjoy this roasted street corn dip is one of the healthiest. Serve this creamy dish alongside a platter of fresh veggies—especially bell peppers, carrot sticks, and cherry tomatoes—for an equally delicious and colorful snack platter.
  • Salads and taco bowls: This recipe is more than a tasty dip. When mixed into taco bowls and salads, it also makes a delicious elote salsa.
  • Grilled seafood: In the mood for a light, seaside menu? This easy elote corn makes an incredible topping for dozens of fresh fish mains, whether you’re craving savory-sweet Grilled Mahi Mahi, umami-rich Grilled Sockeye Salmon, or smoky Grilled Shrimp.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to make the best Mexican street corn dip recipe with these tasty tips. Below, you’ll find out how to prepare this dish just as you like—with maximum flavor and zero hassle.

  • Other ways to cook corn: In the recipe below, I sauteed my corn on the cob because it’s an easy way to achieve rich, tender flavors. However, you can also lend your elotes dip bolder, smokier notes by cooking your corn on the grill or in the oven. Alternatively, you can try Air Fryer Corn on the Cob or cook it in the microwave for a quick, indoor option.
  • Can be served warm, room temperature, or cold: You can serve this dish at any temperature you prefer. When served right away while the corn is still warm, hot elote dip is delicious with chips. Equally, after resting in the fridge for a few hours, its cold version makes a great appetizer.
  • It gets better as it sits: If you have time, I highly recommend making this recipe a day in advance and storing it in the fridge until it’s ready to eat. Just be sure to add fresh, delicate ingredients (like cilantro and cheese) right before serving to maintain their texture and taste.
Person serving a chip with Mexican elote dip.

You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of the classic elote recipe and flavors, you might also like:

If you make this Elote Dip recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Corn elote dip in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Elote Dip Recipe

Tangy, creamy, and smoky, this elote street corn dip will immediately add fresh, Mexican flavor to any menu. The best part is that you can make this authentic dish in less than 30 minutes with only a handful of ingredients!
Course Appetizer, Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 196kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 6 ears of corn husks remove and kernels cut from the cob*, about 4-5 cups
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed

For The Creamy Elote Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Greek yogurt or Mexican crema
  • 3 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Dip:

  • ¼ cup red onion or green onions finely chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and finely chopped
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese or queso fresco
  • cup fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • To cook the corn: In a large heavy-bottom skillet (such a cast iron skillet), heat olive oil over medium-high heat. Add the corn kernels and saute for 7-10 minutes, stirring frequently until lightly golden. Do not overcrowd the skillet. Saute in 2 batches if needed. Add the garlic and saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool for 5-10 minutes.
  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (big enough to mix the whole dip) until thoroughly combined.
  • To assemble: Add the now-cooled corn, onion, jalapeno, cotija cheese, and cilantro to the bowl and toss to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and garnish with more cilantro. Serve with your favorite chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 4 cups of dip that is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Corn: During the summer months, I prefer using fresh sweet corn for this recipe. On the other hand, when corn is not in season, I use canned (and drained corn) or frozen corn kernels. If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it. Either way, you will need 4-5 cups of corn kernels to make this recipe.
  • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your cheese before adding it to your Mexican street dip. Some varieties are saltier than others, so you might alter your seasoning depending on your cheese’s flavor profile. 
  • Adjust spiciness: My recipe for street taco dip is relatively mild, as I remove the seeds of my jalapenos before adding them to my mix. However, if you’re looking for an extra kick of heat, leave some seeds in or add a dash of your favorite hot sauce.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store this elote corn dip recipe in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. I don’t recommend freezing your dip, however, as the extreme temperatures will interfere with the dressing’s texture and taste.

Nutrition

Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/feed/ 1
Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

For The Pita Chips:

  • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

For The Topping:

  • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
  • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
  • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
  • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
  • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
Tahini dressing for nachos.

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
  • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

Optional Add-Ins

For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

  1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
  1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
  2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
  3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
  1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
  2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

FAQs

Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
Print

Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 246kcal

Ingredients

For the toasted pita chips:

  • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Toppings:

  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
  • 2 stalks green onions chopped
  • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • cup tahini shaken well
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
  • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
  • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
  • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
  • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
  • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
  • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
  • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
  • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

Nutrition

Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
Ayran – Turkish Salty Yogurt Drink https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/#comments Wed, 15 May 2024 20:46:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75384 What is Ayran? If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the…]]>

What is Ayran?

If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the popular Turkish yoghurt drink, ayran. It is one of the most popular drinks we serve with any spicy meal, whether kabob or vegetables. Made up of only three ingredients: yogurt, water, and salt, a serving of Turkish ayran is considered one of the best ways to treat yourself on a hot summer day.

A glass of froth ayran in a glass from the front view.

While it originated from Turkey, many Balkan, Central Asia, Middle East, and Mediterranean countries, such as Greece, Bulgaria, Armenia, Iran, Lebanon, and Iraq, also serve this salted yogurt drink with minor variations. For example, the Iranian version of ayran, called doogh, is often served with fresh mint, while the Arabs make a similar version and call it laban. The Greek version, ariani, is also very similar to ayran.

If you are familiar with Indian lassi, you might recognize the similarity in the texture of both drinks. However, unlike ayran, lassi is usually served sweet, often flavored with sugar, honey, or fresh fruit. 

Ayran Ingredients

The good news is that this Turkish yogurt drink recipe uses only 3 simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Plain Yogurt: I recommend using plain whole milk yogurt with no added sugars. You can also use low-fat or no-fat yogurt, but low-fat yogurt may not achieve the traditional creamy consistency. On the other hand, you can use plain Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), but since it is thicker, you will need to use more water to adjust its consistency.
  • Cold Water: To keep this Mediterranean yogurt drink super refreshing, using cold water is essential. Some recipes suggest using ice, but I don’t recommend it as it can dilute the drink, affecting its consistency and texture.
  • Salt: You can use kosher, table, or sea salt. 

Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions:

  • Mint: During the summer months, I usually add a few leaves of chopped fresh mint to my ayran recipe. You can, however, also use dried mint if that is all you have.
  • Sparkling water: Growing up, we never added sparkling water to ayran, but with carbonated drinks becoming more popular, I see many people making this yogurt drink with sparkling water instead of regular water. This simple substitution for water can make it more palatable for people who enjoy carbonated beverages and are looking for a unique twist on the classic Ayran Turkish drink recipe.
  • Cucumber: Again, it’s not traditional, but I’ve seen a few slices of cucumber added as a garnish to make it look appetizing and reiterate that it is a salty drink.

How To Make Turkish Ayran?

The best part about making this Turkish yogurt recipe is that it takes no more than 5 minutes. I prefer a whisk, but you can also use an electric blender. Whipping it up in a blender is especially handy if serving it to a crowd or making a large batch. Below are the steps to make it both ways:

A collage of images showing how to make ayran drink.
  1. Ensure a smooth texture: Place yogurt in a large bowl or measuring cup and whisk until it is smooth and free of lumps. 
  2. Whisk: Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Alternatively, you can put all of the ingredients in a blender and blend until fully combined.
  3. Chill: Tightly cover your yogurt milk drink in a glass bottle with a lid (or stretch film). Store in the fridge until ready to serve or for up to 2 days.
  4. Garnish & serve: Give it a good shake before pouring it into glasses, and garnish with fresh mint leaves if desired.

What To Serve with Ayran?

This Middle Eastern yogurt drink pairs wonderfully with several dishes, especially those with bold flavors and spices. Whether you’re having a meaty feast, a vegetarian delight, or a simple snack, ayran enhances the flavors and provides a refreshing balance to any dish it’s served with. Here are some delicious options to serve alongside this refreshing yogurt drink:

  • Kabobs: Whether you serve Shish Taouk, Chicken Shawarma, Doner Kebab, or Oven-Baked Beef Kabobs, ayran is the perfect accompaniment, providing a cooling and balancing effect.
  • Meat dishes: Popular Turkish dishes like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant (aka Karniyarik), Turkish Kofta Meatballs, Roast Rack of Lamb, Turkish Pasta, or lahmacun pair beautifully with this ayran yoghurt drink. The cold and refreshing drink cut through the richness of these hearty meat dishes (and spicy foods in general), enhancing the overall flavors.
  • Vegetarian Dishes: This drinkable yogurt drink pairs well with vegetarian dishes like Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, Spinach Borek, and Turkish Tabbouleh. Its tangy flavors complement the savoriness of these dishes, adding a refreshing touch to your meal.
  • Snack: If you want to transport yourself to Turkey within seconds, you need to do what Turks do: Serve ayran with simit (also known as Turkish bagel) for a simple yet satisfying snack. The chewy, sesame-coated bread and the cool, salty yogurt drink are delightful at any time of the day.
Middle eastern yogurt drink served in glasses and in a glass jar.

FAQs

What does ayran taste like?

Ayran has a refreshing, tangy flavor with a slight saltiness. The yogurt gives it a creamy texture, while the added water makes it light and easy to drink. 

Are ayran and kefir the same thing?

No, ayran and kefir are not the same things. Kefir is a fermented milk drink made using kefir grains, which contain a mix of bacteria and yeast, while ayran is made by mixing yogurt, water, and salt. They both have a tangy taste, but kefir offers a slightly effervescent texture due to the fermentation process.

What are the benefits of drinking ayran?

The traditional Turkish drink offers several health benefits. Since it is yogurt-based beverage, it is high in protein and a great source of essential nutrients, including calcium, potassium, and vitamin B12. Additionally, its salt content can help replenish electrolytes lost through sweat, making it particularly beneficial during hot weather or after physical activity. Lastly, the yogurt in ayran provides probiotics, improving gut health and aiding digestion.

Other Must-Try Turkish Recipes

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

A glass of Ayran Turkish yogurt drink from the front view.
Print

Ayran Recipe – Turkish Yogurt Drink

Enjoy the deliciously refreshing Ayran, a Turkish salted yogurt drink made from yogurt, water, and a pinch of salt. Serve it as an accompaniment to your favorite kabobs and meat dishes, or treat yourself to a healthy midday snack to cool off on a hot day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups whole milk plain yogurt unsweetened
  • 1 cup cold water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add-Ins

  • A few leaves fresh mint chopped or dried mint

Instructions

  • Place yogurt in a bowl and whisk until smooth and no lumps remain.
  • Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined and the texture is creamy and smooth.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • If preferred, add in some chopped mint for flavor. Pour into a glass jar, cover tightly with a lid, and chill until ready to serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of ayran, ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using whole milk yogurt, you can also use low- or nonfat yogurt, though it won’t be as creamy. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you should use more water (about 1/2 to 3/4 cup) to get the right consistency. 
  • Storage: This yogurt drink will keep fresh in the fridge for up to 2-3 days as long as it is kept in an airtight container (such as a glass jar with a tight-fitting lid). Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Foam on top: The ayran served in most kebab restaurants has a layer of foam on top, filled with visible air bubbles. Many Turkish people consider frothy ayran a sign of freshness and consider it the best part of the drink. When making it at home, the way to achieve bubbles on top is to whisk or shake it vigorously.
  • Adjust consistency and taste: The ideal yogurt-to-water ratio is 2 to 1. In other words, to make 4 servings of this yogurt drink, I use 2 cups of yogurt and 1 cup of water. However, you can adjust the consistency to your preference by adding more or less of each ingredient. The same goes for the amount of salt you use.
  • Serve it chilled: This drink is best served cold. For the best results, make a batch and store it in a glass jar in the fridge. You can also put the ingredients in a cocktail shaker with a few ice cubes, shake it vigorously, and strain it into a glass. Be sure to strain out the ice to avoid diluting the drink.
  • Keep it in the fridge: Since ayran is a dairy-based drink, it should be stored in the fridge (At or below 40°F (4°C)) to prevent bacterial growth and spoilage.

Nutrition

Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 205mg | Potassium: 190mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 0.1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/feed/ 1
Seed Crackers https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/ https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/#comments Tue, 12 Mar 2024 12:20:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74092 If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want…]]>

If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want to try more gluten-free recipes, I highly recommend whipping up my protein-packed Seed and Nut Bread—an ideal pick for an easy breakfast or a quick midday snack. Or, try out my Buckwheat Millet Bread for a foolproof loaf that tastes as good by itself as it does when topped with your favorite jam.

Person cracking seed crackers on a sheet pan.

Ingredients You Will Need

In my opinion, the best way to make healthy crackers is by using this tasty variety of seeds. These simple ingredients—many of which are also superfoods!—are delicious, nutritious, and usually available at the local grocery store.

Ingredients for healthy crackers recipe in small bowls.
  • Chia seeds: Packed with fiber, protein, and antioxidants, chia seeds are a must-have ingredient in this recipe for crackers with seeds. Not only do they have a mild nuttiness that’s undeniably delicious, but they’re also helpful in supporting bone health and aiding weight loss.
  • Raw & Unsalted Sunflower seeds: One of the most classic types of seeds, sunflower seeds lend these homemade crackers a nuanced sweetness and delicate crunch—but that’s not all! Sunflower seeds also transform this basic recipe into “anti-inflammatory crackers,” as their high levels of vitamin E and other plant compounds help reduce inflammation and boost heart health. When selecting sunflower seeds for this recipe, look for all-natural, raw ones to ensure they don’t have any added salt.
  • Unsalted Pumpkin seeds: Pumpkin seeds are also a great source of healthy fats, magnesium, antioxidants, and fiber, which may have other beneficial effects, such as regulating blood sugars and getting a good night’s sleep. I recommend buying pumpkin seeds that don’t have any additional salt—in other words, look for raw pumpkin seeds when shopping for this recipe.
  • Sesame seeds: Crunchy and buttery, sesame seeds taste fantastic in this recipe’s seed mixture. However, they also boast a range of other health benefits. For example, their high levels of B vitamins, calcium, and protein contribute to good vascular, muscular, and nerve health.
  • Ground flaxseeds (aka Flax meal): Flaxseeds are among the greatest superfoods to eat when you want to boost your digestive health. In particular, they contain high levels of fiber and omega-3 fatty acids that help relieve constipation and promote digestive regularity. During my recipe research, I found variations of this recipe where others used whole flaxseeds, but I chose to use ground flaxseeds (AKA flax meal) because they’re easier to digest and help work as a binder—similar to how flour works in bread recipes. Other versions may also use psyllium husk as a binder, but I found this unnecessary, given my use of ground flax seeds.
  • Hemp seeds: The addition of hemp seeds gives these seed crackers earthy and nutty undertones. This tiny seed also contains essential nutrients and minerals, such as fatty acids and manganese, which help maintain healthy skin, joints, and bones through collagen production.
  • Kosher or sea salt: Salt helps with flavoring the crackers and helps them achieve more of a store-bought savory flavor, so do not skip it.
  • Olive oil: I used olive oil to give these crackers their rich, full-bodied taste and golden-brown exterior, but you could also use avocado oil if preferred.
  • Water: If you’ve seen other seeded crackers recipes, you might find that some ask you to use boiling water—particularly when making psyllium husk crackers. However, I’ve found that the temperature of your water doesn’t affect seed crackers that don’t use psyllium husk as a binder. Therefore, room-temperature water will work just as well as warm water when following my flaxseed cracker recipe.

Variations with Optional Add-Ins

One bite of these sunflower seed crackers, and you’ll want to whip up a batch every week. Once you get the hang of it, you can even put your own spin on this basic recipe, giving it nutty, herby, or even cheesy undertones. The following are just a few of my go-to additions:

  • Seasonings and herbs: If you want to give your crunchy seed crackers bright, garden-fresh notes, I highly recommend adding some of your favorite herbs, like dried rosemary or thyme. Or, if you want a more robustly flavored chip, seasonings like garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and paprika will lend your seed cracker recipe irresistibly savory flavors. You can even make an easy everything bagel crackers recipe by adding a pinch of everything bagel seasoning!
  • Nuts: Filling, protein-packed, and oh-so-delicious, nuts make a great addition to this seeded cracker recipe. Depending on your desired flavor profile, I recommend using finely chopped nuts such as walnuts, pecans, or pistachios. You can also use a few tablespoons of almond flour (or even Homemade Almond Flour!) to reduce your prep time while still getting that classic “nut and seed crackers” taste. No matter which nuts you use, just be sure to use less of another dry ingredient to ensure a consistent ratio of wet-to-dry additions.
  • Nutritional yeast: No one can resist the savory, rich taste of a cheesy cracker. Simply add a bit of nutritional yeast to your recipe to give it a cheesy—yet vegan-friendly!—flavor.

How to Make Seed Crackers?

If you’ve never tried making crackers at home, you’re in luck! It’s a cinch to make these healthy crackers, and my step-by-step instructions will ensure they always come out with that satisfying “crunch.”

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.), line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
A collage of images showing how to make seed crackers.
  1. Mix the dry ingredients: Add the chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt to a large mixing bowl. Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  2. Add the wet ingredients: Pour the olive oil and water into the same bowl and stir to combine. Let the mixture sit for five minutes—but no more than 7-8 minutes—until it thickens slightly. Too much resting time will result in an overly thick cracker.
  3. Transfer to pan: Scoop the mixture onto the prepared baking tray and use an offset spatula or large spoon to spread it into a single, even layer. Alternatively, you can place another piece of parchment paper on top of the mixture and spread it with your hands.
Freshly baked crackers on a baking sheet from the top view.
  1. Bake: Bake the sesame seed crackers in the preheated oven for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn a light brown. Then, remove them from the oven and let the crackers cool before serving.

How to Store & Freeze?

One of the best parts about this gluten-free cracker recipe is its easy storage. With long-lasting crispiness and hearty flavor, these crackers will stay fresh whether you store them in the pantry or the freezer.

  • Store: These keto seeded crackers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
  • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze your crackers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make the seed chips more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

Ways to Serve These Seeded Crackers

Homemade crackers are a must-try for anyone who loves versatility in their snacks. While they’re absolutely wonderful by themselves (literally, they’re such a great stand-alone snack!), they also make a fantastic spread when paired with other tasty recipes.

  • Dips: Easy, filling, and nutritious, this sesame crackers recipe makes a great snack alongside classic Mediterranean dips. Hummus is a zesty, creamy classic that pairs great with the earthy undertones of this easy cracker. You can also serve your recipe with smokier, savory-sweet dips, like Baba Ganoush or Muhammara.
  • Serve it as a flatbread: My favorite way to enjoy this recipe for seed crackers is as a flatbread topped with avocado, sliced eggs, and pickled red onions. You can also spread this cracker with cream cheese and smoked salmon for a quick morning fix. Or, if you’re in the mood for a sweeter variation, try spreading your crackers with nut butters, like peanut butter or almond butter, for a satisfying yet healthy dessert.
  • Cheese: No one can resist a five-star Meat and Cheese Board brimming with crisp crackers, flavorful cheeses, and savory meats. These multi-seed crackers make the perfect addition to any charcuterie board, but if you’re short on time, they also make an unbelievably delicious pairing with your favorite cheese.
  • Topping for salads: This sesame seed cracker recipe is the ultimate choice when you want to add a light crunch to your salad. You can crumble these crackers on top of any bowl of greens, from a sweet and tangy Apple Kale Slaw to a creamy Cauliflower Broccoli Salad.
  • With soups: Healthier and more flavorful than oyster crackers, these pumpkin seed crackers are an excellent topping for soup when crushed into small, crunchy bits. I especially love using this cracker recipe with my smooth-yet-zingy Carrot and Ginger Soup and creamily spiced Sweet Potato Soup.
Avocado and egg toast made using homemade crackers with seeds.

Expert Tips

These gluten-free seed crackers are a foolproof recipe for beginners and experienced chefs alike. Check out the below pro-level tips for the crunchiest, most flavorful crackers, regardless of your skill level.

  • Rest timing: Though resting is essential in making this recipe, don’t let the mixture rest for more than five minutes. Too much resting time will cause the chia seeds to swell, giving you a “doughier” mix that’s harder to spread. As a result, your seed crackers will be thicker and less crisp.
  • Spread it evenly: Even spreading is vital to ensuring your super seed crackers come out with a thin, crisp, and uniform texture. You can use a spatula, a spoon, or the back of a ramekin to spread your mixture effectively. Or, for easier clean-up, you can also place an additional sheet of parchment paper on top of the cracker mixture and use your hands (or a rolling pin) to press it into an even layer—as long as you remove this second piece of parchment paper before baking, of course.
  • Sheet pan size: I suggest using an 18 x 13-inch pan to make these chia crackers, as this large pan size will allow for a very thin layer of batter. However, if your baking sheets are smaller, I recommend baking your crackers in two batches to ensure the mixture doesn’t lay too thickly.
  • Parchment paper: Lining your sheet pan is critical to easy cracker removal post-baking. If you’re a baker, you can also use a silpat to line your pan due to its reusable, non-stick silicone base.
  • Cutting: I usually choose to “cut” this multi-seed crackers recipe by cracking it, giving each cracker a rustic, aesthetically pleasing shape. However, you can also use a pizza cutter or a sharp knife to cut individual crackers if you prefer a less hands-on splitting method. If you want more uniformly shaped crackers, remove them halfway through baking and score the sheet with a sharp knife. That way, your keto crackers will split into more uniform portions once fully cooked.

FAQs

Have more questions about this healthy cracker recipe? This handy FAQ has everything you need, from nutritional information to term definitions.

What are seed crackers?

Seed crackers are a crispy, thin “flatbread” type of cracker that uses seeds—sesame, pumpkin, sunflower, chia, and more—as its primary base. In addition to these seeds, this cracker often uses other natural ingredients, like salt, water, and herbs, to give it texture and taste. These low-carb crackers also tend to be gluten-free, paleo-, and keto-friendly, as they use flour-alternative binders, like psyllium husk or ground flaxseeds. Furthermore, they often have a greater nutritional content due to their seeds’ high levels of fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants.

What’s the difference between seeded crackers and Norwegian flatbread crackers?

Also known as Norwegian crispbread, Norwegian flatbread crackers are similar to seeded crackers due to their thin, crispy consistency and several core ingredients. However, the Norwegian variation—popular at specialty grocery stores like Trader Joe’s—is thinner and more delicate, and it also includes ingredients like oat flakes, rice bran, sugar, and rye flour. Meanwhile, seed crackers don’t traditionally include flour, and they boast a slightly thicker, seed-based body.

Are flaxseed crackers healthy?

Definitely—in moderation, of course! Unlike store-bought crackers, this healthy crackers recipe includes nutrient-rich superfoods, like chia and sesame seeds, which have higher levels of protein and fewer carbs than flour-based alternatives. 

How many calories in a seeded cracker?

There are approximately 204 calories in each of these seed crackers.

If you try this Seed Crackers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Person cracking freshly made seeded crackers from the top view.
Print

Seed Crackers Recipe

Once you try these superfood-packed homemade crispy seed crackers, you’ll never want to buy crackers from the store again. This easy cracker recipe is vegan, gluten-free, low-carb, nut-free, and keto-friendly. Serve it as a snack, in place of bread (for avocado toast), or as a crunchy topping for salads and soups.
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American, American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 204kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup chia seeds
  • ¼ cup sunflower seeds raw and unsalted
  • ¼ cup pumpkin seeds raw and unsalted
  • ¼ cup sesame seeds both white or black sesame seeds would work
  • ¼ cup ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal)
  • 3 tablespoons hemp seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt or sea salt
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 cup water

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, combine chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt. Stir to combine.
  • Pour in olive oil and water. Mix to combine. Let it sit for 5 minutes or until it is slightly thickened (gel-like consistency.) Do not let it sit for more than 7-8 minutes, or otherwise, your crackers will be thicker.
  • Transfer the mixture to the prepared sheet and spread it evenly throughout the sheet pan using an offset spatula or a large spoon. Alternatively, you can place another parchment paper on top and spread it using your hands or a rolling pin.
  • Bake for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn light brown. Remove from the oven and let it cool before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a large sheet of crackers, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per cracker.
  • Source: This recipe has been adapted from my dear friend Alexandra of Occasionally Eggs’ wonderful cookbook. I made a few minor changes to her original recipe, but all credit goes to her.
  • Water: Some versions of this multi-seed crackers recipe use boiling water. I tested it using both boiling and room-temperature water and decided that room-temperature water works just fine.
  • Make it your own: After you make this recipe (as written) a few times, feel free to experiment with different flavors by adding other ingredients like poppy seeds, fennel seeds, garlic powder, onion powder, nutritional yeast, and more.
  • Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
  • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze leftovers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make them more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

Nutrition

Calories: 204kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/feed/ 21
Shredded Chicken Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/#comments Tue, 06 Feb 2024 16:36:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16128 No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the…]]>

No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the next level. In that case, you can pair it with dozens of other delectable Mexican recipes, such as my creamy Basic Guacamole Recipe or my sweet-and-spicy Easy Street Corn.

Or, if you’re in the mood for another savory and succulent meat dish, my Slow Roasted Chicken Wings strike the perfect balance between crispy, flavorful skin and tender meat. No matter what you choose, you can easily spice up the day with a pitcher of my Easy Pineapple Margarita Recipe.

Pulled chicken nachos garnished with corn, avocados, and tomatoes on a sheet pan.

Chicken Nachos Ingredients

There’s no need to empty out your wallet to make this easy shredded chicken nachos recipe. You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this authentically delectable, restaurant-quality dish.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Chicken: Nearly any shredded chicken would work when making pulled chicken for nachos, whether you want to use boneless chicken thighs or boneless chicken breasts. In terms of preparation, I roasted my chicken in the oven with a coating of spices, then shredded them while warm to achieve the most attuned seasoning profile. However, if you prefer a more hands-free method, you can also make nachos with rotisserie chicken or cook your chicken in a crock pot.
    You can even use leftover chicken if you have some on hand or make a grilled chicken nachos recipe for a smokier, summer-fresh flavor. Regardless of your cooking process, just be sure you have 4-5 cups of shredded chicken before assembling your nachos. That being said, however, you can also substitute this recipe’s chicken for sauteed ground beef if you’d prefer a savorier, more pronounced meat flavor.
  • Oil: Though I use olive oil to cook chicken for nachos, any other flavorless vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, would work.
  • Seasoning: I’ve found that the best seasoning for chicken nachos is a basic, smoky, and piquant mix of chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper. Alternatively, you can use your favorite pre-made taco seasoning if you’re in the mood for a quicker seasoning solution.
  • Enchilada sauce: Though an optional addition, I love adding enchilada sauce to my shredded chicken nachos, as it adds a savory, light richness to the mixture. You can use any store-bought brand you prefer (my favorite is Siete Red Enchilada Sauce -affiliate link) or make your enchilada sauce from scratch.
  • Tortilla chips: When selecting a chip for this chicken nacho bake, I highly recommend picking thick, sturdy, restaurant-style tortilla chips. This chip style better withstands baking and won’t get as soggy as other varieties. Furthermore, if you have the time, you can also make homemade tortilla chips for a fresher, more customizable taste. However, I don’t recommend making chicken nachos with Doritos and any other commercially seasoned chips, as they are relatively flimsy and won’t withstand the moisture of the wetter ingredients.
  • Cheese: To ensure an even distribution of cheese throughout your nachos, you must use shredded cheese. I use Monterey Jack cheese due to its buttery flavor and highly meltable composition. However, you can use Pepper Jack cheese, mozzarella, or Colby Jack, as well, to achieve a spicier, creamier, or tangier flavor profile. Or, you can even use a blend of cheeses for a more full-bodied taste, with some of my favorites being a Mexican blend cheese and Cheddar Jack (a mix of cheddar cheese and Monterey Jack).
  • Black beans: Black beans are a great way to add a tender, mildly sweetheartiness to chicken and cheese nachos. Don’t have any black beans in the pantry? You can use pinto beans instead, giving your nachos a creamier, earthier taste.

What to Put on Chicken Nachos?

The sky’s the limit when it comes to toppings and customizing this loaded chicken nachos recipe. However, these classic toppings—zesty, creamy, and bright—are my favorite ingredients to give this dish an authentic Mexican taste.

Topping ideas for homemade nachos with chicken from the top view.
  • Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes: This easy salsa recipe is my go-to when making easy chicken nachos. Not only does this sauce boast robustly bright flavors, but it also comes together in just ten minutes! No time to make salsa? Sliced or diced tomatoes would also work.
  • Guacamole: Creamy, garlicky, and tangy, guacamole is a no-brainer when it comes to nachos. One taste of this simple side and the entire bowl will disappear in seconds.
  • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of heat, jalapenos are just what you need to lend a kick of spice to your chicken cheese nachos. If you prefer a crisper, fresher, and more colorful topping, I recommend using fresh jalapeños. However, if you’re in the mood for a softer texture and a more tart flavor, pickled jalapenos are the way to go.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream—smooth, light, and tangy—makes an excellent addition to the savory, meatier base of this Mexican chicken nachos recipe. Serve this ingredient as a dippable side or a dollop on top, and your guests will be licking their fingers clean.
  • Corn: This mildly sweet and tender addition adds a beautiful pop of color to these sheet pan nachos.
  • Olives: If you’ve ever found yourself reaching for the table salt to add extra flavor to your meal, this ingredient is for you. Black olives are briny, salty, and brilliant at giving these chicken nachos a savory depth. 
  • Squeeze of lime juice: My favorite way to balance the hearty composition of pulled chicken nachos is to add a little bit of lime juice to the mixture. This addition adds a bright, acidic element to the recipe, ensuring every ingredient comes to life.
  • Mexican Pickled Red Onions: Tangy, citrusy, and oh-so-flavorful, pickled onions are a great way to enliven your nachos with equal tenderness and crunch.

How to Make Chicken Nachos with Shredded Chicken?

There’s a reason why this easy nachos recipe is such a classic. My step-by-step instructions take the stress out of menu planning, requiring minimal effort and zero hassle. If you are using leftover or rotisserie chicken, you can skip the first six steps and start assembling your nachos.

  1. Prep the oven: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to prepare and cook chicken to make nachos.
  1. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken, then transfer them onto a baking sheet. I use a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet (also known as a half-sheet pan) to fit all my poultry comfortably.
  2. Season the chicken: Drizzle the chicken with olive oil and sprinkle both sides with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
  3. Bake: Add the seasoned chicken to the oven and let it roast for 15-20 minutes or until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F.
  4. Shred: Remove the cooked chicken from the oven, then shred it using two forks.
Images showing how to assemble shredded chicken, tortilla chips and cheese to make nachos.
  1. Add enchilada sauce (optional step): Drizzle the shredded chicken with the enchilada sauce, and broil the mixture for two minutes. When done, remove the chicken from the oven and set it aside.
  2. Prepare the baking sheet: Turn down the oven’s temperature to 350 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  3. Assemble the first layer: Spread your first layer of tortilla chips on the lined pan. Top them off with half of the shredded cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken.
  4. Build the second layer: Place a second layer of chips on top of the first, followed by the remaining black beans and shredded chicken.
  5. Bake: Put the chicken nachos in the oven and bake them for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese melts thoroughly.
Chicken cheese nachos topped of with nacho toppings from the top view.
  1. Add the toppings: Top off your baked nachos with your preferred toppings and serve while still hot.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat? 

It’s no secret that homemade chicken nachos—crunchy, flavorful, and melty—taste best on the day you make them. Therefore, I recommend assembling the dish right before serving to achieve maximum crispiness.

Need more time for day-of preparation? Not to worry: These expert make-ahead and storage tips will ensure you can cut your prep time in half and don’t have to forfeit a single bite of this chicken nacho recipe.

  • Make ahead: The best way to kickstart your meal prep is by making the shredded chicken for nachos ahead of time and cooking and shredding it in advance. That way, you only need to assemble and bake the nachos just before you want to serve it. Also, you can plan out and prepare your toppings ahead of time to simplify serving the day of.
  • Storage: To store your pulled chicken nachos, first let them come to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film. You can then put them in the fridge until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. I also suggest removing any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness. Then, you can re-add them to the nachos when ready to serve.

What Tastes Good with Chicken Nachos? 

Versatile, snackable, and utterly irresistible, chicken black bean nachos are one of the best dishes to make if you love putting your unique spin on new recipes. Below, I’ve assembled essential recipes to serve with your savory bake, transforming this simple dish into a five-star menu.

  • Dips and salsas: One of the most iconic pairings, salsa exquisitely balances the heartier base of roast chicken nachos with light, bright, and tomatoey flavors. Pico de gallo is an effortless go-to for this dish, though you can also add notes of tropical, juicy flavors by making my Pineapple Mango Salsa or Peach Salsa. Or, you can whip up an easy Hummus Dip for an even creamier, umami-rich condiment.
  • Tacos: When you think of Mexican cuisine, chances are you immediately think of tacos—a savory, fresh, and flavor-filled dish anyone can customize to their liking. With my recipe for Brisket Tacos, you can fill your plate with smoky, melt-in-your-mouth flavors. Or, try pairing your nachos with Quinoa Black Bean Tacos for a vegan-friendly dish that has all the zesty, creamy taste you could want from your favorite Mexican food.
  • Salads: Want to add a lighter, more nutritious edge to your nachos? Serve them alongside a bowl of Black Bean and Corn Salad for a zesty, veggie-packed side, or spoon out a serving of Mexican Street Corn Salad (AKA “esquites”) for a dish that’s equal parts spicy, tangy, and creamy.
  • Margaritas: What party menu is complete without a sweet, boozy treat? My Easy Pineapple Margarita and Blueberry Margaritas are just what you need to give this classic drink a sweet, fruity spin. You can even blend up a Strawberry Basil Margarita to balance your juicier notes with a gourmet, herby finish.
Person with a chunk of pioneer woman nachos in her hand.

Expert Tips

Authentic Mexican chicken nachos are at your fingertips when learning from these pro-level tips. Below, you’ll find everything you need to make crisp, gooey, and savory nachos, from proper layering to serving suggestions.

  • Layer evenly: When making sheet pan chicken nachos, it’s vital that you evenly distribute the cheese across the chips to prevent uneven and/or soggy nachos. If you plan on making more than two layers, I recommend keeping the middle layer to a minimum (except for the cheese, of course!). I also suggest draining your black beans and chicken before adding them to your nachos to keep them from becoming soggy.
  • Don’t skimp on shredded cheese: The secret to making restaurant-style nachos is to be generous when it comes to the cheese. Though four cups of cheese may sound like a lot, it’s the key to giving each chip a balance of crisp, gooey, and rich flavors so you don’t end up with bland or topping-less bites in your final dish.
  • Make it your own: The beauty of making homemade nachos with chicken is that you can customize it any way you like. Use this easy recipe as a starting place, and then feel free to mix and match the dish with what you have on hand. Remember, too, that this recipe is pretty forgiving, so it’s up to you what you want to add to your mixture.
  • Drain properly: I think it’s safe to say that no one enjoys soggy nachos. Therefore, the best way to prevent sogginess is to thoroughly drain each of your ingredients (besides the cheese and chips) before layering them into your recipe. In particular, I recommend draining the shredded chicken, beans, and wet toppings before making this simple chicken nachos recipe.
  • Add the toppings right before serving: For best results, I recommend adding your fresher toppings to your dish right before serving. Otherwise, these additions (like guacamole or pico de gallo) may lose their texture and flavor, resulting in a wet, flavorless layer.
  • Serve right away: Gooey, succulent, and flavorful, baked chicken nachos taste stellar when they’re warm. That’s why I always suggest serving this dish immediately when the cheese is still melty, and the ingredients are hot.

FAQs

You don’t have to be a professional Mexican chef to make chicken nachos in the oven. I answer all your remaining questions in this easy guide, ensuring your dish comes out exquisitely layered and delightfully crisp.

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

The best chicken nachos recipe is one that doesn’t turn soggy after adding your favorite toppings. To ensure your nachos remain as dry and crisp as possible, fully drain all the ingredients—besides the cheese and the chips—before adding them to your recipe. You may also consider keeping any wet ingredients to a minimum to reduce their chances of releasing excess liquid. Finally, using a sturdy chip—such as a restaurant-style tortilla chip—is the key to reducing sogginess, as they tend to be thicker and less absorbent than other varieties.

What order do you layer nachos in?

In general, I recommend beginning each layer of your nachos with chips, topped with cheese, and other heat-friendly toppings (such as black beans). Then, each layer should have the same combination of chips, cheese, and beans. After removing your nachos from the oven, you may then add your fresh toppings—such as guacamole and tomatoes—to ensure they maintain their flavor and texture. Despite these instructions, however, remember that this dish is highly forgiving, so don’t worry if you miss an ingredient in a layer or want to play around with your ingredients.

Other Game Day Recipes You Might Also Like

Once you learn how to make shredded chicken nachos, you’ll be itching for more tasty dishes to serve at your next game-day party. These lip-smacking recipes will ensure everyone gets their fill with a perfectly savory, seasoned, and snackable taste.

If you try this Shredded Chicken Nachos recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Sheet-Pan Chicken Nachos Recipe Photographed from the top view from a closer view.
Print

Healthy Game Day Recipe Idea – Shredded Chicken Nachos

Here is a reader-favorite football food recipe idea: Tortilla chips layered with cheese, black beans, tomatoes, avocado, and other veggies for a drool worthy Shredded Chicken Nachos perfect for any party. Take it out of the oven, serve warm, and accept the compliments.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 998kcal

Ingredients

For The Chicken

  • 1 ½ lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 1/2 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup enchilada sauce

For The Nachos

  • 8 cups tortilla chips
  • 4 cups shredded Monterey Jack cheese or mozzarella
  • 1 14 oz can black beans, drained and rinsed

As Toppings (optional)

  • 1 cup guacamole
  • 1 cup tomatoes diced or sliced
  • 1 cup fresh or canned corn drained if using canned
  • 1/4 cup jalapenos fresh/sliced or pickled

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees.
  • Pat dry chicken with paper towels. Transfer them onto a baking sheet (I used a half-sheet—AKA a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet.).
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper on both sides.
  • Roast in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Remove from the oven. Shred the now-cooked chicken using two forks.
  • Drizzle them with the enchilada sauce and broil for 2 minutes. Remove from the oven and set it aside.*
  • Turn the oven temperature down to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread tortilla chips on a sheet pan in a single layer. Top them off with half of the cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken ensuring that they are distributed evenly.
  • Continue with a second layer of chips, cheese, beans, and shredded chicken.
  • Bake for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese is fully melted.
  • Right before serving, top it off with your favorite nacho toppings and serve while still hot.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields nachos that is ideal for 8 servings when served as an appetizer. The below calorie information is per serving and does not include any of the optional toppings.
  • Chicken: While we roasted the chicken to make nachos, this recipe would also work with any cooked leftover chicken or store-bought rotisserie chicken. All you have to do is to shred it before assembling. You’ll need about 4-5 cups of shredded chicken to make this easy chicken nachos recipe. Additionally, if you are cooking your own chicken, you can use skinless chicken breasts instead of chicken thighs as well.
  • Enchilada Sauce: Broiling chicken with enchilada sauce is an optional step and can be skipped if you want to make it faster or you do not have enchilada sauce on hand. 
  • Drain: To prevent your nachos from becoming soggy, be sure to drain black beans very well before layering with chips and cheese.
  • Make Ahead: This recipe tastes best on the day that it is made. However, you can make the chicken ahead of time and have it ready for assembly. Once you have the chicken cooked, all you need to do is to layer it as written in the recipe.
  • Storage: Before refrigerating your nachos, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film or aluminum foil and store them in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Reheat: We recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. Be sure to remove any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness.

Nutrition

Calories: 998kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 60g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 16g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 1213mg | Potassium: 608mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1128IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 560mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/feed/ 15
Air Fryer Chestnuts https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/#comments Wed, 03 Jan 2024 21:01:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73027 If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there…]]>

If you’re like me, you can’t resist eating these delicious air fryer chestnuts the moment you peel them. However, there are countless other ways to use this delectable recipe—a handy way to make the most of the chestnut season. Air fryer roasted chestnuts make an excellent base for my silky Chestnut Cream Soup, and they fit flawlessly into any Christmas dinner when you prepare my five-star Chestnut Dressing. Or, try whipping up my Chestnut Puree Recipe for an irresistibly creamy dish perfect for pastries, parfaits, and so much more.

Air fryer roasted chestnuts on a kitchen cloth.

Ingredients

When it comes to recipes with simple ingredients, air fried chestnuts are hands-down the easiest for your grocery list. All you need to make this toasty dish is one ingredient: chestnuts!

However, as with all one-ingredient recipes, the key to getting the best results is to begin with high-quality chestnuts. Here are just a few things to keep in mind when selecting your nuts:

Fresh chesnuts from the top view.
  • Type of chestnuts: For this recipe, I highly recommend using Italian chestnuts (also known as European chestnuts) or American chestnuts, as they peel easily and are altogether easier to work with. Chinese chestnuts—the most popular variety in Asia—also taste good, but I find that they are harder to peel, so I don’t suggest using them in this recipe.
  • Choose equally sized chestnuts: If possible, try to hand-pick chestnuts of an equal size, as they’ll roast the most evenly in the air fryer.
  • Ensure your chestnuts are of high quality: When looking for chestnuts, try to find ones that are smooth, plump, and shiny—especially those without blemishes or mold. I also encourage you to handle the chestnuts in your hand to ensure the skin isn’t dry.
  • Where to buy: You should be able to find fresh chestnuts in most U.S. grocery stores. However, they also crop up in farmer’s markets during fall and winter, should you prefer a locally grown alternative.
  • Avoid chestnut mix-ups: Though similar in name, be careful not to accidentally purchase horse chestnuts (which are toxic) or water chestnuts. These two are not the same as regular chestnuts and will drastically change the taste and texture of your recipe.

How to Prepare Chestnuts for Cooking in the Air Fryer?

Proper preparation is a must when getting ready to air fry chestnuts. These three steps will ensure your nuts are clean, tasty, and easily peelable when they come out of the air fryer.

A collage of images showing how to prepare chestnuts for air air frying.
  1. Rinse the chestnuts: Add the raw chestnuts to a colander and rinse them under cold running water. Drain them when thoroughly rinsed.
  2. Score: Lay the flat side of a chestnut on a cutting board, ensuring the rounded side (AKA the belly side) faces up. Hold the chestnut firmly with one hand and use the other to cut horizontally across the rounded face with a sharp paring knife or chestnut knife. Then, rotate the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an “X” on its top. Repeat the scoring process for the remaining chestnuts, trying not to score their inner skin.
  3. Soak chestnuts: Transfer the cut chestnuts to a bowl, cover them with cold tap water, and let them rest for 30-60 minutes.

How to Roast Chestnuts in an Air Fryer?

Air frying chestnuts is a great way to enjoy nutty, easy-to-peel treats in no time. With this easy cooking method, your chestnuts will be on the table in less than 20 minutes.

  1. Prepare your air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to cook chestnuts in air fryer.
  1. Dry the chestnuts: Drain the soaked chestnuts, transfer them to a clean kitchen towel, and dry them as much as possible. Alternatively, you may line a baking sheet with paper towels and pat them dry.
  2. Fill the air fryer basket: Arrange the scored chestnuts in your air fryer basket so that their cut sides face up. Be careful not to overcrowd the basket, as your nuts should fit comfortably in a single layer. If necessary, you may air fry your chestnuts in two batches to ensure proper air circulation.
  3. Cook the chestnuts: Roast the chestnuts in the air fryer for 17 minutes, shaking the basket once or twice during their cooking time.
  4. Steam the cooked chestnuts: Once roasted, transfer the (very hot!) chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Draw the edges of the cloth toward their center, turn the towel into a small pouch, and let the chestnuts steam for about five minutes. For an alternate steaming method, place your air-fried chestnuts in a paper bag and roll down the top so the steam gets trapped inside. Again, let the nuts steam for five minutes or for up to 30 minutes.
Images showing how to peel air fried chestnuts.
  1. Peel: After the chestnuts steam, grasp the pouch in your hand and gently squeeze it to loosen the chestnut shells. Then, carefully peel off the outer shell of the nuts while they’re still hot by lightly pulling back on their scored “X.” Be sure you’re removing the papery skin to expose the yellow flesh inside. If you can’t remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, you may use a small sharp knife to assist you, being careful not to pierce the yellow inner nut.
  2. Serve: Enjoy your air fryer roasted chestnuts while they’re still warm.

How to Store Air Fryer Roasted Chestnuts?

After roasting chestnuts in an air fryer, the last thing you want to do is let a single one go to waste. With these easy tips, you can store this delectable recipe to snack on throughout the week or for long-lasting meal prep.

  • Store: When ready for storage, let your air roasted chestnuts reach room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: To freeze your peeled air fryer chestnuts, transfer them to a freezer bag and remove as much air as possible. Then, tightly seal the bag and freeze your chestnuts for up to three months.
  • Thaw: When ready to thaw, remove your chestnuts from the freezer and defrost them in the fridge overnight.

Expert Tips

The best way to cook chestnuts in an air fryer is by preheating it to 350°F (175°C), scoring each chestnut, and roasting them for 17 minutes or until the shells open and the insides are tender.  However, I learned a few lessons during my recipe testing and would like to share them with you:

  • Scoring: Because chestnuts can be slippery, it’s important to be safe when scoring them, which is essential for easy peeling later on. Therefore, I recommend placing your chestnuts on a cutting board with their flat sides facing down and rounded sides facing up. Then, firmly secure the chestnut with one hand and use a sharp, serrated, or chestnut knife to score the rounded edge in the shape of an “X.”
  • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for hours on end, I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
  • Air fryer temperature: When making this recipe, you may consider speeding up the roasting process by increasing your air fryer temperature. However, we found that cooking chestnuts in the air fryer at higher temperatures (like 400 degrees F. and 375 degrees F.) led to a fully cooked exterior and uncooked interior. Therefore, we recommend keeping your cooking temperature low—ideally 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes—to ensure the whole chestnut roasts at an even rate.
  • Don’t overcrowd: As with all air fryer recipes, you mustn’t crowd your air fryer basket while cooking, as proper air circulation is essential for thoroughly roasting your chestnuts. We were able to fit a pound of chestnuts into our basket, though this amount may change depending on the size of your air fryer and individual chestnuts. No matter how many chestnuts you can fit into your basket, just be sure to arrange them so that their scored “X” faces up.
  • Look for visual cues: If you’re not sure whether you’ve fully roasted your chestnuts by the end of their cooking time, I recommend looking for the following visual cues: When ready to steam and peel, your chestnuts’ scored edges should begin opening up, and their exteriors should lightly brown. However, because every air fryer behaves differently, I suggest testing a chestnut at the 15-minute mark to see whether it’s ready to serve or needs more roasting time.
  • Peel while still warm: If you want a chestnut with a smooth, nutty taste, you must remove its fuzzy skin before serving. Therefore, I suggest using either of my five-minute steaming methods (either by a wrapped towel or paper bag) to loosen the nuts’ outer and inner skins before peeling, making the process much easier.
  • Buy more than you need: It’s inevitable when buying chestnuts that some of them will be “bad,” whether they’re moldy, blemished, or otherwise spoiled—with special consideration to their time of harvesting. Therefore, I highly advise purchasing more chestnuts than you need to eliminate these undesirable picks and still end up with a whole serving.
  • A word on easy peeling: My step-by-step instructions are a foolproof way to ensure easy peeling and excellent taste for high-quality chestnuts. However—no matter how closely you follow the steps—it won’t be possible to get good results if you’re using chestnuts of poor quality. Plus, keep in mind that the age and size of the chestnuts matter, so I recommend getting the most 
Peeled chestnuts in a bowl from the top view.

How to Season?

Making roasted chestnuts in the air fryer gives you the freedom to play around with all your favorite flavorings. With these mouthwatering seasoning ideas, you can transform your chestnuts into everything from a decadent dessert to a savory snack.

  • Honey and vanilla: If you want your air fryer chestnuts to have an irresistibly dessert-like finish, mix two tablespoons of honey with a teaspoon of vanilla. Once thoroughly combined, drizzle the honey mixture over your cooked chestnuts for a great holiday season treat.
  • Melted butter and maple syrup: Richly sweet and easy to customize, try drizzling your chestnuts with a mixture of melted butter and maple syrup. You can even sprinkle ground cinnamon over your nuts if desired for a warmer, woody flavor.
  • Balsamic glaze with a sprinkle of sea salt: Coating your air-roasted chestnuts with a rich balsamic reduction is an easy way to give your recipe complexly sweet notes—a flavor profile that tastes straight out of Europe. Finish this tasty variation with a sprinkle of sea salt, and every bite will explode with flavor.
  • Asian style: To give your air fried chestnuts a zingy, Asian-inspired flavor, coat them with a blend of soy sauce, a hint of sesame oil, and a sprinkle of sesame seeds. This umami-packed recipe transforms sweet chestnuts into a savory treat perfect for all-day snacking.

FAQs

Want to know more about how to roast chestnuts in an air fryer? This beginner-friendly guide will answer any remaining questions, from ideal cooking times to expert peeling suggestions.

How long to cook chestnuts in an air fryer?

To ensure your chestnuts develop warm, tender insides without burning their exterior, I recommend cooking them at 350 degrees F. for 17 minutes and shaking the basket 1-2 times during the process.

Can you eat the brown skin on chestnuts?

Yes, chestnuts’ brown skin is technically edible. However, it has a fuzzy texture and bitter taste that may interfere with the overall flavor of your roasted chestnuts. Therefore, I recommend removing them before eating.

How to know if my chestnuts are fully cooked?

When checking your chestnuts for doneness, look for a few easy visual cues: The outside of your nuts should turn lightly brown, their scored edges should begin opening up, and their insides should be warm and soft by the time they’re ready to remove from the air fryer.

If you try this Air Fryer Chestnuts recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried chestnuts from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Chestnuts Recipe

This air fryer roasted chestnuts recipe is a quicker alternative to roasting chestnuts in the oven. With this easy recipe, you can make air fryer roasted chestnuts half the time, serve it as a snack, or use it in your favorite chestnut recipes.
Course Snack
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 17 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 222kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 lb Chestnuts preferably Italian (or European)
  • 3 cups Water

Instructions

  • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
  • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board, making sure that the rounded side (aka the belly side) is facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife (or a chestnut knife, if you have one.) Then, turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut, forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
  • Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover it with cold tap water and let them sit for 30 minutes to an hour.
  • Preheat your air fryer to 350 °F.
  • Drain chestnuts and transfer them onto a clean kitchen towel. Dry them off as much as you can.
  • Place them in the air fryer basket, making sure that the cut side is facing up. Do not overcrowd the basket. If needed, you can bake it in two batches.
  • Air fry them for 17 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through the air-roasting process.
  • Once the air frying is completed, transfer the now-very hot chestnuts onto a clean kitchen towel. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5 minutes or so. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag to do this. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag to trap the steam inside, and let it steam for 5 minutes.
  • Holding the pouch in your hand, give it a gentle squeeze to loosen the shells. Then, carefully remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X,” peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.
  • Enjoy while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a little less than a pound of chestnuts. If you are serving it as a snack, you would likely end up with 7-8 chestnuts (depending on their size) per person if you are serving it to 4 people. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Air frying temperature: Don’t be tempted to increase the temperature of the air fryer to roast them faster. I have tried air frying chestnuts in higher temps to shorten the cooking time, but ended up with chestnuts that were burned on the outside and raw on the inside.
  • Soaking: Though popular belief holds that you must soak your chestnuts in hot water (or warm water) for a long time (8 hours or so), I’ve found that a quick soak in cold tap water (30-60 minutes) is more than sufficient.
  • Chestnuts: There is a direct correlation between the age, size, and origin of the chestnuts and the quality of the end result. Over the years of cooking chestnuts, I learned that chestnuts from Europe and the US tend to peel easier than chestnuts from China. Needless to say, it is best to buy the freshest chestnuts you can get your hands on for the best results.
  • Store: Bring cooked chestnuts to room temperature and then transfer them to an airtight container. You can then store them in the refrigerator for up to four days.

Nutrition

Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-chestnuts/feed/ 10
Air Fryer Red Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/#respond Mon, 13 Nov 2023 17:05:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71802 It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste.…]]>

It’s no secret that air-fried red potatoes are an easy way to fill your table with savory, expertly seasoned taste. If you can’t get enough of the subtle sweetness and creamy texture of red-skinned potatoes, get out your recipe book! My Red Potato Salad combines savory bacon, crisp dill pickles, and fresh dill with a creamy mayo dressing guaranteed to wow all your dinner guests.

Air fried red potatoes garnished with parsley in a bowl.

Ingredients

Cooking new potatoes in the air fryer requires only a handful of ingredients you likely already have in your pantry.

Ingredients needed for cooking red potatoes in air fryer on a marble.
  • Red potatoes: Small, creamy, and mildly sweet red potatoes (also known as red skin and new potatoes) are a must for this air fryer recipe. Though I use small red potatoes for this dish, other small, tender potatoes, such as Yukon Gold potatoes, would also work. However, avoid using potatoes with too much starch—such as russet potatoes—as they won’t crisp up or tenderize as well as other potato types.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my little red potatoes their irresistible crispiness and well-seasoned exterior. However, you may substitute olive oil with any other mild-flavored oil, like avocado oil or ghee.
  • Seasonings: I chose to season my air-fried new potatoes with a basic, savory mix of dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and ground black pepper. To give your potatoes extra smoky undertones, you may also use smoked paprika.

Other Seasoning Ideas

Want to take your air fryer roasted red potatoes to the next level? Though optional, these expert seasoning ideas allow you to customize your red potatoes with dozens of other tasty flavor profiles.

  • Favorite spice mixtures: One of the best parts about air fryer potato recipes is how easy they are to customize based on the dish with which you serve them. For a sweet and peppery flavor profile, Italian seasoning makes a delicious seasoning mix. Or, you can enhance this dish’s spice and savoriness by opting for authentic Cajun seasoning, which you can easily make using my Blackened Seasoning recipe. Or, you can give your new potatoes a herby, warm, and bright finish using Mediterranean SeasoningBaharat Spice Mix, or Ranch Seasoning.
  • Spices: If you love spicy food, a few simple additions can give your air-fried potatoes a hot kick. Depending on what you serve with your potatoes, curry powder, red pepper flakes, cayenne pepper, chili powder, onion powder, and more can transform your red potatoes into a piquant side fit for even the biggest spice fans.
  • Fresh herbs: Enliven your air fryer new potatoes with fresh, gourmet flavor by finishing them off with a sprinkle of chopped fresh thyme, fresh parsley, fresh basil, or fresh rosemary.
  • Parmesan cheese: A great way to give your little red potatoes a rich, umami flavor is to sprinkle them with parmesan at the end of cooking. Cheesy and salty, these garlic parmesan air fryer potatoes will have the whole table asking for your recipe.

How to Cook Red Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Making baked red potatoes in the air fryer is one of the quickest, simplest ways to delight your tastebuds and cut your kitchen prep in half. Six steps and twenty minutes are all you need to make this mouthwatering side.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to season new potatoes and cook them in the air fryer.
  1. Combine the seasonings: Take out a large bowl and add the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper. Whisk until thoroughly combined.
  2. Toss potatoes: Add the baby red potatoes to the seasoning mixture and toss until each potato has an even coating.
  3. Arrange the cut potatoes: Place the seasoned potatoes in the air fryer basket, arranging them in a single even layer without overcrowding.
  4. Air fry the red potatoes: Cook the potatoes for about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every five minutes, until the potatoes are tender when pierced with a knife. If the potatoes aren’t fork-tender at the end of 15 minutes, continue cooking them in one-minute increments until done.
  5. Serve: Transfer your fresh air-fried red potatoes onto a serving platter and serve with your favorite sauce on the side.

How to Store and Reheat?

To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend eating them on the day of cooking. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in a pinch with these pro storage tips.

  • Storage: These air fryer mini red potatoes will stay fresh for up to three days when you store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: To reheat your red potatoes, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions:

This simple air fryer side is one of the tastiest, most versatile potato recipe ideas in my cookbook. Hassle-free and quick, this simple side dish takes the stress out of complicated meal prep. 

  • Side dish with meat dishes: Hands-down, these bite-size potatoes make for the perfect weekday dinner side dish. Serve them with your favorite chicken main—like my effortless Baked Chicken Kabobs or perfectly portioned Air Fried Cornish Hens—for a menu the whole family can enjoy. Or, try a savory beef recipe, such as Reverse Sear Tenderloin or classic Pot Roast, to make a meal worthy of a gourmet dinner spread.
  • Serve as finger food: Not only are air fryer red potato wedges a perfect side dish for countless mains, but they’re also excellent finger food! Serve a plate of air-roasted potatoes with a side of your favorite dipping sauce—like my Blue Cheese Dip and Yogurt Ranch Dip, and watch them disappear in minutes.

Expert Tips

Preparing baby red potatoes in the air fryer is a surefire way to fill your plate with savory, crisp, and creamy flavors. These pro tips will guarantee your potato side is as delicious as possible—with none of the hassle!

  • Wash and dry: Washing your red potatoes is essential to removing bacteria and debris before cooking. After washing, though, dry the potatoes thoroughly with paper towels or a clean kitchen towel before adding them to your recipe. Otherwise, the seasoning will not stick to the potato skin, and they won’t come out as crispy.
  • Cut them evenly: When cutting new potatoes for this dish, slice them into uniform sizes to ensure even cooking. If they’re small enough, you may cook whole red potatoes in the air fryer, but if you have larger potatoes, I recommend cutting them into even, bite-sized pieces for the best results.
  • Don’t overcrowd: When cooking small red potatoes in the air fryer, it’s vital that you don’t overcrowd the basket to ensure proper air circulation and even cooking. I found that my 6-qt. air fryer (affiliate link) was large enough to accommodate one pound of red potatoes. However, if you have a smaller air fryer, you may need to cook your potatoes in two batches to ensure they lay in a single even layer.
  • Toss a few times while cooking: To ensure even roasting, I recommend tossing your potatoes a few times during the air frying process, preferably every five minutes.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to tell the doneness of your red skin potatoes is by using the “knife test.” Pierce the center of a potato with a knife or fork. If the blade enters and exits the flesh easily, you may remove your potatoes from the heat. If the blade encounters resistance, continue air frying the potatoes in one-minute increments until done.
  • Every air fryer is different: As you prepare your red baby potatoes, remember that different air fryers result in different heat levels and cooking times. I tested this recipe using an Instant Pot (affiliate link) and a Ninja Air Fryer (affiliate link), but if you have a different model, be sure to check your potatoes throughout the cooking process to avoid under or over-cooking.

FAQs

There’s no reason to stress over this simple air fryer recipe. This easy FAQ will answer all your remaining questions, from how long to cook red potatoes in the air fryer to nutritional information.

Can you air fry red potatoes?

Definitely! Air frying red potatoes results in expertly seasoned, delectably crisp, and lusciously tender potatoes in half the time as regular frying. All you need to do is season and oil your potato slices, air fry them at 400 degrees F. for 15-17 minutes (tossing occasionally), and enjoy.

Should you boil potatoes before air frying?

No, there’s no need to boil your potatoes before air-frying them. Boiling them first will make them mushy, and they won’t maintain their shape while eating.

What temperature to air fry potatoes?

Though you may air fry red skin potatoes at 350 and 375 degrees F., we found that 400 degrees F. for 15 minutes resulted in the crispiest, most tender potatoes. Remember, however, that you must adjust your cooking time should you choose a different temperature.

Are air-fried red potatoes healthy?

Air-frying is generally healthier than traditional frying methods, as it uses less oil, reduces calories and trans fats, and helps retain more nutrients in your main ingredient. However, it’s also important to note that potatoes—no matter your preparation method—are high in carbohydrates and low in protein, though they also contain vitamins and minerals, like Vitamin C and potassium (source.) Therefore, I encourage you to customize your menu depending on your dietary needs and the dishes with which you plan to pair your air-fried potatoes.

How long to air fry red potatoes at 400 degrees F.?

I recommend cooking your small red potatoes for 15-17 minutes at 400 degrees F., shaking the basket every five minutes to ensure even cooking.

How to make French fries with red potatoes in the air fryer?

To make air fryer red potato French fries, begin by washing, drying, and slicing your potatoes into thin, even-sized strips (i.e., into the shape of a French fry). Then, place potatoes in a large bowl of cold water and soak for 30 minutes. Once done, drain and dry the potatoes with a clean kitchen towel, toss them in olive oil and your desired seasonings until evenly coated. Next, arrange your seasoned potato slices in a single even layer in your air fryer basket and cook them at 375 degrees F. for 12-15 minutes, shaking the basket halfway through. When the air fryer red potato fries reach your preferred level of crispness, remove them from the heat, sprinkle them with any additional seasoning, and serve.

Other Potato Side Dishes You Might Also Like

Making crispy red potatoes in the air fryer is one of my favorite ways to please a crowd. For even more fan-favorite potato dishes, these tasty recipes will fill your menu with creamy, savory goodness every night of the week.

If you try this crispy Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe or any other one of our Air Fry Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer roasted red potatoes in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Air Fryer Red Potatoes Recipe

Get ready to tantalize your taste buds with this Air Fryer Red Potatoes recipe! In just 20 minutes, you can transform simple ingredients into a delectably crispy and flavorful weeknight dinner side dish or snack. Use this easy recipe to make a delicious side dish or a quick snack that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 113kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound baby red potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried thyme, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the baby red potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer into the air fryer basket, being sure not to overcrowd them.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, about 15 minutes, shaking the basket every 5 minutes. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer the air-roasted potatoes onto a serving platter and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound air fried red potatoes that are ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Rinse and dry: It is important to make sure the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process. 
  • Do not overcrowd your air fryer: Cook in batches, if needed, so that the heat is evenly distributed and they have enough room to crisp up.
  • Sprinkle it while it is still hot: Though optional, you may sprinkle your air-fried small red potatoes with additional salt, herbs, and parmesan cheese directly after cooking (while the potatoes are still hot). Doing so ensures that the baby red potatoes heat and develop the new flavors—making them as rich and savory as possible—while also melting any additional cheese.
  • Storage: To ensure maximum crispiness, I recommend air frying them right before serving. However, you can store your leftover potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Oven roasting: If you do not have an air fryer, you can roast your red potatoes in the oven. Simply use 2 tablespoons of oil (instead of one), transfer the cut potatoes onto a parchment-lined baking sheet, and roast in a preheated 450-degree oven for 25-30 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 113kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 526mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 75IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-red-potatoes/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that…]]>

While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, Grilled Lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls. And if you want to take it up a notch, drizzle it with a spoonful of skhug sauce for that authentic Middle Eastern taste.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with fresh pita, pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 15
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#comments Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed…]]>

Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 2
Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that…]]>

Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
  • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
  • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
  • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
  • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
  • Salt

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
  • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
  • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
  • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
  1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
  3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
  4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

How to Make and Ahead and Store?

This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

  • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
  • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
  • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
  • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
  • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
  • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
  • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
  • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

Expert Tips

If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

  • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
  • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
  • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

FAQs

What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 57kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional add ins:

  • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

Instructions

  • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
  • Stir to combine.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
  • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

Notes

  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

Nutrition

Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2
Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/ https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/#comments Tue, 18 Apr 2023 18:59:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66405 Ingredients  This avocado toast with smoked salmon is great because you can make it your own by adding whatever toppings…]]>
Aysegul

I love this recipe because it has light preparation, basic everyday ingredients, and tons of flavor.

The best part, you ask? You don’t even need to use the stove or oven! With only a few minutes of prep, it deserves a spot on your weekly rotation on busy weekday mornings.

And if you have a few extra minutes on the weekend, switch up your standard breakfast and try this avocado toast with salmon and egg! 

Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast cut in half on a plate with a knife on the side.

Ingredients 

This avocado toast with smoked salmon is great because you can make it your own by adding whatever toppings you like best. Here’s a short, simple list of ingredients that will make shopping a breeze:

Ingredients for the recipe are from the top view.
  • Bread: Feel free to choose your favorite bread. I like to use whole-grain bread, but if you make your own sourdough bread, go for it. If you want to make it extra special, treat yourself with buttery homemade Brioche. If you have dietary restrictions like gluten intolerance, try my Almond Flour Bread or any store-bought gluten-free bread you like. There are also easy-to-find keto-friendly options at the grocery store if you’re following a keto diet. Finally, you can ditch the bread and go for your favorite bagel.
  • Avocado: The store has many avocado choices, but I think Hass avocado is the most flavorful one out there. When buying avocados, be sure to pick one that is nice and ripe for easy mashing or slicing.
  • Fresh lemon juice: Lemon juice will give your toast the acid it needs to wake up your taste buds. Fresh lemon (and freshly squeezed lemon juice) is preferred. Alternatively, you can use fresh lime in this recipe.
  • Cucumber: Persian cucumbers sliced thinly are my favorite for this, but English will get the job done.  
  • Smoked salmon vs. lox: While lox and smoked salmon are different things, they can be used interchangeably in this smoked salmon and avocado toast recipe. Just make sure to get a brand that you like. And if you are wondering, my favorite one is Trader Joes’, Everything But The Bagel Seasoned Salmon.
  • Spices: I use kosher salt and black pepper in terms of spices. However, if I am serving this smoked salmon breakfast toast to adults, I sometimes sprinkle it with a pinch of red pepper flakes.

Optional Add-Ins

What I love most about this healthy avocado toast is that it is endlessly customizable. If you are short on time, follow the recipe as written for a 10-minute breakfast. But if you are looking for a next-level breakfast or brunch, jazz it up with one (or more) of the optional add-ins below: 

  • Soft cheese: A thin layer of cream cheese or goat cheese is a great addition to this avocado toast, but any soft cheese you have on hand would work.
  • Fresh herbs or Salad Greens: A handful of arugula, spring mix, or microgreens not only add color but also make it healthier. Alternatively, a small amount of fresh dill or parsley would make a nice addition.
  • Onions: My Pickled Red Onion recipe will give this dish a tangy bite to compliment your smoked salmon avocado toast. However, thinly sliced red onion or scallions would work nicely as well.
  • Garlic: Adding chopped garlic to your creamy avocado spread can add an extra pop of flavor. I usually opt out of garlic if I am making this on a work day, but if I am serving it to a crowd for brunch, then I add one for extra flavor.
  • Olive Oil + Flaky Salt: I usually finish this layered toast with a drizzle of good-quality olive oil and a pinch of flaky salt.
  • Spices: Who doesn’t love Everything But the Bagel seasoning? A little goes a long way!
  • Egg on top: If eggs are a staple for you’re morning breakfast, you’re welcome to top it off with scrambled eggs or a fried egg. However, if I have time, my favorite is smoked salmon avocado toast topped with a poached egg.
  • Sliced tomato: As with any toast recipe, adding a few slices of tomato to the layers would be a nice addition to this open-faced sandwich.
  • Olives or Capers: Use one teaspoon of chopped capers or olives for a briny bite. 

How to Make Avocado Toast with Smoked Salmon

This avocado smoked salmon toast will make prep and cleanup faster than ever before. You don’t even need to cook anything. Here’s how I make it:

  1. Toast the bread: This is optional, but toasting the bread will give it a nice crispy bite. If you do, be sure to let it cool while you are working on the rest of the prep.
A collage of images showing how to make avocado lox toast.
  1. Mash or slice the avocado: Scoop your avocado into a medium-sized bowl and mash with a fork. Add your salt, pepper, a squeeze of lemon juice, and garlic (optional), and mix well. Give it a taste and add in if needed. Alternatively, you can slice your avocado thinly.
  2. Spread the avocado mixture: Add a layer of your mashed or sliced avocado to the bread.
  3. Top with cucumber: Arrange the sliced cucumber evenly on top.
  4. Add smoked salmon: Layer about 2 oz. of smoked salmon per person on your toast, along with the pickled red onion. 
A collage of photos showing how to assemble avocado salmon toast.
  1. Garnish: Make it your own with any of your favorite garnishes. I like microgreens and a drizzle of extra virgin olive oil. Sprinkle some Everything But the Bagel Seasoning for the finishing touch. 
  2. Serve: Once you’ve topped your toast with the desired garnishes, serve with a lemon wedge on the side.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This smoked salmon toast recipe is best when served right away. However, you can prepare some ingredients ahead of time to put together in just 5 minutes. Here’s what I recommend: 

  • Make Ahead: The most time-consuming part of this avocado toast with salmon recipe is preparing the avocado spread. However, it can be prepped in advance. So, go ahead and make it a day ahead and store it as I did in my go-to Guacamole Recipe. Here’s how to do it:
    • After making the guacamole, evenly spread it in an airtight container.
    • Cover the surface with a thin layer of water, lime, or lemon juice. We are doing this to prevent it from oxidizing.
    • Place plastic wrap on top, then remove all air bubbles before storing in the refrigerator. You can also slice your cucumbers beforehand and store them in an airtight container for quick assembly. 
  • Storing: Enjoy this delicious avocado and salmon toast immediately for the best results. I’d be surprised if you have leftovers! But, if you do, then store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator and eat them by the next day.  
Smoked Salmon and Avocado Toast garnished with red onion and micro greens from the top view.

Expert Tips 

Even though this smoked salmon toast recipe is just as effortless as it is delicious, a few quick tips can take this dish to the next level. Here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Add lemon juice to the avocado: The best way to prevent your avocado mash from turning brown is to squeeze fresh lemon juice over it. Adding a small amount of acid also helps with flavor, so do not skip it.
  • It is best when assembled on the day you plan to serve: As with most seafood recipes, I recommend assembling your avocado smoked salmon toast on the day you plan to serve it. If you are planning to serve a crowd, follow the make-ahead tips above to make the last-minute assembly a breeze.
  • Toast the bread lightly. This is an optional step, but toasting the bread gives this dish the perfect warm crunch.
  • Multiply the recipe. The recipe below, as written, is for two servings, but you can multiply it as many times as you need.

FAQs

Is avocado and smoked salmon good for you?

Absolutely! All the elements of this recipe make for a healthy smoked salmon breakfast. Both salmon (packed with Omega 3 fatty acids) and avocado are considered some of the healthiest fats on the planet. When you are shopping for smoked salmon at the store, be sure to check the back and buy a brand that is made with clean ingredients and without any sugars.

Other Salmon Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoy simple, reliable salmon recipes that feel a little special without being too complicated, these are a few more I think you will enjoy:

  • If you are putting together a brunch spread or need an effortless appetizer, my Salmon Avocado Board is the perfect option. It looks impressive but comes together in only 20 minutes.
  • If you are looking for a quick and simple weeknight dinner, this Sockeye Salmon Recipe is one of my go-to recipes as it’s ready in less than 30 minutes.
  • If you are craving something with a little more texture, try my Sesame Salmon Bowl. I love serving it in a bowl with rice, fresh vegetables, and a drizzle of creamy spicy mayo for an easy dinner made in less than 30 minutes.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Smoked Salmon Avocado toast on a plate with a knife on the side.
Print

Smoked Salmon Avocado Toast Recipe

This smoked salmon avocado toast is a quick, easy, and healthy breakfast that not only tastes great but also looks delicious. Ready in 10 minutes,  it is simple enough for a morning on the go and elevated enough for a holiday brunch like Easter, Mother's Day, or even Christmas morning.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Low Lactose
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 240kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pieces toast multi-grain bread and sourdough bread would all work
  • 1 large avocado ripened
  • 1 ½ teaspoons lemon juice plus lemon wedges to serve with
  • 1 garlic clove minced – optional
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ Persian cucumber peeled and sliced thinly (or English cucumber would also work)
  • 4 oz. smoked salmon packaged
  • ½ cup micro greens or arugula
  • 1 tablespoon pickled red onions optional
  • A drizzle of extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Everything Bagel Seasoning optional

Instructions

  • If preferred, toast your bread and let it cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, in a small bowl, mash avocado using the back of a fork. Add lemon juice, minced garlic (if using), salt, and pepper. Stir well. Give it a taste and add more if necessary.
  • Spread each slice of toast with the avocado mixture.
  • Top each slice with the cucumber slices.
  • Place smoked salmon pieces and pickled onion (if using) on top.
  • Garnish with microgreens and a drizzle of olive oil. Finish it off with a sprinkle of Everything Bagel Seasoning.
  • Serve with a lemon wedge on the side.

Notes

  • Garlic: If I am making this avocado toast on a work day I omit using garlic, but if I am making it on the weekend, then I make sure to add it in. 
  • Multiply the recipe: Serving a crowd? No problem. Simply multiply the recipe as many times as you want. I usually serve 2 ounces of smoked salmon and ½ avocado per serving.
  • To Make Ahead: If you are serving this recipe to a crowd, feel free to mash the avocados in advance, but be sure to cover the surface with a thin layer of lemon juice followed by some plastic wrap to prevent oxidizing. Assemble the recipe right before serving.
  • Storing leftovers: This avocado toast is best on the day it is served. However, you can store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 1 day.

Nutrition

Calories: 240kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 1170mg | Potassium: 636mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 225IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-avocado-toast/feed/ 6
Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/#comments Fri, 03 Feb 2023 20:48:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5103 Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe,…]]>

Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe, which takes less than 5 minutes to make from start to finish.

These homemade kale chips are my favorite way to curb an afternoon salt craving, and they couldn’t be easier to throw together. If you find yourself grabbing for the crunchy, salty, savory snacks throughout the day, you’ll be amazed at how these vegan cheesy kale chips are a great way to replace a bag of chips or pretzels. 

Kale Chips with nutritional yeast after they are baked on a sheet pan.

Not to mention, having your choice of seasoning for kale chips (more on that below) gives you unlimited options of flavors each time you make them. So, go ahead, make your own kale chips, and enjoy a great snack that happens to be good for you.

Ingredients

This quick and easy recipe for kale chips with nutritional yeast requires only a few ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: Curly kale or lacinato kale (aka dinosaur kale) would both work in this recipe. If you are new to buying kale, be sure to check out our guide on the different varieties of kale.
  • Oil: I recommend using avocado oil, olive oil, or coconut oil. You can even use tahini (sesame paste), which will pair beautifully with the nutritional yeast. Though it is important to thoroughly whisk your tahini before massaging it into the kale.
  • Nutritional yeast: Nutritional yeast is the ingredient that gives these vegan kale chips their great cheesy flavor. The cheesy-tasting cousin to baker’s yeast, nutritional yeast is rich in nutrients. It is mostly used in place of cheese in vegan recipes (such as this vegan nacho cheese sauce) mainly because it tastes very similar to parmesan cheese. In this cheesy kale chips recipe, it is the savory element that makes them extra delicious. You can often find it in the healthy section of the store or order it online (affiliate link.)

Seasonings for Kale Chips:

The best part of this recipe is that it is incredibly versatile; you can easily make it your own by adding a variety of seasonings. Here are a few options:

  • A combination of ½ teaspoon of garlic powder and onion powder would not only pair well with the cheesy qualities of nutritional yeast but also enhance their umami flavors.
  • You can opt for a  Mexican flair by adding a sprinkle of ground cumin, chili powder, and even cayenne pepper for some heat.
  • Sprinkle it with some toasted sesame seeds or Everything But The Bagel seasoning for an extra savory punch. And, of course, you can also finish it with a sprinkle of sea salt to help bring all the flavors together.

How to make kale with nutritional yeast?

The steps of this vegan cheese kale chips recipe are simple and only take a few minutes. 

A collage of images showing how to make kale chips.
  1. Prepare the kale: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F before you begin prepping the ingredients. Rinse a fresh bunch of kale and tear it into small pieces. Dry them in a salad spinner as much as you can. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry with a sheet of paper towel.
  2. Mix: Lightly massage kale with oil, nutritional yeast, and any of the kale chip seasonings of your choice in a large bowl. 
Homemade kale chips on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
  1. Prep for baking: Spread the kale on a large sheet pan in a single layer. This is an important step for achieving crispy kale chips, so if needed, feel free to use two separate baking sheets.
  2. Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for 5 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip the kale leaves and bake for another 5-7 minutes keeping a close eye on it. If you are baking two sheets at the same time, be sure to rotate them as well. 

How to make ahead and store leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: Most of the prep time involved in this recipe is the cleaning and preparing of the kale to make the chips. The good thing is that you can easily wash, cut, and store kale in the refrigerator, so it takes just a few minutes to put it all together. If you are new to prepping kale, be sure to check out our guide on storing kale.
  • Store: I’d be surprised if you have leftover kale chips. Truthfully, these crunchy kale chips are best on the day they are made. However, if you do wish to store them, wait until they cool fully, then keep them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Expert Tips:

Having been making these cheesy vegan kale chips for years, I learned a thing or two. Here are my tips for making the best baked kale chips:

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is an important step for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear or Cut the kale into equally sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the raw kale pieces roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Massage the oil into the kale. Tossing kale with oil and nutritional yeast is an option, but I recommend giving it a gentle massage to ensure that they are distributed evenly throughout. If you are new to it, be sure to check out our quick guide on how to massage kale.
  • Low-temperature oven: Baking kale leaves at a low oven temp is a key step for crispy chips. Low and slow is a safer option for getting evenly baked kale chips with a crispy texture.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.

FAQs

Does making kale chips destroy the nutrients?

Surprisingly, when baking kale, very minimal nutrients are cooked off, making it a more nutritious alternative to other salty snacks such as potato chips, pretzels or tortilla chips.

How do you keep kale chips crispy?

The secret to keeping kale chips crispy is to let them cool completely before storing them. We also recommend storing them in a large enough container so they won’t break.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Enjoy

If you love kale or are using kale to add more leafy greens to your diet, here are a few more must-try kale recipes:

If you try this Homemade Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

kale chips in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast Recipe

These Kale Chips are flavored with nutritional yeast for a cheesy yet vegan and healthy snack. Flavored with nutritional yeast, this easy and quick-to-make kale snack recipe is guaranteed to be your next movie night treat. Perfectly crispy, this kid-friendly snack is a great way to sneak some greens into your diet. Paleo, whole30 & gluten-free diet-friendly tool!
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 86kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch fresh kale (curly kale) (8 oz. with stems), about 4-5 cups
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil or avocado oil or coconut oil
  • 2 tablespoons nutritional yeast plus more for sprinkling
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Rinse kale under cold water, remove stems, and tear each leaf into bite-size pieces. It is best if they are (roughly) equal in size to help with even roasting in the oven.
  • Using a salad spinner, dry the leaves as much as possible. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry. Transfer the kale leaves to a large mixing bowl.
  • Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with nutritional yeast and salt. Lightly massage to ensure each leaf is coated with the oil and nutritional yeast.
  • Transfer kale to the parchment-lined baking sheet. Spread them on an even layer making sure that they are not overlapping. You can grab a second baking sheet or bake it in two batches if needed.
  • Bake in the oven for 7 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip each piece of kale, and bake for another 5-7 minutes. Towards the end, they should be crisp but not browned.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 1-2 minutes. Serve with an additional sprinkling of nutritional yeast on top.

Notes

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is important for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear kale into equally-sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the kale leaves roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.
  • Storage: While we think that these kale chips are best on the day they are made, you can store them to enjoy later. To do so, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 86kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 376mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6494IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 165mg | Iron: 2mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/feed/ 6
How To Make Muesli https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/#comments Tue, 03 Jan 2023 15:10:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63563 Few breakfasts are as filling, nutritious, or versatile as this homemade muesli recipe. Every bite will satisfy your tastebuds, whether…]]>

Few breakfasts are as filling, nutritious, or versatile as this homemade muesli recipe. Every bite will satisfy your tastebuds, whether you prepare it with almond milk, like my Almond Milk Oatmeal, or top it with fresh fruit, like my Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal. And if you love the health-conscious ingredients in this easy muesli recipe, you’ll adore other oatmeal dishes, including my Vegan Baked Oatmeal.

A homemade cereal in a jar with a spoon from the top view.

What is Muesli?

Muesli is a healthy breakfast dish made from a rolled oats base mixed in with other ingredients, such as nuts, fruits, and seeds, and served right away with milk (or juice) or soaked overnight.

This nutritious dish—sometimes mistyped as “museli,” “meusli,” “muselix,” and “muslie”—was created by Swiss physician Maximilian Bircher-Benner in the 20th century to serve as a healthy breakfast for hospital patients as a part of their treatment. (source – Wikipedia Muesli article)

The original Bircher muesli recipe was a bit different than what it is today. It was made by using raw oats, grated apples, and chopped nuts mixed with water, lemon juice, and sweetened condensed milk.

Needless to say, it took off after its creation, and muesli breakfasts spread quickly throughout Switzerland. The recipe became so widespread in the country that many still refer to it as “Swiss muesli” or “Swiss-style muesli.”

Despite its European origins, muesli has also become a favorite breakfast food in the U.S., with successful brands like Alpen Muesli and Bob’s Red Mills appearing in health food stores across the country.

Muesli Ingredients

Below, you will find the formula I follow to make this muesli recipe along with recommendations on brands I like and buy all the time. However, if you are living outside the US (or in an area where you do not have access to these specific ingredients), please know that you can substitute pretty much every single ingredient in this recipe, which is listed under the formula.

Some of the links in this section are affiliate links, which means if you make a purchase using a link, I will get a commission at no cost to you.

Ingredients for a homemade cereal in bowls from the top view.

With that being said, these ingredients and brands are just a suggestion, and I suggest you take this basic muesli recipe and change it up according to your taste buds. My only recommendation is that you read the labels while you are shopping for these ingredients. 

When I am at the store, I make sure to buy products that are unsweetened, unsalted, and organic as much as possible. I prefer organic ingredients because USDA organic requirements prohibit the use of pesticides in farming, and I prefer that my muesli breakfast bowl in the morning has none of that in it. 

This recipe results in 16 cups of mixed muesli (approx. 16 servings), though you can halve or multiply the recipe as necessary. Please refer to the formula sheet below for ingredients and their amounts.

IngredientAmount
Quick Cooking Rolled Oats3 cups
Other Grain Cereals5 cups
Dried Fruit3 cups
Superfoods1 cup
Seeds and Nuts2 1/2 cups

Quick Cooking Rolled Oats VS. Old Fashioned Rolled Oats

You can use either quick-cooking or old-fashioned oats for muesli. I prefer using quick oats because they don’t require any extra cooking to soften them. Add in milk or yogurt, and they’re ready to eat!

If you are not sure about how they are different, be sure to check out this comprehensive article on rolled oats vs. old-fashioned oats.

However, if you prefer to use old-fashioned oats—a thicker cut than quick-cooking oats—I recommend roasting them in the oven before eating. Simply spread the rolled oats on a large baking sheet alongside nuts and seeds (if desired) at 350 degrees F. for 10-12 minutes. Just make sure to give it a toss halfway through the process.

Other Grain Cereals

Adding breakfast muesli cereals to your mixture is an excellent way to give your recipe a delectable crunch. Some of my favorite brands include Brown Rice Crisps, Rice Puffs, Kamut Khorasan Wheat Puffs (not gluten-free), Bran Flakes (not gluten-free), and Quinoa Flakes—all of which should be available in the health section of your local grocery store. Of course, you can order them online as well. Be sure to use a gluten-free cereal brand if you want to keep this recipe gluten-free.

Dried Fruit

To give your muesli mixture an irresistible sweetness, you can add any dried fruit that’s unsweetened and doesn’t contain sulfur (marked as “unsulfured”). Some of my favorite dry fruits include dried apples, golden raisins, dried apricot, goji berries, and dried mango. 

If I am making this DIY muesli during the holidays, I like using dried cranberries. However, be aware that most dried cranberries are sweetened with sugar as they are pretty bitter without it. That being said, you can find use orange juice-sweetened cranberries at health food stores like Whole Foods, Sprouts, and Trader Joe’s.

Superfoods

If you’re wondering how to make muesli extra nutritious, superfoods are just what your recipe needs. Heart-healthy hemp seeds and antioxidant-packed chia seeds are two of my favorite health-conscious add-ins. 

You could also add ground flax seeds to your muesli to increase its omega-3 fatty acids. However, don’t add them to the cereal mixture until just before you eat it, as they must be refrigerated until use.

Seeds and Nuts

Want to add more protein to your vegan muesli? Any unsalted raw seeds or nuts will work. My go-to additions to this muesli cereal recipe include pumpkin seeds, sliced or slivered almonds, sunflower seeds, pecans, and walnuts.

Other Optional Add-Ins & Topping Suggestions

Give your muesli a healthy crunch by filling it with unsweetened coconut flakes. Or, add ½ cup of wheat germ for a power food with tons of healthy fats. Sesame seeds, fresh berries, apricots, and bananas also add a bright taste to your muesli breakfast. 

I also enjoy adding ground warm spices for additional flavor, stirring in a pinch of ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, ground cloves, ground ginger, or ground cardamom. Just remember that a small amount goes a long way!

How to Prepare Muesli at Home?

A series of images showing how to combine ingredients to make muesli.

This healthy muesli recipe is one of the simplest breakfast dishes in my recipe book. Simply place all of the ingredients in a large bowl or glass jar, mix to combine, top it off with a lid, and serve as desired. That’s it!

How to Serve?

There are several ways to serve this DIY muesli recipe. From homemade muesli cereal to fruity almond milk oatmeal, these tasty suggestions will have you craving a muesli breakfast daily.

  • Serve it as cereal with milk: Prepare your muesli as a breakfast cereal by mixing it with an equal amount of cold milk (I recommend one cup for every cup of muesli). You can use cow or plant-based milk, such as oat or almond milk (which you can even make at home using my effortless recipes for Almond Butter Milk or DIY Almond Milk!). Then, top off your cereal muesli with fresh fruit (strawberries and blueberries are my faves) for extra juicy and sweet flavors.
  • With yogurt: Give your muesli an irresistibly creamy texture by soaking it overnight in plain Greek yogurt. If you don’t want your muesli quite as soft, you could make a yogurt bowl by topping off your mixture with Homemade Vanilla Yogurt or your favorite store-bought brand. Or, make your muesli part of your favorite yogurt parfait with recipes like my fresh and flavorful Greek Yogurt Parfait. Alternatively, you can use this muesli to make my Overnight Oats with Yogurt by simply using this muesli mixture instead of rolled oats.
  • With juice: Enjoy your muesli in European style by serving it with fruit juice, such as orange juice.
  • Make oatmeal: To make muesli oatmeal, mix 1 cup of water or milk for every ½ cup of muesli. Then, bring the mixture to a quick boil on the stovetop or in the microwave, give it a quick stir, and serve. This simple oatmeal comes together in just 5-10 minutes. If you need further instructions, check out my Almond Milk Oatmeal recipe.
  • With fruit on top or on the side: Top it off with a handful of fruit, or better yet, make a batch of my Fruit Breakfast Salad and serve it on the side.
  • Optional sweeteners: If you have a sweet tooth, in my opinion, the best muesli recipe is one that has delicious natural sweeteners, like Pureed Blueberries, Unsweetened Applesauce, or Cranberry Maple Sauce. Alternatively, a drizzle of honey is yet another way of adding some sweetness to your morning bowl.
Two photos showing a close-up of a homemade cereal and the cereal in a jar.

How to Store Homemade Muesli?

You can store your muesli mix in an airtight container or airtight jar at room temperature for up to a month. It may seem like the muesli ingredients should last longer according to their expiration dates. However, their longevity decreases when repeatedly exposed to air, such as when you open their storage container to get a helping of muesli.

I use this one-gallon glass jar to store my muesli mixture. If you want to keep your muesli for longer than a month, place the cereal in smaller containers and remove as much air as possible.

Expert Tips

Learning to make muesli at home is one of my favorite beginner-level recipes. With these pro suggestions, your dream breakfast will come together in seconds.

  • Use a large bowl to mix: I highly recommend using a large bowl to combine your ingredients, as this recipe results in 16 cups of muesli, and you need enough space to distribute your ingredients evenly. When I made muesli on Instagram, I mixed all the ingredients in a large, 1-gallon glass jar, and as you can see, it is best to do it in a big bowl and then transfer it to the container.
  • Use organic and gluten-free certified ingredients: Reduce your gluten intake, cut unhealthy chemicals from your diet, and support all-natural farms by using organic and gluten-free ingredients in this muesli dish.
  • Halve or multiply the recipe as you please: You can prepare as many or as few servings of this breakfast dish as you’d like. Refer to the formula to increase or decrease your ingredients accordingly.
  • Get creative: There are countless different ways to customize this easy homemade muesli recipe, and trying out new combinations is the best way to vary your diet without the hassle of everyday prep time. Whether you try this dish using an overnight oats-style, mix in some peanut butter, or top it with additional fresh fruits, don’t be afraid to have fun with it!
  • Eat smaller portions for weight loss: If you’re trying to shed some pounds, I recommend consuming it in smaller portions (perhaps, ½ cup per serving.) Though it is made using healthy and nutritious ingredients, consuming muesli in smaller portions is ideal for weight loss.
Fruit muesli in a bowl with milk and a spoon from the top view.

FAQs

Wondering how to cook muesli, what muesli’s nutritional information is, or how muesli differs from other breakfast staples? Here are all your homemade muesli questions answered:

Are the oats in muesli raw?

Yes, muesli contains raw rolled oats, one of the most popular oats for breakfast amongst all kinds of oats available for consumption. Depending on your recipe, you can make muesli using quick-cooking oats or old-fashioned rolled oats.

What’s the difference between muesli and granola?

Though the two share many ingredients, muesli and granola are different. Traditional muesli is a dry mix of uncooked ingredients. By contrast, granola is baked using a binder of oil or egg whites and often contains a sweetener, such as maple syrup, honey, or brown sugar.

Is muesli gluten-free?

Muesli can be gluten-free if you ensure that each component ingredient is also gluten-free (including gluten-free oats!).

Is homemade muesli healthy?

Muesli contains highly nutritious ingredients, such as fiber-rich oats, nutrient-dense superfoods, and heart-healthy grains. You can even add milk for extra calcium! Therefore, as long as you read your ingredients’ labels and know what you’re using, muesli can be a healthy way to start the day.

Other Breakfast Bowl Recipes You Might Also Like

When you make your own muesli, you’re bound to fall in love with tasty breakfast foods. Try these other fan-favorite breakfast bowl recipes, and you’ll start every morning energized and satisfied.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this How to Make Muesli recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Muesli oats in a bowl with a spoon from the top view.
Print

How to Make Muesli Recipe

Once you learn How to Make Muesli at home, you'll never have to buy store-bought cereal again. Not only is homemade muesli a nutrient-dense and filling breakfast, but it's also meal-prep friendly for busy mornings. This helpful guide also features plenty of substitutions and serving suggestions to accommodate your preferences, the ingredients you have on hand, and dietary restrictions and allergies.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 16 cups
Calories 406kcal

Ingredients

Instructions

  • Combine ingredients: Place all ingredients in a large bowl (or a glass jar, like I did) and stir to combine.
  • Serve/store: Cover it tightly with a lid. Enjoy it with your favorite milk and fresh fruit.

Video

Notes

  • When shopping for these ingredients, be sure to read the label. I recommend choosing ingredients that are made with no added sugar and are naturally gluten-free (if that is important to you) and organic, if possible.
  • The basic formula: The ratio that I follow for making muesli is 3 cups of Quick Cooking Rolled Oats, 5 cups of grain (or non-grain) cereals, 3 cups of dried fruit, and 1 cup of superfoods. You can find further information on substitutions within the blog post.
  • Serving amount and suggestion: This recipe yields 16 cups of mixed muesli (approx. 16 servings), though you can halve or multiply the recipe as necessary. 
  • Quick Cooking Oats vs. Old-Fashioned Rolled Oats: I use quick-cooking oats in my muesli because they require no cooking and are softened as soon as they are mixed in with the liquid. However, if you prefer using rolled oats, I recommend roasting them in a preheated 350-degree oven for 10-12 minutes, along with the seeds and nuts you are using. 
  • Calorie Information: Please know that the nutritional values below are approximate and may change depending on the brand you use.
  • Storage: Store it in an airtight container or jar at room temperature for up to a month. It may seem like the muesli ingredients should last longer according to their expiration dates. However, their longevity decreases when repeatedly exposed to air, such as when you open their storage container to get a helping of muesli. 
  • Longer storage: If you want it to last longer, you can store it in separate airtight containers (or jars) in smaller portions for up to 3 months. 
  • Serving suggestions:
    • Serve it with any of your favorite dairy or non-dairy milk (like you would serve store-bought cereal). 
    • Make it a warm bowl of oatmeal by cooking it with milk. My ratio is ½ cup muesli to 1 cup liquid (plant-based or regular milk or water).
    • Mix it with milk or yogurt (1 to 1 ratio) to make it overnight muesli.

Nutrition

Calories: 406kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 442mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 40IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 90mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-muesli/feed/ 7
Mascarpone Stuffed Dates with Pomegranate and Honey https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/ https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/#comments Thu, 15 Dec 2022 22:08:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11704 If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board,…]]>

If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board, or to perfect light dessert to serve after dinner, these mascarpone stuffed dates are just what you need. They are easy, quick, and addictively delicious!

Need more appetizer inspiration? Be sure to also check out our Bread Dipping Oil, Cheese Apple Appetizer, and Hot Goat Cheese Dip.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on a plate topped off with pomegranate seeds and nuts.

Ingredients

To make this stuffed dates recipe, you will need dates, mascarpone cheese, chopped nuts (I used a combination of walnuts and pistachios), pomegranate seeds, and honey.

When buying dates, look for fresh, plump, and large Medjool dates that are usually sold in the refrigerated section of your grocery store. You can buy pitted dates or remove the pits yourself.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in small bowls from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins:

  • Cheese: You can substitute mascarpone with any spreadable soft cheese. My favorite ones are goat cheese and cream cheese. Alternatively, you can stir in ½ teaspoon of vanilla extract in the cheese to make it even more flavorful.
  • Nuts: You can use any nuts here. I like to stuff my dates with walnuts and salty pistachios, but almonds, hazelnuts, cashews, and pecans would also be lovely. If you have the time, roast your nuts in a skillet for a few minutes for extra flavor.
  • Fruit: Pomegranate arils are wonderful to add a pop of color, but you can also use candied and chopped oranges or dried cranberries.
  • Honey: You can use maple syrup or agave nectar. Or, if you want to make it sugar-free, omit using any sweeteners.
  • Flaky Sea Salt: This is optional, but if you want to take it up a notch, you can sprinkle each mascarpone-filled date with a little flaky sea salt (such as Maldon salt (affiliate link))

How To Make This Recipe?

There are only a few steps to making this finger dessert. However, I recommend getting all your ingredients ready before starting so that you can quickly put them together.

Person showing how to stuff dates with mascarpone cheese in a collage of images.
  1. Remove pits: Using a paring knife, slice dates lengthwise, being careful not to cut them all the way through. Remove the pits and set them aside.
  2. Stuff with cheese: Using a small spoon, stuff each pitted date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese. 
person showing how to stuff dates with walnuts and pistachios.
  1. Garnish: Dip the filled dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so that they will stick to the cheese.
  2. Sprinkle: Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts or pistachios. Set them onto a plate.
  3. Drizzle: Drizzle the mascarpone-stuffed dates with a tablespoon of honey. Serve!

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this sweet stuffed dates recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it also stores well. Here’s how I do it:

  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with cheese, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh for up to 3 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container in the fridge. They make the perfect snack or afternoon pick-me-up.

Expert Tips:

This easy recipe is pretty self-explanatory, but here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try.

  • Room temperature: If you make these ahead of time, I recommend bringing them out 30 minutes before serving, as they taste best when they are served at room temperature.
  • Piping bag: You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. And if you decide to make a larger amount, I recommend using piping or a pastry bag (or a Ziploc bag) instead of using a spoon. Simply fill your bag with mascarpone and fill each date one by one.
  • Mascarpone filling: I find that a light drizzle of honey is all you need to sweeten the already sweet dates. However, if you prefer yours sweeter, you can mix honey with mascarpone and use that honey mascarpone mixture as your filling.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this stuffed dates dessert recipe was made by first drizzling dates with a tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil and then warming them up in a 350-degree preheated oven for 10 minutes. If you prefer to serve them warm, you can follow those steps. However, after literally making this recipe for over 10 years, I feel like the room-temperature stuffed dates are just as good.
Stuffed dates with mascarpone and walnuts on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What cheese pairs with dates?

Any mild-flavored soft and spreadable cheeses would pair well with dates. Goat cheese, mascarpone, and cream cheese are a few to name.

What can you stuff inside dates?

You can stuff dates with nuts, nut butters, soft cheese, and chocolate.

Can you put dates in the oven?

Yes, you can. Simply pop them in a preheated 350 F oven for 10 minutes to warm them up.

Other Party Appetizers You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mascarpone Stuffed Date recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Mascarpone Stuffed Dates Recipe

These Mascarpone Stuffed Medjool Dates are topped off with walnuts and pomegranate seeds and drizzled with honey. This easy recipe takes less than 20 minutes to put them all together. These are the perfect little "finger" desserts to impress your guests or even to satisfy your own sweet tooth.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 12 Dates
Calories 134kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 Medjool Dates
  • ½ cup Mascarpone cheese
  • 4 tablespoons pomegranate seeds
  • 3 tablespoons walnuts or pistachios (or both) chopped
  • 1-2 tablespoons honey
  • ¼ teaspoon flaky seas such as Maldon salt, optional

Instructions

  • Cut each date lengthwise making sure to not to cut them all the way through. Remove and discard pits.
  • Fill each date with a teaspoon mascarpone cheese. Dip the stuffed dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so they will stick to the cheese.
  • Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts and/or pistachios. Set them on a plate.
  • Drizzle them with honey and if using, sprinkle them with some flaky sea salt. Serve!

Notes

  • I recommend prepping all the ingredients before starting to assemble. I usually put each ingredient in a small bowl so that I can put them together quickly.
  • You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. If making a larger batch, you can fill a piping bag with mascarpone to help you stuff dates faster.
  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with mascarpone, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this recipe warmed the dates in the oven before stuffing them. In this updated version, I decided to skip that step as I think it is an extra step that is not necessary. However, if you prefer that version, feel free to follow the steps below:
    • Preheat the oven to 350 °F. Place dates on a small baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil.
    • Bake for 10-12 minutes in the oven. Let cool on the counter for 5 minutes. Fill each date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese.
    • Top the dates with honey, pomegranate seeds, and walnuts. Sprinkle them with flaky sea salt. Serve!
  •  

Nutrition

Serving: 12Dates | Calories: 134kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 191mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/feed/ 20
Frozen Yogurt Bark https://foolproofliving.com/frozen-yogurt-bark/ https://foolproofliving.com/frozen-yogurt-bark/#comments Fri, 12 Aug 2022 01:14:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58071 If you’re looking for more healthy, yogurt-based summer snacks, you’ve come to the right place! Dip your favorite seasonal fruits…]]>

If you’re looking for more healthy, yogurt-based summer snacks, you’ve come to the right place! Dip your favorite seasonal fruits in my Greek Yogurt Fruit Dip for a refreshing pick-me-up, or cool off after a morning walk with my Breakfast Yogurt Parfait or Yogurt Chia Seed Pudding

frozen yogurt bars with berries and nuts on a plate from the top view

Ingredients

The three simple ingredients in these frozen yogurt bars provide a pop of color, a great crunch, and a salty-sweet finish. They’re simply irresistible! For this recipe, you’ll need vanilla yogurt, fresh strawberries, and pistachios (or any nuts, granola, or your favorite toppings). 

yogurt, strawberries, and pistachios in bowls as ingredients for fro yo bark

Substitutions

Aside from being totally snackable and addictive, these homemade yogurt bars are also super customizable. Grab your kids or some friends, your favorite sweet or salty toppings, and go crazy! The sky’s the limit when it comes to substitutions, but here are some suggestions: 

  • Yogurt: I used my Vanilla Yogurt recipe for this Greek yogurt frozen bark, which is made with full-fat plain Greek yogurt mixed with a little honey and a splash of vanilla extract. I personally love using full-fat yogurt in this recipe, as it provides a super creamy texture and freezes well. I recommend subbing non-fat Icelandic yogurt or skim yogurt if you want a lower fat option that’s still thick and creamy. Or, feel free to use dairy-free yogurts if you’d prefer (you can make almond frozen yogurt by using full-fat almond yogurt).  
  • Sweetener: If you have a sweet tooth, feel free to use your favorite sweetener to make this yogurt fruit bark a truly sweet treat! I recommend using non-refined sugars like honey, maple syrup, or agave nectar, or even monk fruit sweetener or erythritol for a keto version of this frozen Greek yogurt bark. 
  • Fruits: Adding colorful fresh fruits to your frozen yogurt bark really makes it pop! I used strawberries, but any soft fruits or berries would be a delicious addition. Take a trip to your local grocery store to see what’s in season.
  • Nuts, granola, & other toppings: To make this Greek yogurt bark slightly savory and salty, top it with any nuts you prefer or have on hand. Or, toss in your favorite granola (I love this Chunky Granola), unsweetened coconut flakes, or even chia seeds to add some extra crunch! For an extra indulgent chocolate bark (similar to my Almond Chocolate Bark), sprinkle on your favorite chocolate chips and a thin swirl of peanut butter. 

How to Make Yogurt Bark?

Not only is this healthy yogurt bark easy to make, but it’s fun too! Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the baking sheet: Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. 
person showing how to make yogurt bars from the top view
  1. Spread the yogurt: Using an offset spatula (or a spoon), spread the yogurt in an even layer across the baking sheet. 
  2. Add your toppings: Sprinkle the vanilla Greek yogurt evenly with the strawberries, pistachios, or toppings of your choice. 
  3. Freeze: Freeze the yogurt bark overnight or for at least 3 hours until firm. 
  4. Serve: Remove the yogurt bark from the freezer and break it into large chunks. Serve immediately. 

How to Store

While it is best to enjoy this yogurt fruit bark as soon as it comes out of the freezer, you can also make a big batch ahead of time for quick grab-and-go snacks! Just keep in mind that the frozen Greek yogurt bark needs at least 3 hours in the freezer before serving, although freezing overnight is better and will help prevent melting. 

To store leftovers, make sure to break the bars into pieces before placing them in an airtight container. Keep in the freezer and enjoy them for up to 2-3 months. 

healthy frozen yogurt bars recipe on a plate from the side view

Expert Tips

The fun of this frozen yogurt bark recipe is that it’s supposed to look homemade and a little imperfect. While you can get creative with their look and taste, I encourage you to follow these tips for the best, foolproof results:

  • Treat it like ice cream: Just like ice cream, these healthy yogurt snacks will melt if left out too long. The key is to take them out of the freezer and let them rest at room temperature for about a minute before serving. Once they’ve softened a bit, enjoy them before they melt (trust me, they’ll be gone before they’ve had time to melt)! 
  • Use a small sheet pan: Smaller sheet pans are easier to work with and fit well in the freezer. Just make sure to use lined baking sheets with parchment or wax paper so the bars don’t stick!
  • Chop fruit into small pieces: Cut larger fruits into small pieces and make sure to equally distribute them on the yogurt. Doing so will ensure that you get a delicious piece of your favorite fruit in every bite.
  • Make it your own: This Greek yogurt bark recipe can be as delicious as you want to make it. Love Reese’s cups? Add in peanut butter and chocolate for a kid-friendly treat! Want to make a frozen yogurt berry bark with a pop of color and extra antioxidants? Sprinkle a combination of blueberries and strawberries on top of the yogurt!

FAQs

What is frozen yogurt bark?

Frozen yogurt bark, also called fro yo bark, is a healthy frozen treat made with yogurt and toppings such as fruit and nuts. The yogurt is spread thinly on a pan, frozen, and broken up into pieces to serve. The frozen yogurt bark recipe was made famous by the Pioneer Woman, and many recipes are adapted from the Pioneer Woman Frozen Yogurt Bites.

How long to freeze yogurt bark?

For best results, freeze yogurt bark overnight or for at least 3 hours. Keep leftovers in the fridge for up to three months.

Are frozen yogurt bars healthy?

Yes, they are! Yogurt has several health benefits, making these frozen yogurt bars a great source of gut-friendly probiotics, calcium, B vitamins, and other important nutrients. The toppings in this homemade frozen yogurt bark, such as fruit and nuts, also provide antioxidants and healthy fats.

Can you make yogurt bark with frozen fruit?

Yes, you can use frozen fruit to make frozen fruit yogurt! Just make sure to thaw the frozen fruit before adding it to the yogurt, which will allow the yogurt and fruit to thaw at the same time. Just keep in mind that thawing frozen fruit can be messy, as the process releases a lot of juices!

How to cut frozen yogurt bark?

Once you’re ready to serve your healthy frozen yogurt bark, you can break it up with your hands to make smaller yogurt pieces, cut it on a cutting board with a sharp knife, or even use a pizza cutter. This process is very hands-on, so get your kids involved!

Can you just freeze yogurt to make frozen yogurt?

Yes, you can, but it may be hard to consume. It’s best to spread the yogurt on a sheet pan before freezing to make it thinner and easier to eat.

Is frozen yogurt a dessert?

Frozen yogurt can definitely be a healthy dessert! To make it extra indulgent, add sweeteners like maple syrup, honey, or agave, or even add a swirl of peanut butter or dark chocolate. To make a healthy frozen yogurt bars recipe, add lots of fresh fruit for extra nutrients and antioxidants.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

Here at Foolproof Living, yogurt is such a staple in our fridge. If you’re like us and keep a yogurt stash in the fridge year-round, why not use it to make a new recipe? After you make these healthy yogurt bars, give one of these recipes a try!

If you try this Frozen Yogurt Bark recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

frozen yogurt bark recipe with berries and nuts on a plate from the top view
Print

Frozen Yogurt Bark Recipe

Cool off on a hot summer day with this refreshing Frozen Yogurt Bark. This kid-friendly treat combines sweet vanilla yogurt with fresh berries and crunchy toppings for a healthy ice cream alternative that's just as satisfying. This recipe is also super customizable, so grab your favorite toppings and get started!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Resting Time 3 hours
Total Time 3 hours 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 196kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups Vanilla Yogurt*
  • ½ cup sliced strawberries
  • ½ cup pistachios or any other nuts or granola

Instructions

  • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the yogurt on the sheet pan and spread it using an offset spatula.
  • Sprinkle it evenly with sliced strawberries and pistachios.
  • Freeze until firm, at least 3 hours or overnight.
  • Remove it from the freezer and break it into large chunks. Serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Yogurt: I used Greek Yogurt in this recipe as I enjoy the thickness of the Greek yogurt. I also prefer making my own Vanilla Yogurt (using plain Greek yogurt) as I can adjust the amount of sugar in it. However, if you prefer low-fat yogurt, I recommend using Icelandic-style yogurt as it will provide you with a similar thick (spreadable) consistency.
  • Storage: To store leftovers, make sure to break the bars into pieces before placing them in an airtight container. Keep in the freezer and enjoy them for up to 2-3 months. 
  • Toppings: I used berries and pistachios, but any combination of fruit and nuts and/or granola would work in this recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 81mg | Potassium: 453mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 119IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 228mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/frozen-yogurt-bark/feed/ 4
Greek Yogurt Parfait https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/ https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/#comments Wed, 06 Jul 2022 00:34:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15540 Need more ideas to make your mornings easier? Overnight Oats with Steel Cut Oats, Overnight Muesli with Yogurt, Yogurt Overnight…]]>

Need more ideas to make your mornings easier? Overnight Oats with Steel Cut Oats, Overnight Muesli with Yogurt, Yogurt Overnight Oats, and Chia Seed Oatmeal are all great options to make the most important meal of the day not only quick and easy but filling and nutritious. 

fruit and yogurt parfait garnished with mint from the front view

Why Should You Make This Recipe? 

Nothing beats fresh fruit, thick creamy yogurt, and crunchy granola. This layered fruit and yogurt parfait recipe will rival any Starbucks or Chick fil A yogurt parfait and save you money too. 

Need more convincing? Here are a few other reasons to give it a try:

  • Made with 3 ingredients. Fresh fruit, crunchy granola, and Greek yogurt are all you need for this easy healthy breakfast parfait that you can make in minutes.
  • It stores well so you can make ahead for a grab-and-go breakfast.
  • Easy to customize with whatever you have on hand. If you don’t have fresh fruit, use frozen fruit. Got a bit of a sweet craving? Add honey or maple syrup. The options are endless for this healthy Greek yogurt parfait recipe.

Ingredients 

Since this greek yogurt parfait only has 3 ingredients (not counting the optional sweetener), I recommend using the best ingredients you can find.

ingredients for yogurt parfait recipe from the top view
  • Greek Yogurt: I prefer whole milk plain yogurt for its thicker consistency and no added sugar, but any of your favorite types of yogurt will work as well. Vanilla Greek yogurt (I make mine at home), honey yogurt, and even vegan choices such as coconut or almond milk yogurt would work well in this recipe.
  • Berries/Fruit: I used a combination of fresh strawberries and blueberries, but any of your favorite fruit combinations (including my Breakfast Fruit Salad) would work. No fresh fruit? Use frozen fruit! Frozen berries work perfectly in this recipe.
  • Granola: I might be biased but I think the best granola for yogurt parfait is homemade granola as and it can be made with less sugar (than most store-bought brands). However, in a crunch, you can use storebought. If you are in need of a good granola recipe, feel free to check out my Chunky Granola. Or, if you are after high protein yogurt breakfast, try my Quinoa Crunch for added plant-based protein.

Substitutions and Optional Additions 

The best part about a DIY parfait is making it your own. Here are a few great choices to get you started. 

  • Sweetener: Add a natural sweetener like a drizzle of honey, maple syrup, or agave to your homemade parfait. Or, try incorporating my Honey Syrup, Blueberry Puree, or fresh raspberry sauce to flavor the yogurt. 
  • Protein Powder: Add a scoop of your favorite whey or plant-based protein powder for a high-protein snack. 
  • Superfoods: Incorporate ½ teaspoon of chia seeds or hemp seeds per serving to make it even more nutritious.
  • Nut Butters: Add a tablespoon of almond butter or peanut butter for healthy fats and protein. Though I recommend checking the labels for added sugars.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Want to cut down on carbs? Switch out the granola for a handful of nuts and seeds. However, if you prefer a low-calorie yogurt parfait with no added sugar omit the granola and the nuts.
  • Chocolate Chips: If you can’t deny your sweet tooth and want to splurge, chocolate chips may just satisfy your craving.

How To Make A Parfait With Greek Yogurt

Making this yogurt and fruit parfait cannot be easier. Follow these steps for a quick breakfast that is not only delicious but also visually impressive:

person whisking yogurt with honey in a bowl
  1. Add the sweetener (optional): If using, whisk together your choice of sweetener with your favorite yogurt until it is completely whipped and creamy.
  2. Build the yogurt parfait layers: Spoon half of the yogurt at the bottom of a bowl, tall glasses, or mason jars. Layer with half of the fruit and half of the granola. Carefully spoon the remaining yogurt mixture into the glass and add the rest of the fruit and granola to the top. 
photos showing how to layer parfait with berries and granola
  1. Garnish: If you prefer, finish it with a drizzle of honey (or maple syrup), more fresh fruit, and granola on top. Serve immediately or store in the refrigerator for later.

How To Make Ahead And Store 

Got some leftovers or want to make it ahead? No problem! Follow the tips below to enjoy these healthy yogurt parfaits for days:

Make-Ahead Instructions:

Making this layered parfait recipe as a part of your weekly meal plan is a breeze, but there are a few things to keep in mind:

  1. Serve granola on the side: I recommend leaving the granola out when layering the parfait because as it sits it will lose its crunchy texture and become soggy. Let’s face it, no one likes soggy granola. Instead, serve it on the side and add the granola into the parfait right before serving.
  2. Use mason jars: I think 8 oz. mason jars – affiliate link – (mostly used for canning) are ideal for the perfectly portioned and grab-and-go homemade yogurt parfait. Simply layer yogurt and fruit, tighten it with the lid and store it in the fridge.

Make-ahead yogurt parfait should keep fresh in the fridge for up to 4 days.

To Store Leftovers:

If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) and keep them in the fridge for up to 4 days. Be sure to serve them with extra fruit and granola on the side.

person drizzling strawberry blueberry granola parfait with honey

Expert Tips 

Here are a few quick tips for the best yogurt fruit granola parfait that you can make over and over again.

  • Whisk yogurt: It might sound like an extra step, but taking a few minutes to whisk the yogurt in a bowl makes it even more creamy and easy to layer. 
  • Make it your own: The thing I love about this simple recipe is that it is so easy to change it up with whatever you have on hand. Use these measurements as a place to start and make it your own with different fruit, yogurt, and granola.
  • When serving for breakfast or brunch: If I am serving this for friends, I make sure to take my time in layering, use colorful fresh fruit and always garnish it with fresh mint. People go crazy as soon as they see pretty parfaits layered with colorful fruit in jars.

FAQs

What is the difference between yogurt and parfait?

Yogurt is a thick milk-based product that is sold plain or with other flavorings such as fruit and sweetener. A parfait, on the other hand, is a layered dessert typically consisting of yogurt, fresh or frozen fruit and berries, ice cream, and whipped topping. 

What is in a yogurt parfait?

Most Yogurt parfait recipes are made with plain or flavored yogurt, fresh fruit (mostly berries), and granola made with ground oats, nuts, and seeds.

What is the best yogurt for a parfait?

The best yogurt for parfait is plain Greek yogurt as it has a thick and creamy consistency that is ideal for a yogurt parfait recipe. Plus, it is made without the addition of sugar making this breakfast a healthy option. However, you can use any type of yogurt (including plant-based options) to make this easy breakfast recipe.

Is yogurt parfait healthy?

It is no secret that Greek Yogurt and fresh fruit are good for you and are recommended as a part of a healthy diet. However, it is best to be conservative when adding granola to the parfait as it is usually made with added sugars.

How many calories in a yogurt parfait?

One serving of this Greek Yogurt Parfait recipe is 298 calories.

Other Easy Breakfast Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you are a fan of Chic Fil A’s Yogurt Parfait or Pioneer Women’s Yogurt Parfait with honey, I hope you give my version a try. I know those are favored by many people but my version here is just as easy and delicious.

And if you have leftover yogurt, try your hand at making my Frozen Yogurt Bark as well. It’s a healthy dessert that is a great alternative to ice cream.

If you try this Fruit and Yogurt Parfait recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Print

Greek Yogurt Parfait Recipe

This Fruit and Yogurt Parfait recipe is made by layering yogurt with granola and fruit. It is quick and easy to put together. It also stores well so it is a great breakfast recipe to make it a part of your weekly meal prep.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 1 servings
Calories 298kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon honey or maple syrup optional – more as a drizzle
  • ¾ cup plain Greek yogurt
  • ¼ cup berries or any other fruit cut into small 1-inch chunks
  • ¼ cup homemade granola or store bought granola

Instructions

  • If using a sweetener, mix it with greek yogurt in a small bowl until fully combined.
  • To layer the yogurt parfait, place half of the yogurt at the bottom of a mason jar or a bowl. Top it off with half of the fruit and half of the granola. Cover them with the rest of the yogurt and top it off with the rest of the fruit and granola.
  • If preferred, finish it off with a drizzle of honey. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • This recipe can be multiplied as many times as you want.
  • Make Ahead: If you are making these granola parfaits as a part of your meal plan I would recommend against using the granola as a part of the layers. Instead, just layer them with fruit and yogurt and serve the granola on the side to add in later to prevent it from getting soggy. I also recommend using 8 oz. mason jars as they are not only ideal in size but also great for serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 298kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 78mg | Potassium: 185mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 122IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 225mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/layered-yogurt-parfait/feed/ 4
Fresh Peach Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/#comments Fri, 24 Jun 2022 15:47:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9726 Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or…]]>

Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or pick your favorite from my collection of fun Mexican Party Food ideas.

Fresh peach salsa with tomatoes in a large bowl from the top view

Ingredients

With a few simple, fresh ingredients, you can enjoy this easy peach salsa recipe as an appetizer or a great topping year-round. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

To make this easy homemade fresh fruit salsa recipe gather your fresh peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeño pepper, red onion, fresh lime juice, salt, and black pepper. It is optional, but you can also add fresh cilantro and a little chili powder to finish it off.

Substitutions & Possible Additions

  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work for this Mexican peach salsa. When buying peaches, I recommend picking ones that are not overly ripe, as the ripe ones tend to be too juicy. You do want some of the juices, but it should be just enough to compliment the dressing instead of overpowering it.
  • Tomatoes: I used cherry tomatoes, but you can try Roma tomatoes or other heirloom varieties, such as San Marzano or Brandywine are also delicious.
  • Onions: Use white (such as Vidalia onions) or green onions as a substitute for red onions. 
  • Garlic Cloves: A clove of garlic finely minced can add a burst of flavor and can be added in the end.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Add in a handful of walnuts or pepitas for a bit of a crunch.

How To Make

This delicious homemade fresh peach salsa recipe comes together in 15 minutes and mixes the freshest ingredients for a mouthwatering addition to any meal. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make peach salsa
  1. Prep ingredients: Place fresh ripe peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno pepper, and red onion in a large bowl.
  2. Add seasonings: Sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper, and pour lime juice over the assembled ingredients. 
  3. Toss and garnish: Lightly mix ingredients together. If you choose, you can add chili powder and cilantro as your garnish.
  4. Serve: You can serve immediately. However, if you have the time, let your peach jalapeno salsa sit for 15 to 30 minutes to let the flavors to blend.

How To Store

If you didn’t finish this delicious peach salsa in one sitting (is that even possible?), you have options for preserving that fantastic flavor.

  • Storage: For the best results, you can store your homemade peach salsa in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this salsa recipe.

What to Serve with Peach Salsa

This homemade salsa recipe is perfect when you want to add a Mexican flavor to chicken, pork, or fish recipes. But guess what? It is so versatile that you can pretty much use it anywhere you use regular tomato salsa, which is probably why some even call it, peach pico de gallo.

Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • With your favorite tortilla chips: A great appetizer! Chips and salsa, how can you go wrong?
  • Makes a great topping: Vegetable-filled Burrito Bowls or Baked Chicken Breasts smothered in this fruity and spicy peach salsa recipe. Need I say more?
  • Peach salsa for fish: This recipe is a great accompaniment for grilled fish like this  Grilled Mahi Mahi. It would also be delicious on Grilled Shrimp or  Breaded Fish
  • Tacos: Of course! Fresh salsa is terrific on tacos, and this salsa recipe with peaches pairs amazingly well with tacos, especially fish tacos. For an elevated taco experience, try it on; Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, and a vegan-friendly Black Bean Quinoa Taco.

Variations

There are many ways to customize this peach and tomato salsa recipe to suit your tastebuds.

  • Turn up the heat: For a spicier peach salsa, leave the seeds in the jalapeno peppers. If you are a brave soul with an affinity for super spicy salsa, then swap jalapenos with habanero peppers.
  • Cool it down: If heat isn’t your thing, you can adjust your spice level. Use fewer hot peppers, or omit the hot peppers altogether for a mild fruity salsa still loaded with flavor.
  • Without tomatoes: If you’re not a fan of your peach salsa with tomatoes, you can simply leave them out. It will be sweeter but still delicious.
  • Cilantro: If peach cilantro salsa is not your thing, simply leave the cilantro out and make it without. It will be just as delicious.
peach salsa served on a tortilla chip from the front

Expert Tips

Here are a few foolproof tips that will ensure each bite is nothing short of sweet and juicy peach perfection.

  • Added Salt: If you are serving this fresh fruit salsa with tortilla chips, I recommend adjusting the amount of salt you use to prevent it from being overly salty.
  • Bite-Size: I suggest finely diced peaches (½-inch cubes) to achieve a better blend of flavors, but if you prefer a chunkier salsa, you can chop the pieces a little larger.
  • Marinate: If time permits, let it sit in the fridge for 15-20 minutes to allow the flavors to marinate and blend. 

FAQs

Can you freeze fresh peach salsa?

It is not recommended that you freeze fresh peach salsa. The freezing process will alter the texture and consistency of your salsa. For optimal flavor, you should eat this salsa with peaches and tomatoes fresh.

Can you can fresh peach salsa? 

Most canned peach salsa recipes are made by cooking peaches and tomatoes before preserving them in a jar. Since this recipe is made with fresh peaches and tomatoes, it would not be ideal for canning.

Other Delicious Peach Recipes You Might Like

Do you have an abundance of just-picked peaches? Need more ideas about what you can do with these sweet juicy gems? I have listed a few more recipes to satisfy your cravings during the peach season and all year round.

Person stirring a bowl of Fresh Peach and Walnut Salsa

If you try this Fresh Peach Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

peach salsa in a bowl from the top view
Print

Fresh Peach Salsa Recipe

This Fresh Peach Salsa recipe is made in 15 minutes with juicy peaches, tomatoes, jalapeno peppers, and red onion. Serve it as a condiment over grilled fish or chicken, fish tacos or by itself with tortilla chips on the side.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 81kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 peaches cut into small pieces (½ inch cubes) – approximately 2 cups – pick firm but ripe peaches
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 small red bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ red onion chopped
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup lime juice
  • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro optional
  • ¼ teaspoon chili powder optional

Instructions

  • Place peaches, tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno, red onion, salt and pepper in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and give it a toss.
  • Garnish with cilantro and chili powder, if using.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve it with your favorite tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • This recipe yields approximately 3 cups of fresh peach salsa.
  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work in this recipe.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 81kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.05g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 318mg | Potassium: 325mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 889IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/feed/ 16
Spinach and Feta Cheese Bรถrek https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/#comments Tue, 14 Jun 2022 22:52:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1824 What is Borek? Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made…]]>

What is Borek?

Crisp and rich, borek is a savory Turkish pastry often served at breakfast and brunch. It’s made by layering ultra-thin dough, an egg mixture, and various fillings. Borek also comes in many shapes and sizes, ranging from cigarette-shaped rolls to large trays. 

Traditionally, chefs prepare borek with Turkish yufka dough, an ultra-thin, unleavened dough made from flour, water, and salt. Yufka pastry leaves recipes—like borek—often use layers of a yogurt or milk mixture to keep the dough equally moist and flakey. 

Turkish borek sliced and placed on an oval plate

Although feta and spinach borek is a quintessential Turkish dish, you can find Turkish borek recipes across the former Ottoman Empire. The Balkans, Eastern Europe, and even Northern Africa are just a few places. Perhaps because of the pastry’s geographic range, its name has many alternate spellings. “Bourek,” “burek,” “börek,” and even “bòrek” are all popular variations.

Recipe Ingredients

Who knew authentic Turkish cuisine could be so easy to make? This spinach borek recipe only uses simple ingredients that you can find at your local grocery store.

yogurt wash and phyllo dough - ingredients for borek recipe on a marble backdrop
  • Phyllo Dough: You’ll need one package of phyllo dough to make this recipe, which you can find in the grocery store’s frozen section. Though chefs traditionally make Turkish borek dough from layers of yufka, phyllo dough (this is the brand I used) is easier to find here in the U.S. so that’s what I am using. Be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Yogurt Wash to Keep Layers Moist: For the yogurt wash, gather olive oil, whole milk, egg, plain unsweetened yogurt, salt, and black pepper.
spinach and feta filling ingredients from the top view
  • Borek Filling: In this spinach burek recipe, your filling will consist of olive oil, chopped onion, baby spinach, kosher salt, black pepper, crumbled feta cheese, sesame seeds, and egg yolks. You may also add poppy seeds or Nigella seeds if desired.

Substitutions

  • Cheese: Turkish feta cheese is a classic in this traditional börek recipe, but shredded mozzarella, cheddar cheese, and Monterey jack would also work.
  • Oil: If you’d rather not use olive oil, you can make this bourek recipe extra rich by using melted butter instead. Just make sure the butter is cool before using it.
  • Baby spinach: Swiss chard makes an excellent substitution for fresh spinach in this Turkish cheese pastry, as long as you sauté it first. You could also replace the baby spinach with potatoes for a heartier filling.

How to Make Borek with Spinach

Sheet pan borek is one of my recipe book’s tastiest and most effortless Turkish side dishes. You can learn how to make borek like an expert in just a few simple steps.

Cook the Vegetables & Make the Filling

person sauteeing veggies and making the yogurt milk mixture
  1. Sauté the veggies: Heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion to the pan and cook, frequently stirring, until translucent (4-5 minutes). Then, add the baby spinach, salt, and pepper to the pan. Toss the mixture every few minutes using kitchen tongs. Let it cook until the spinach loses most of its volume (approx. 5 minutes). Turn off the heat and let the veggies cool for 15-20 minutes.
    PRO TIP: If your veggie filling has too much liquid, I recommend straining the juices using a colander. Straining will keep your borek from turning soggy when fully assembled.
  2. Prepare the yogurt milk mixture: While your vegetables cool, whisk your olive oil, milk, egg, whole-milk yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a measuring cup.
  3. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. 

Layer the Phyllo Dough

a collage of photos showing how to assemble borek from the start
  1. Layer the bottom borek sheets: Line your sheet pan with parchment paper. Then, layer sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper until the whole pan is covered, using as many sheets as necessary. Let any excess dough hang over the sides. 
  2. Brush the phyllo: Lay a second layer of phyllo on top of the first, covering every part of the sheet pan. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture over the sheets, and use a pastry brush to spread it evenly over the dough.
  3. Add layers: Add another two layers of phyllo sheets on top of the first. Brush the top layer again with yogurt wash. Then, place one more layer of phyllo dough on the washed layer. Don’t brush this top layer with the milk mixture.
  4. Layer the filling: Distribute your cooled sautéed veggies over the top sheet of phyllo in one even layer. Then, sprinkle the crumbled feta cheese evenly over the spinach. 
a collage of images showing how to assemble cheese borak food
  1. Layer the top borek sheets: Place another two layers of phyllo dough over the spinach filling, covering it completely. Brush the top layer with the milk and yogurt wash. Then, place two more layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer. Brush the top of the assembled pastry with an even layer of the yogurt mixture.
  2. Fold excess dough: If any sheets are hanging over the side of the pan, fold them in toward the pastry’s center. Be sure to brush this extra dough with the milk mixture. At this point, your borek should look moist and tightly packed.
collage of photos showing before and after bourek recipe is baked.
  1. Cut the pastry: Cut your borek into 12 equal pieces using a knife. 
  2. Add toppings: Mix the egg yolks in a bowl. Brush the top layer of the borek with a generous layer of egg wash. If desired, sprinkle the top with sesame seeds and nigella seeds.
  3. Bake: Bake the borek in the preheated oven for 30-35 minutes or until the top is golden brown. 
  4. Serve: Remove the pastry from the oven and let it cool for 15-20 minutes on a wire rack. Then, slice it along the pre-cut lines, and serve while still warm.

What to Serve with Borek

There’s a reason why so many people call it “borek bread.” This flaky and flavorful Turkish side makes a perfect pair with any dish you’d eat with bread, from light salads to meaty mains.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

Make meal prep stress a thing of the past with this Turkish cheese borek recipe. Whether you make this dish a day or an entire month in advance, these storage tips have you covered.

  • Make ahead: To make your pastry ahead of time, cook the burek spinach and onions one day in advance. Store the veggies in an airtight container in the fridge, removing it when you’re ready to assemble your borek. Another option is to assemble the entire pastry, cover it with plastic wrap, and store it in the fridge overnight. Then, cook your burek as usual when ready to eat.
  • Store: Leftover borek will stay fresh for up to 3 days when stored in an airtight container. Just be sure to let it reach room temperature before storing.
  • Freeze: You can freeze your spinach burek recipe for up to one month before baking it. Just be sure to cover the pastry tightly with plastic wrap and cover it with aluminum foil to prevent freezer burn.
  • Thaw: Transfer your burek from the freezer to the fridge one full day before you plan to bake it. Then, bake the pastry according to the standard cooking directions (350 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes).

Filling Variations

The sky’s the limit when it comes to filling this Turkish cheese pastry. Whether you want a borek recipe with meat or a cheese burek for feta fans, these popular fillings are just what you need.

  • Meat borek: Make your pastry extra satisfying by adding a savory protein. Any meat will work, but ground beef borek, borek with minced meat, and ground lamb borek are some of my favorite savory fillings.
  • Cheese & herbs: Don’t want to add veggies? No problem! Borek with cheese and fresh herbs is a common filling you’ll adore. Simply fill your Turkish filo pastry with feta cheese and fresh parsley.
  • Try it with different vegetables: When you make burek, spinach is only one of the countless delicious veggies you can use. Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms and Baked Portobello Mushrooms are two of my favorite alternatives.
turkish cheese borek right after it comes out of the oven

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make international eats. With these foolproof tips, your cheese and spinach borek will come out flaky, gooey, and decadent every time.

  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.
  • It’s OK if you miss a layer: Don’t stress if you miss a layer when assembling your borek. This dish is highly forgiving, and it’s always better to have too few layers than too many.
  • Cover the filo sheets with a damp towel: As you are making this Turkish spinach borek recipe, be sure to cover the filo dough sheets with a damp towel to prevent them from drying. 
  • Don’t skimp on the yogurt wash: Be sure to spread the yogurt wash evenly over your Turkish pastry. Every layer should be adequately moist after brushing. 
  • Slice before baking: Slicing the borek pastry before it goes into the oven will make cutting and serving much easier. Simply slice the dough into your ideal portion sizes when you finish layering your borek.
  • Let the borek sit overnight: Though this step is optional, I highly recommend letting your borek recipe sit in the fridge overnight. Allowing your borek to rest will give your phyllo dough time to absorb the flavorful liquid, giving your pastry extra moisture and savoriness.
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sautéed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before adding it to your borek. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Prewashed baby spinach: If you have a busy schedule or simply don’t want to spend hours in the kitchen, prewashed baby spinach will save you oodles of time.
  • Phyllo dough vs. puff pastry: Though phyllo dough and puff pastry can be found in the same section of the grocery store, they are not interchangeable. French puff pastry contains many layers of dough and butter, which rise and become airy in the oven. By contrast, phyllo pastry is paper-thin and bakes to a super fine, flaky texture.
Learn how to make Turkish Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek recipe - Borek served with Turkish Tea.

FAQs

You don’t have to be Turkish to be a borek buff. This handy FAQ will answer all your questions about my recipe for Turkish borek, from the dish’s national origins to its nutritional content.

Is borek the same as spanakopita?

Turkish borek and Greek spanakopita come from the same family of pastry. However, the two often differ in preparation and texture, with Greek spanakopita often having a flakier, puffier crust. 

Is it burek or borek?

Both spellings of this pastry are technically correct, depending on the country. Turkish people tend to spell the name as “borek,” while “burek” is more common in the Balkans.

What countries have burek?

Many may think of borek as Turkish food. However, you can find this iconic dish in numerous countries across the former Ottoman Empire. This area includes countries in the Balkans, Middle East, and Northern Africa.

Is spinach borek healthy?

This recipe for burek with cheese isn’t the healthiest, with many calories coming from fats and carbs. However, borek can provide essential nutrients from its vitamin-rich spinach and calcium-rich feta when enjoyed in moderation.

How do you eat borek?

 Traditionally, people have Turkish cheese borek for breakfast or brunch during family gatherings. However, you can eat borek alongside any meal in place of bread.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Turkish Borek recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person serving spinach and feta cheese borek
Print

Spinach and Feta Cheese Börek – Turkish Borek Recipe

Learn how to make Spinach and Feta Cheese Borek – A classic Turkish Borek recipe made with stuffing phyllo sheets with spinach and feta. This authentic and simple recipe can be made ahead and baked right before serving for a warm and delicious breakfast or brunch recipe.
Course Appetizer, Breakfast
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 5 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 174kcal

Ingredients

For the Spinach and Feta filling:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • 1 medium-size onion peeled and chopped
  • 16 oz. baby spinach leaves washed and dried
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 oz. crumbled feta cheese

For The Milk Yogurt Mixture:

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil or any vegetable oil such as avocado oil
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 tablespoons plain whole-milk yogurt
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

For The Layers:

  • 1 package of Phyllo Dough* thawed overnight in the fridge
  • 2 egg yolks
  • 2 tablespoons sesame seeds
  • ½ teaspoon Nigella seeds optional

Instructions

  • Cook the filling: Heat 1 tablespoon of olive oil in a large pan at medium heat. Add the chopped onion and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add the spinach, salt, and pepper. Cook it, tossing it every few minutes using kitchen tongs, until the spinach loses most of its volume, around 5 minutes. Give it a stir and turn the heat off. Let it cool for 15 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
  • Make the yogurt milk mixture: Whisk olive oil, milk, egg, yogurt, salt, and black pepper in a bowl until combined.
  • To assemble: Line a baking sheet (mine is 12X17) with parchment paper. In a single layer, place sheets of phyllo dough onto the parchment paper. Use as many sheets as you need to make sure that the pan’s whole surface is covered. It is okay if some filo is overhanging on the sides.
  • Place another layer of phyllo on top of the first, again making sure that the bottom of the pan is covered. Pour 3-4 tablespoons of the milk mixture on the top layer of dough and brush it over the filo sheets, making sure that it is evenly spread.
  • Stack another two layers of phyllo dough on top of the first two. Again, brush the milk mixture over the top phyllo sheet. Then, cover the top sheet with one more layer of phyllo dough—not two. Do not brush the top sheet with the milk mixture again.
  • Spread the now-cooled spinach and crumbled feta cheese evenly over the top layer of phyllo sheets.
  • Place another two layers of phyllo sheets over the filling, covering it completely. Brush another 3-4 teaspoons of the milk mixture over the topmost sheet. Then, place two final layers of phyllo dough on top of the washed layer, and brush the top with the milk mixture. You should have 9 layers of dough in total.
  • If there are sheets overhanging on the side, fold them in towards the pastry’s center and make sure that they are brushed with the milk mixture. At this point, the borek should look nicely moist and tightly packed.
  • Using a sharp knife, pre-slice borek into 12 equal pieces (please refer to the video for a visual).
  • Mix egg yolks in a bowl.
  • Brush each slice with egg yolk and sprinkle with sesame seeds and nigella seeds if using.
  • Bake in the oven for 30-35 minutes or until it turns golden brown.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, slice, and serve while it is still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Prior to adding salt to the filling, it is good to taste your feta cheese and determine if you need more salt or not.
  • If you have time, I recommend letting your borek rest before baking it. Simply cover the baking sheet with plastic wrap and place it in the fridge. Let the pastry rest for a few hours or up to overnight. Then, bake as usual.
  • Depending on the size of the sheet pan you are using, you may not need to use the whole package of phyllo dough. 
  • Strain your veggie mixture: If your sauteed veggie mixture has any liquid, I suggest straining it in a colander before using it as a filling. Too much liquid will turn your pastry soggy.
  • Don’t worry about torn phyllo dough: Phyllo dough is so delicate that it may tear while you work with it. Don’t worry! You can easily pinch phyllo dough back together, and a few tears won’t ruin the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 6851IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 219mg | Iron: 3mg

This recipe was originally published in November 2013. It has been updated in June 2022 with new text, photos, and a how-to video with very minor edits (mostly for clarification) to the originally published recipe.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-and-feta-cheese-borek/feed/ 69
Turkey Bacon in Air Fryer https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-bacon-air-fryer/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-bacon-air-fryer/#respond Tue, 05 Apr 2022 19:37:06 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49688 Why Should You Try This Recipe? Perfect for busy mornings, this air fryer turkey bacon recipe will soon become a…]]>

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Perfect for busy mornings, this air fryer turkey bacon recipe will soon become a favorite to serve along with your favorite breakfast, sandwich, and snack recipes.

  • Ready in just 10 minutes, this method is quick and easy with minimal prep time. Plus, the end result is deliciously crispy turkey bacon that everyone will love.
  • Less mess and easy cleanup thanks to the convenience of air fryer technology.
  • It’s a hands-off recipe with a simple cooking process. Just pop the bacon in the hot air fryer basket and wait for it to crisp up!
  • It is a healthier choice and a great alternative to traditional bacon fried in a pan.
  • It works perfectly in recipes like omelets, skillets, and quick breakfast sandwiches, or as a side with pancakes or French toast. And it’s not just for breakfast: try using it in soups and salads for lunch or dinner.
Crispy turkey bacon cooked in air fryer is held by a woman

Ingredients Notes

For this recipe, you’ll need a 12-oz package of turkey bacon. 

uncured Turkey bacon brands from a local grocery store

I prefer uncured turkey bacon because the cured options use harsh chemical preservatives, such as sodium nitrates. If you are in need of suggestions for the best turkey bacon options in US grocery stores, I recommend checking out Trader Joe’s, Wellshire, and Applegate turkey bacon brands.

With that being said, I think you can find the best brand of turkey bacon by buying a few different ones from your local grocery store and trying them out. 

How to Make Air Fryer Turkey Bacon?

Below is my step by step instructions on how to make turkey bacon in air fryer:

Steps showing how to make turkey bacon in the air fryer
  1. Preheat your air fryer to 360 degrees F (182 C)
  2. Place the slices of turkey bacon in the preheated air fryer basket, making sure they do not overlap. If they don’t fit in a single layer, it is best to cook them in multiple batches.
  3. Cook for 5 minutes, flip each one of the turkey bacon strips one by one and cook for another 5 minutes. Please note that cook time might change slightly based on the air fryer you are using. The best way to gauge doneness is by checking it after the cooking time is complete and adjusting the timing as necessary.
  4. Serve immediately.

How to Store

Since turkey bacon is easy to make and tastes best hot from the air fryer tray, I suggest eating it right away. If you have leftovers, let them reach room temperature and then store them in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Ways to Serve

Expert Tips

  • Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket. If the pieces overlap or stack, the bacon won’t cook evenly. If necessary, cook any extra bacon in a second batch.
  • Make turkey bacon fresh. While this dish keeps for up to 3 days in the fridge, it tastes best straight out of the air fryer. 
  • If the bacon isn’t crispy enough after the 10 minute mark, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until it reaches your desired texture. In my recipe tests, 10 minutes was the perfect cooking time, but different air fryers cook differently so make sure the texture of the final product fits your personal preference.
Air fried turkey bacon on a plate from the top view

FAQs

How long to cook turkey bacon in air fryer?

The total time to cook air fryer turkey bacon is 10 minutes, 5 minutes on each side.

What is the ideal temperature for frying turkey bacon in the air fryer?

Air fry turkey bacon at 360 degrees Fahrenheit (182 Celsius).

Other Air Fryer Recipes You’ll Enjoy

If you try this Air Fryer Turkey Bacon recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to leave a star rating and comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer turkey bacon on a plate close up
Print

Turkey Bacon in Air Fryer Recipe

Cooking Turkey Bacon in the air fryer is easy and quick. The best part is that it delivers the crispiest turkey bacon without any of the mess.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 126kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 package Turkey Bacon (12 ounces)

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 360 degrees F.
  • Place as many slices of bacon as possible in the air fryer basket making sure that they are not overlapping. If you need to air fry more bacon you may have to do it in several batches.
  • Cook for 5 minutes and then flip the turkey bacon and cook for another 5 minutes.
  • Carefully remove the cooked turkey bacon from the air fryer and serve while it is still hot.

Notes

  • Storage: I find that turkey bacon is best right after it is out of the air fryer and while it is still hot. However, you can store the leftovers in the fridge in an air tight container for up to 3 days.
  • Check on doneness: Cook time might slightly vary based on the air fryer you are using. 

Nutrition

Calories: 126kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 754mg | Potassium: 130mg | Calcium: 3mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkey-bacon-air-fryer/feed/ 0
Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shiitake-mushrooms/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shiitake-mushrooms/#respond Wed, 16 Mar 2022 22:41:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49138 Before roasting shiitake mushrooms it is important to clean them properly. If you are new to it, be sure to…]]>

Before roasting shiitake mushrooms it is important to clean them properly. If you are new to it, be sure to check out my beginner-friendly post for more information on How To Clean Shiitake Mushrooms. And if you’d rather cook them in a skillet, check out my Sauteed Shiitake Mushrooms recipe.

Baked Shiitake mushrooms in a plate with a spoon on the side

Ingredients

To make this baked shiitake mushrooms recipe, you will need fresh shiitake mushrooms, olive oil, kosher salt, and freshly ground black pepper. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

Variations and Substitutions

  • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil you like. I usually prefer the neutral flavor of extra virgin olive oil. Still, avocado oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, and even melted butter would also work. 
  • Flavor with garlic: Mince a clove of fresh garlic, and voila: The perfect seasoning for a garlicky roasted shiitake mushrooms dish that’s as flavorful as it is effortless.
  • Additional seasonings and spices: This shiitake mushrooms recipe may be basic, but you can easily jazz it up with numerous spices and seasonings. My favorite way to add flavor to my roast mushrooms is to sprinkle them with garlic powder, ground cumin, red pepper flakes, and/or Italian seasoning.
  • White wine vinegar: Some people also drizzle their shiitakes with a tablespoon of white wine vinegar before roasting them to brighten up their earthy flavor. 
  • Garnishes: Finish off your baked masterpiece with chopped fresh herbs like parsley, thyme, rosemary, or lemon zest to give your mushrooms a fresh twist.
  • A squeeze of lemon juice: If I’m planning to use these baked shiitake mushrooms in a salad, I love drizzling them with some freshly squeezed lemon or lime juice. These coated mushrooms pair well with salad greens such as spring mix and butter lettuce.

Instructions on How to Make

The steps to roasting shiitake mushrooms could not be easier. Simply:

  1. Heat oven & prepare a sheet pan: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a roasting pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set it aside.
person cleaning shiitake mushrooms
  1. Start by cleaning shiitake mushrooms: Place mushrooms in a colander and rinse under cold water. Transfer onto a clean kitchen towel and pat dry with paper towels to dry them as much as you can. Alternatively, you can use a damp cloth to clean mushrooms one by one. 
    Remove the stems and save them to use in mushroom stock for later.
person seasoning shiitake mushrooms for baking
  1. Add the flavorings: Place the now-cleaned shiitake mushroom caps in a large bowl. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Toss mushrooms using clean hands, ensuring that you evenly coat each mushroom with the flavorings.
person arranging mushrooms on a sheet pan
  1. Arrange on the sheet pan: Place mushroom caps onto the prepared rimmed baking sheet and arrange them on in a single layer with the caps facing down (or gill side up).
  2. Bake & turn: Roast shiitake mushrooms in the oven for 10 minutes, remove them from the oven, and turn them over one by one using a pair of tongs. Bake for another 8-10 minutes until they turn golden brown. The larger mushrooms should be crisp on the edges, while the smaller ones should be crispy throughout.
  3. Serve: Transfer onto a serving platter. If preferred, sprinkle with fresh herbs and more freshly ground black pepper. You can serve seasoned shiitake mushrooms warm, at room temperature, or even cold.

What To Do With Shiitake Mushrooms

Deliciously crispy and lightly caramelized, shiitake mushrooms make an addictive snack. However, you can use them in countless other ways. Below are just a few recipes with shiitake mushrooms:

person removing roasted shiitake mushrooms from the sheet pan with a spatula

How To Store

Leftover roasted shiitake mushrooms can be stored in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. They’ll lose their crispness as they sit but still be delicious.

Expert Tips

  • Dry them thoroughly: The secret to crispy/crunchy shiitake mushrooms is to dry them thoroughly. Even though it’s a bit of extra work, take the time to dry them off.
  • Hand-pick them at the store: If you can, hand-pick your mushrooms one by one at the grocery store. When buying shiitakes, look for firm mushrooms with large caps without bruises. Avoid those that are wilted, wet, or slimy.
  • Finish it off with sea salt: If you’re a fan of salt like I am, finish off your roasted shiitakes with coarse sea salt for a bit more flavor.

FAQs

How to make crispy mushrooms?

The secret to making crispy shiitake mushrooms is two-fold. First, be sure to dry them thoroughly after rinsing them. Second, turn mushrooms halfway through the roasting process to make sure they bake evenly. Keep a close eye on them as they roast, too, since the smaller shiitakes crisp quicker than the larger ones. You may have to remove them before the larger ones are crisp throughout and done roasting.

Love Mushrooms? Here are a few recipes you might like:

If you try this Roasted Shiitake Mushroom recipe or any other one of our mushroom recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms in a bowl garnished with fresh herbs
Print

Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms Recipe

Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms are delicious when served by themselves as a snack. They can also be served as a side dish or an appetizer. Ready in less than 20 minutes, this easy recipe is healthy and quick to make.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 18 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 132kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb shiitake mushrooms
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place shiitakes in a colander* and rinse under cold running water for 30-45 seconds while moving them around to help get rid of any dirt or debris. Transfer the mushroom caps onto a clean kitchen towel and pat dry with paper towels to dry them as much as you can.
  • Transfer the shiitakes onto the prepared pan. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Using your clean hands, toss to make sure that they are evenly coated with oil and seasoning. Arrange them on a single layer with the mushroom caps facing down.
  • Roast in the preheated oven for 10 minutes, remove from the oven, turn them around, and bake for another 8-10 minutes or until the larger mushrooms are crisp on the edges and the smaller ones are crispy throughout.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Transfer onto a serving plate and, if preferred, garnish with fresh herbs.

Notes

  • Leftover roasted shiitake mushrooms can be stored in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. They’ll lose their crispness as they sit but still be delicious.
  • If you have a salad spinner, it makes the cleaning process quicker. I included the instructions on how to use it in this How To Clean Shiitake Mushrooms post.

Nutrition

Calories: 132kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 352mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 85IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shiitake-mushrooms/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Green Bean Fries https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-bean-fries/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-bean-fries/#comments Thu, 03 Mar 2022 03:43:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48937 For another air fryer green beans side dish recipe, check out these easy Air Fryer String Beans. And if you…]]>

For another air fryer green beans side dish recipe, check out these easy Air Fryer String Beans. And if you are in need of more creative green bean recipes, you might also like my Boiled Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans recipe.

Air fried green bean fries in a plate served by a person from top view

Why You Should Make This Recipe

These parmesan green bean fries are packed with flavor that even picky eaters will love this healthier option instead of oily, heavy deep-fried green beans.

  • A quick and easy recipe: This is a simple recipe made with a handful of ingredients that takes about 30 minutes from start to finish.
  • Great way to sneak in some veggies in your diet: Thanks to the panko breading, these air fryer green bean chips are addictively crispy making it a fun yet healthy snack, especially compared to its fried version. 
  • The recipe can be easily adapted to low-carb and keto diets with a simple ingredient swap: almond flour in place of panko.

Ingredients

You will need a handful of ingredients for this simple recipe. Grab fresh green beans, all purpose flour, large eggs, panko bread crumbs, shredded parmesan cheese, and kosher salt and black pepper.

ingredients for the recipe are portioned and placed on a kitchen counter

Green Beans vs Haricot Verts

The recipe below is made with regular supermarket green beans. If you can get your hands on French green beans aka Haricot verts, shorten the cooking time by half as they cook much faster.

How to Make This Recipe?

There are only a few steps for making green bean fries in air fryer. Simply:

person trimming and cleaning green beans and green beans in air fryer
  1. Prep green beans for air frying: Place green beans in a colander and rinse under cold water. Line a kitchen towel (or a few sheets of paper towels) on a sheet pan and spread the beans to dry them as much as you can. Trim the ends. 
  2. Air fry unbreaded green beans: While you can skip this step, during my recipe testing I found out that airfrying green beans for a few minutes before breading yielded fully cooked green bean fries. To do so, preheat your air fryer to 370 F degrees. Place green beans into the air fryer basket making sure that they are in a single layer and air fry them for 2 minutes. Transfer them onto a paper towel-lined sheet pan. If you’re using French green beans (haricot verts), this step is not necessary as they cook faster than normal string beans.
a collage of images showing how to make the recipe
  1. Breading: Set up the breading station with three plates. Place all-purpose flour in the first plate and whisked eggs in the second. Mix the panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the third plate. To bread, dip each green bean first into the flour, then the egg mixture, and finally into the panko mixture.Collect them on a baking sheet on the side.
green beans in air fryer before and after they are air fried
  1. Air fry breaded green beans: Air fry the breaded green beans, this time at 390 F for 5 minutes. Be sure to turn them halfway through cooking.
  2. Serve: Let the green beans cool for a few minutes. Season with salt and pepper to taste, and serve with your favorite dipping sauce.

How to Make it Keto-Diet Friendly?

To make keto green beans fries or low carb crispy green bean fries, omit the all-purpose flour and use blanched almond flour instead of panko for a low-carb crispy coating. The version made with almond flour breading is just as delicious and worth trying even if you are not following a keto diet.

Additionally, because low-carb green bean fries cook longer in the air fryer, there is no reason to pre-air fry them. Follow the below steps, after rinsing, drying, and trimming your green beans.

  1. Set up the breading station this time with only two shallow bowls. Whisk the eggs and place it in the first bowl. Then mix together almond flour, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the second bowl. 
  2. Bread green beans: Dip green beans in eggs, and then into the almond flour mixture making sure to coat them on all sides. Collect the breaded green beans on a plate.
  3. Air fry breaded green beans: Place them in a single layer in the air fryer basket and air fry them at 390 F for 9-10 minutes making sure to turn them halfway through cooking.
  4. Serve: Let the green beans cool for a few minutes. Season with salt and pepper to taste right before serving.

How to Store

  • Storage: It’s worth noting that green bean fries are best served fresh. If necessary, you can store them in an airtight container, but they will lose some of the crispy texture.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing the leftover air fried green bean fries.

How to Serve

  • Pair it with your favorite dipping sauce: Serve these parmesan crusted green beans by themselves or with your favorite dipping sauce: sriracha mayo, blue cheese dip, or your favorite ranch dressing are all great options.
  • Easy Side Dish: In addition to being the perfect snack, these air fried green bean fries make a great side dish to serve with meat, chicken, seafood and vegetarian dinner recipes.
person dipping a string bean fry in sauce

Expert Tips

  • Prep everything before you start: To make this green bean fries recipe fast, set up the breading station, “ the assembly line”, before you start.
  • Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket: As it is with all air fryer recipes, it is best to have the green bean fries in a single layer. I would recommend air frying them in batches. 
  • Season well: While the recipe for breaded green beans in air fryer below tastes wonderful as it is. You can easily make it even more delicious and flavorful by adding in your favorite spices. In my experience, spices such as paprika, cayenne pepper, red pepper flakes, and chili powder work wonderfully. Just add them into the panko (or almond flour) mixture.
  • Cooking spray: Some people spray the green bean fries with a cooking spray right before air frying. I tested both ways (with and without spraying) and didn’t see much difference in the crispiness. Though if you want you can spray it lightly right before air frying them.

FAQs:

Can I make air fryer green bean fries without all purpose flour?

You can but I find that using a bit of flour helps with making it crispy because it creates a thicker surface for the eggs and breading to stick to. If you prefer not to use all purpose flour, try my version made with almond flour.

Can I bake green bean fries in the oven?

Yes, you can. Follow the recipe exactly written. Instead of frying them in the air fryer, place breaded green beans onto a parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. Bake them in a 350 degrees F. preheated oven for 12-13 minutes, carefully flip them over, and bake for another 4-5 minutes or until they turn golden brown.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Air Fryer Green Bean Fries recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

air fried green beans on a plate
Print

Air Fryer Green Bean Fries Recipe

With an addictively crispy topping, these Air Fryer Green Bean fries are the perfect snack or side dish. They are easy to make and require no additional use of oil.
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 215kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 pound fresh green beans rinsed, dried and trimmed
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 large eggs whisked
  • 1 cup panko bread crumbs
  • ½ cup shredded parmesan cheese
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • Salt and pepper to taste optional

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 370 degrees.
  • Add in the fresh green beans into the air fryer making sure that they are not overlapping. You may have to do this in two batches. Air fry for 2 minutes. Remove from air fryer onto a paper towel lined sheet pan. Let them cool for a few minutes.*
  • Meanwhile, set up the breading station by arranging three plates.
  • Place all purpose flour on the first plate. Place whisked eggs into the second plate. Finally, mix together panko bread crumbs, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the third one.
  • Preheat the air fryer to 390 degrees.
  • To bread the green beans, dip each green bean into the first plate with the all-purpose flour, then into the eggs, and finally into the panko breadcrumbs mixture.
  • Carefully transfer them into the air fryer basket. Air fry for 5 minutes making sure to turn them halfway through.
  • Remove them from the air fryer and allow them to cool for a few minutes. If preferred, season them with salt and pepper to taste before serving.

Notes

  • I know having to air fry them before breading is an extra step but during my recipe testing I found out that if you skip this step, they don’t fully cook. The breading turns golden brown but the green beans are still raw. You can skip this step if you have blanched green beans on hand.
  • Storage: It’s worth noting that green bean fries are best served fresh. If necessary, you can store them in an airtight container, but they will lose some of the crispy texture.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing these. They are best when made fresh.
  • For a low carb/keto version, omit using all-purpose flour and use blanched almond flour in place of panko bread crumbs. You can also skip the step where you air fry them before breading them. To do so:
    1. Set up the breading station this time with only two shallow bowls. Whisk the eggs and place them in the first bowl. Then mix together almond flour, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the second bowl. 
    2. Bread green beans: Dip green beans in eggs, and then into the almond flour mixture making sure to coat them on all sides. Collect the breaded green beans on a plate.
    3. Air fry breaded green beans: Place them in a single layer in the air fryer basket and air fry them at 390 F for 9-10 minutes making sure to turn them halfway through cooking.
    4. Serve: Let the green beans cool for a few minutes. Season with salt and pepper to taste right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 340mg | Potassium: 347mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1009IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 223mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-bean-fries/feed/ 2
Air Fryer Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-beans/#respond Thu, 03 Mar 2022 03:39:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48692 If you’re a fan of easy vegetable side dishes like this one and want to learn different ways to use…]]>

If you’re a fan of easy vegetable side dishes like this one and want to learn different ways to use green beans in your everyday cooking, be sure to check out my No Mushroom Soup Green Bean Casserole, Garlic Butter Green Beans recipe and my essential guide on How To Boil Green Beans.

Air fryer green beans in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Ingredients For Air Fryer Green Beans

Just a few ingredients go into this easy recipe for air fryer green beans:

  • Fresh green beans or string beans
  • Olive Oil
  • A little salt
  • Some black pepper
Ingredients for the recipe are laid out

Notes on Ingredients

  • Green Beans vs. Haricot Verts: Haricot verts, or also known as French green beans, are thinner and longer than standard green beans because they are harvested earlier in the season. If you’re using haricot verts, halve the cooking time: for air fryer haricot verts, that means cooking them for 3-5 minutes rather than 7-9.
  • Changing it Up: Make this dish your own! Because air fried green beans are so simple to cook, you can have fun with the recipe and add your own unique flair. Try seasoning your green beans with chili powder, garlic powder, red pepper flakes, a squeeze of lemon juice, or your favorite spices for an extra kick, or sprinkle some Parmesan cheese on top before air frying for a melty addition. 
  • Cooking Oil: Although I used olive oil in my version, you can switch the type of oil used in this recipe. For an Asian-inspired flavor, try air frying green beans in sesame oil.

How to Make this Recipe

Person preparing green beans before cooking
  1. Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F (190°C)
  2. Wash and dry green beans: Place the green beans in a colander and wash them under cold running water.  Place them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel or paper towels and dry them as much as you can.
  3. Trim green beans: Trim the ends to remove their tough, stringy tails. A great way to cut the beans is to line 5-7 of them up at a time on a cutting board and remove the stem end with a single cut. Based on your personal preference, you can cut them in half or leave them whole.
  4. Dry them off: Gently dry them on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Transfer them into a large bowl.
Four images showing how to air fry green beans
  1. Add seasoning: Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Gently toss to make sure all of the string beans are coated with oil and seasoning.
  2. Air fry green beans: Transfer to the air fryer basket, ensuring that they are arranged in a single layer. If not, you may have to cook them in batches. Cook them until crisp-tender, 7-9 minutes, tossing halfway through cooking. For even more crispy green beans, you can extend the air frying time by 1-2 minutes.
  3. Serve: When done, carefully remove them from the air fryer and serve immediately.

How to Store Leftovers

  • Storage: Store your green beans in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week. Reheat in the air fryer or oven, or just eat them straight away—they make a delicious snack right out of the fridge.
  • Freezing: Freeze your green beans in a Ziploc bag or other container for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Reheat your frozen green beans in the air fryer or oven at 375°F for 7-8 minutes.
Air fryer string beans after they are cooking still in the air fryer basket

Expert Tips

Here are a few helpful tips to get the most delicious and perfectly cooked air-fried string beans:

  • Make sure the green beans are dry: For best results, dry your green beans thoroughly with paper towels before air frying for the perfect crispy texture.
  • Single layer: Don’t overcrowd the green beans when you put them into the air fryer basket. Instead, spread them out into a single layer before air frying so each green bean will be perfectly cooked. It is best to do several batches for the crispiest and perfectly air-fried beans.
  • Toss halfway through: To ensure the green beans fry evenly, toss them halfway through cooking.
  • The timing might change: depending on the brand of air fryer you use, the cooking time might vary slightly. I used the Instant Pot Air Fryer, but if you used Nuwave, Actifry, or another brand, you might need to adjust the timing.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

These quick, versatile air fryer string beans are a perfect side dish (or healthy snack!) that complements a wide variety of main dishes and accommodates diverse diets and tastes. Here are a few reasons why you should give it a try:

  • It’s a quick, easy side dish that takes under 15 minutes from start to finish and uses only a few simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry.
  • The green beans come out perfectly crispy using much less oil, thanks to the convenience of the air fryer.
  • You can change up the flavor with spices, herbs, and toppings—make it your own!
  • It works perfectly for any occasion ranging from a holiday celebration to a normal weeknight dinner. 

FAQs

How long to cook green beans in the air fryer?

Air fry fresh green beans for 7-8 minutes at 375°F. For air fryer haricot verts (French green beans), the cook time is 4-5 minutes at 375°F. If you have too many green beans for one layer in the air-fryer basket, cook them in batches.

How long to cook frozen green beans in the air fryer?

Cook frozen green beans for up to 11-12 minutes at 375°F. No need to thaw them beforehand.

What temperature to air fry green beans?

The ideal temperature for air frying green beans is 375°F degrees (190°C).

How to air fry green beans without oil?

Simply omit the oil. The green beans will still be delicious but a bit softer instead of crispy.

How to make crispy green beans in air fryer?

For extra-crispy air fried green beans, extend the cooking time by 1-2 extra minutes.

Is this recipe healthy?

Yes, it is. Green beans are low in calories and high in fiber and vitamin C. Additionally, air frying green beans with a very small amount of oil helps us achieve a healthier fried green beans recipe without all the frying oil.

Other Air Fryer Vegetables You Might Also Like:

If you try this Easy Air Fryer Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air Fryer Green Beans in A bowl
Print

Air Fryer Green Beans Recipe

Air Fryer Green Beans is a quick, easy, and healthy side dish to serve with weeknight dinner or as a holiday side dish. It can be made fresh or frozen making it ideal all year round.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 66kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 lb. fresh green beans
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Place green beans in a colander and wash them under cold running water. Trim the ends to remove their tough, stringy tails before cooking. A great way to cut the beans is to line 5-7 of them up at a time on a cutting board and remove the stem end with a single cut. At this point, you can cut them in half or leave them as a whole.
  • Gently dry them on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Transfer them into a large bowl.
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Gently toss to make sure all of the string beans are coated with oil and seasoning.
  • Transfer to the air fryer basket ensuring that they are arranged on a single layer. If not, you may have to cook them in batches. Cook them until crisp-tender 7-9 minutes, tossing halfway through cooking.
  • When done, carefully remove them from the air fryer and serve immediately while still warm.

Notes

  • Seasoning ideas: Change it up by seasoning your green beans with chili powder, garlic powder, red pepper flakes, or your favorite spices for an extra kick, or sprinkle some Parmesan cheese right before serving.
  • Green Beans vs. Haricot Verts: Haricot verts, also known as French green beans, are thinner and longer than standard green beans because they are harvested earlier in the season. If you’re using haricot verts, halve the cooking time: for air fryer haricot verts, that means cooking them for 3-5 minutes rather than 7-9.
  • If using frozen green beans: Cook frozen green beans for up to 11-12 minutes at 375°F. No need to thaw them beforehand.

Nutrition

Calories: 66kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 241mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 783IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-beans/feed/ 0
4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/#comments Fri, 04 Feb 2022 22:00:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48350 Ingredients You’ll Need: As the name suggests, you will only need 4 ingredients for this easy guac recipe. So, gather:…]]>

Ingredients You’ll Need:

As the name suggests, you will only need 4 ingredients for this easy guac recipe. So, gather:

  • Avocados: Since the main ingredient in guacamole is avocado, it’s important to select the best kind. In my opinion, the best avocados for guacamole are Hass avocados because of their creamy flesh, rich taste, and protective skin.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Kosher salt
  • Fresh lime juice
4 Ingredient guacamole from the top view served with tortilla chips

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

Whether you make this recipe a game-day snack or a condiment for your favorite Mexican meal, there are countless ways to make it yours. Adding flavor is a snap with these main ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a kitchen counter

Substitutions:

  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder is an easy, pantry-ready substitute for fresh garlic in this guacamole recipe. 
  • Lemon juice: Don’t like the taste of limes? Lemon juice will give your guac the same vibrancy without any unwanted bitter taste. You can even omit the extra juice for an easy 3 ingredient guacamole recipe.

Optional add-ins:

The beauty of this healthy guacamole recipe is that you can make it even more delicious with one or more of these optional add-ins. Simply chop them up and add them in as you are making your guacamole.

Easy guacamole with optional toppings like onion, cilantro, tomatoes and jalapenos
  • Red onion: Red onion is just the ingredient you need for guacamole that packs a punch. Pungent and crisp, this add-in will take your guac to the next level. And if you want to take it up a notch, try adding a tablespoon of my Mexican Pickled Onions.
  • Fresh tomato or fresh cherry tomato salsa (pico de gallo): These additional ingredients will give your guacamole brilliant color, juicy texture, and a garden-fresh taste that’s out of this world.
  • Jarred salsa: Could you eat salsa by the spoonful? Adding a little of this tasty condiment will give your guacamole a layer of savory, piquant flavor.
  • Cilantro: Fresh and earthy, this herb will bring out all the green flavors of your homemade guacamole. One of the best ways to enliven your guac recipes is to sprinkle a handful of fresh cilantro on top of the guacamole.
  • Jalapeño: If you love spicy foods, then jalapeno is the ingredient you’ve been looking for. This bright pepper will make every bite of your guac explode in your mouth.
  • Ground cumin: Want to add some depth to your four-ingredient guacamole? This rich spice will give any dish a rich, warm, and earthy layer.

How To Make This Recipe?

Ready in five minutes, this easy four-ingredient guacamole recipe is a lifesaver for anyone looking for a quick, delicious fix. Whip up this dish in no time and without the messy clean-up.

Person showing how to make four ingredient guacamole recipe with step by step photos
  1. Prepare the avocados: Peel, pit, and cube your ripe Hass avocado, and put the cubes in a medium bowl. Then, use a potato masher or a fork to mash the cubes until smooth.
  2. Add the rest of the ingredients: Add the garlic, salt, and lime juice to the avocado puree. Stir the mixture until it’s thoroughly combined. You can make it super smooth or leave it chunky depending on your preference. Taste for seasoning and add in more if preferred.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

With a working fridge and an airtight container, there’s no reason to let a bite of this basic guacamole go to waste. Meal prep and leftover storage will be a breeze with these handy tips.

A collage of photos showing how to store guacamole
  • Make-Ahead and Storage: You can make your four ingredient guac one day in advance. Evenly spread the guacamole in an airtight container and cover its surface with a thin yet visible layer of water, lemon juice, or lime juice. Then, cover the container with a layer of plastic wrap, pressing the plastic flush against the surface of the guacamole. Store guacamole in the fridge once all air bubbles have been removed and the container is sealed. When ready to eat, remove the liquid and enjoy!
  • Freezing: Unlike guacamole recipes with water-filled ingredients, like tomatoes, onions, and jalapenos, this simple recipe freezes wonderfully. Just store it in an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. Your leftover guacamole will stay fresh for up to three months.

Expert Tips

This 4 avocado guacamole recipe is super simple to make, but you make your life even easier with these pro tips. Find all the scrumptious secrets about my homemade guac right here.

  • Serve your guacamole at room temperature. Not only do ripe avocados have a better flavor when served at room temperature, but cold guacamole is also harder to scoop. Plus, this recipe’s fresh, mild flavors come out when served at room temperature. 
  • Multiply the recipe for an easy dish to serve a crowd. No one has to lose out on this savory dish. Make sure everyone gets their fill by multiplying this recipe to satisfy as many mouths as your table can handle.

How to Use?

It doesn’t matter whether you make this simple guacamole recipe for nachos, serve it with chili, or eat it by the spoonful. This tasty recipe is guaranteed to stun no matter how you serve it.

Person scooping guac with a chip from the top view
  • By itself: Serve this delicious dip with tortilla chips or raw veggies for a healthy snack you can make in minutes. Take the stress out of party menus and afternoon pick-me-ups when you have this simple recipe at your fingertips.
  • With nachos: Warm, cheesy, and bursting with savory flavor, this Mexican classic is the perfect pair with guacamole. Dollop your 5-minute dip atop my layered Chicken Nachos and prepare yourself for a heap of compliments to the chef!
  • With tacos: Guacamole, and tacos? Sounds like a match made in heaven! This mild topping amplifies every bite of savory, rich, and spicy tacos. Try it alongside my Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos for a meaty meal that will fill you in minutes. Or, serve this good guac with Black Bean Quinoa Tacos for a gluten-free dish vegetarians will adore.
  • With quesadillas: Take your ooey-gooey quesadilla to the next level by serving it alongside a bowl of fresh, flavorful guacamole. Serve this condiment alongside my rich, buttery Spinach Quesadillas or Chicken Quesadilla Cake, and your tastebuds will thank you.
  • To top off chili or burrito bowls: Want to add a rich, creamy taste to your favorite Mexican bowl? Spoon some guacamole on a bowl of hot, smoky chili—like my White Chicken Chili or Vegetarian Chili—or atop homemade Vegan Burrito Bowls to bring out every layer of flavor.
  • Make Avocado Toast or a Burger: If you have any leftovers, simply spread it on a piece of toast the next day and top it off with a fried egg for a delicious and healthy breakfast. Or use it to layer an Avocado Bacon Burger during the BBQ season.
  • With Margaritas: What is better than a bowl of guacamole served with margaritas? Try my Pineapple Margaritas or Blueberry Margaritas to treat yourself with some Mexican deliciousness.

FAQs

Have more questions about this five-star recipe? Make this mild guacamole recipe easy with this collection of most-asked questions. You’ll be an avocado expert in no time. 

Is it safe to eat avocado after it turns brown?

Yes! Though brown avocados may not look appetizing, the browning process results from a chemical reaction when avocado flesh touches to air—a non-toxic process known as oxidation. Avocados can sit out for several days before spoiling.

Is guacamole good for you?

Guacamole has tons of health benefits. This avocado-based recipe has many vitamins, healthy fats, and potassium, among countless other essential nutrients.

  • How many avocados for guacamole for 4?
  • As a general rule, I recommend using one avocado per person. Therefore, you should use four avocados to serve four people.

  • How do you make guacamole for nachos?
  • To make this dish for nachos, follow the recipe as written. Then, put dollops of guacamole on top of your nachos or in a side dish right before serving.

    Why Make This Recipe?

    This fast, easy guacamole recipe comes together in a cinch. With simple preparation, a few minimal ingredients, and a creamy, snackable taste, it’s the perfect dish for avocado lovers, large crowds, and even kids.

    • This basic recipe only takes 4 ingredients and 5 minutes to make, making it the ultimate beginner-level recipe.
    • Gluten-free, low-carb, and vegan, this healthy recipe tastes as good as it is good for you. This avocado-based dish packs a ton of essential nutrients, such as vitamin B6, healthy fats, and potassium.
    • This mild guacamole recipe is kid-friendly since it doesn’t have any spicy jalapeño or large chunks of onion. However, it’s easy to jazz up with other zesty, fresh, and spicy ingredients. More on that below.
    • You can easily make this 4-ingredient guacamole recipe for a crowd by multiplying the recipe. Doubling—or even tripling—this recipe is easy to feed a large group.

    Similar Recipes You Might Like:

    If you are a fan of quick and easy appetizers like this guacamole recipe here are a few more recipes that you might also like:

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    If you try this 4 ingredient guacamole recipe or any other one of our easy Mexican recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    4 Ingredient guacamole served in a bowl from the top view
    Print

    4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe

    This easy 4-ingredient guacamole recipe is made by mixing together ripe avocados, garlic, lime and salt. It is not only the best but also the easiest appetizer you can make in 5 minutes for your next Mexican fiesta.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 326kcal

    Ingredients

    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • 4 large ripe Hass avocados

    Instructions

    • Mix together garlic, lime juice, and salt in a large bowl.
    • Cut the avocados in half and carefully remove the pit. Scoop out the avocados and place them into the bowl.
    • Using a potato masher or the back of a fork mash the avocados until it reaches to your desired level of chunkiness.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

    Video

    Notes

    • Salt: I used Kosher salt but you can also use table salt or sea salt.
    • Make-Ahead and Storage: You can make this recipe one day in advance. Evenly spread the guacamole in an airtight container and cover its surface with a thin yet visible layer of water, lemon juice, or lime juice. Then, cover the container with a layer of plastic wrap, pressing the plastic flush against the surface of the guacamole. Once all air bubbles have been removed and the container is sealed, store the guacamole in the fridge. When ready to eat, remove the liquid and enjoy!
    • Freezing: Unlike guacamole recipes with water-filled ingredients, like tomatoes, onions, and jalapeños, this simple recipe freezes wonderfully. Just store it in an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. Your leftover guacamole will stay fresh for up to three months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 326kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 305mg | Potassium: 990mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 297IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/feed/ 8
    Roasted Chestnuts On An Open Fire https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-chestnuts-open-fire/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-chestnuts-open-fire/#respond Wed, 22 Dec 2021 19:31:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47225 If you have the classic Christmas song of Nat King Cole in your mind as you read these words, you…]]>

    If you have the classic Christmas song of Nat King Cole in your mind as you read these words, you are not alone. For us, it is a family tradition and a favorite pastime to roast chestnuts on an open fire during the holidays. I think between the delicious smell of roasting chestnuts, the sound of the crackling fire, and the time of year, there is something so magical about it.

    During the colder months, as soon as chestnuts hit the stores, I buy some. If I am short on time, I roast them in the oven or if I am planning to use them in recipes, I boil them in water. But, if I want to have fun with my family and friends, we roast them on an open fire, grill, or fireplace, especially during the holiday season.

    cooking chestnuts on an open fire in a cast iron skillet

    If you are new to cooking chestnuts, be sure to check out my recipes on Oven Roasted Chestnuts, Air Fried Chestnuts, and Boiled Chestnuts as well.

    Tools You Will Need

    You can roast chestnuts on a grill, a hot bed of coal, or in the fireplace. I find that the easiest way to roast chestnuts is to use a charcoal grill (secured with a grill grate) or a gas grill using a chestnut roasting pan (affiliate link) or a cast-iron skillet. 

    If you are roasting them in the fireplace, you might want to invest in a chestnut roaster (affiliate link) to make it safer and easier to roast.

    I use a cast iron skillet as I already have one but if you are serious about it, it is a good idea to invest in these tools.

    While a paring knife or a sharp serrated knife works, you can also invest in a chestnut knife to make the scoring easier and safer.

    Ingredients

    In terms of ingredients, you will need chestnuts and water. Water is pretty straightforward but there are a few things to pay attention to when buying chestnuts for roasting bbq style.

    You can find fresh chestnuts in grocery stores and farmers’ markets during the late fall and winter months.

    • What type of chestnuts should I buy? If you can get your hands on them, buy American chestnuts or Italian chestnuts. I find peeling these to be easier than Chinese chestnuts.
    • What should I pay attention to when buying chestnuts? If you can, pick chestnuts one by one, making sure that they are free of blemishes and roughly the same size (to ensure even roasting). They should be moist but not wet. Examine them to make sure there is no mold.

    How To Prepare Them For Roasting?

    Chestnuts being scored and soaked in water
    1. Score an X: This is a crucial step and should not be skipped. To do so, place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board. Secure it in between your index finger and thumb. Score the round side of the chestnut horizontally creating a ½ to 1-inch cut (depending on its size), making sure to cut through the skin and the fuzzy inner skin without going too deep into the chestnut meat. Turn it 90 degrees and cut another slit creating an X.
    2. Soak: Similar to my oven roasted chestnuts method, I think soaking them for an hour or so helps with peeling after they are roasted. However, if you are short on time you can skip soaking and directly start roasting. When ready, drain and set them aside. No need to dry.

    Step By Step Instructions:

    Now that they are scored and soaked, it is time to light the fire and get roasting. To do so:

    Fire roasted chestnuts close up
    1. Light the fire: Prepare a charcoal grill or an open fire pit. When the briquettes are ready, distribute them evenly to create a flat bed that the cast iron skillet can rest on. If you have a grill grate, place it on top. Carefully place the cast iron skillet on the hot coals (or grate) and let it warm for 5-10 minutes.
    2. Place chestnuts flat side down in the now-hot cast iron skillet in a single layer: Depending on the type of chestnuts, they should start opening up as soon as they hit the pan. Be patient as the chestnuts roast and wait for them to fully burst open. Make sure to watch closely, as chestnuts can burn easily.
    3. It takes about 10-12 minutes for them to roast BUT: This is a big but because the time for cooking chestnuts on a fire depends on their age, size, and type. Some may take shorter while others may take longer. It is a good idea to (carefully) move them around during the roasting process.
    4. Additionally, if you are using a chestnut roasting pan, the roasting time might be shorter. Follow the tips below to check on doneness to prevent burning.

    How To Tell If My Chestnuts Are Fully Cooked?

    To check doneness, you can do two things: 

    roasted chestnut being held by a person
    1. Make sure they burst open, ideally showing the yellow flesh.
    2. Test one (being careful to not burn your fingers) by peeling the outer shell. If it is soft and buttery with a nice chewy bite, you are good to go. If it is still hard, put it back in the skillet and continue to roast for a few extra minutes.

    How To Peel?

    This is the million-dollar question, isn’t it? Ideally, each chestnut will nicely open up and be super easy to peel. If that is the case, simply pull back on the scored X and peel away the papery outer skin and the inner fuzzy skin and enjoy right away. 

    However, if they are not fully opened and peeling is hard, let them steam for a few minutes. To do so:

    person holding roasted nuts in a kitchen towel in his hands
    1. Steam: When they are fully roasted, carefully remove the cast iron skillet from the grill and transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a tea towel. Collect the edges of the towel in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5-10 minutes. Brown paper bags can also be used instead of a kitchen towel.
    2. Cool & Peel: Transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter (or onto a baking sheet) and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts while they are still hot by gently peeling on the scored “X”, removing the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside.
      If you are unable to remove the inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.
    3. Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside.

    Finally, be patient when peeling chestnuts. It is normal that some will break and some will be hard to peel. It is all a part of having a good time by the fire and enjoying the process.

    How To Serve Fire Roasted Chestnuts? Seasoning Ideas:

    1. Serve them on their own: This is probably the most popular way of enjoying chestnuts. 
    2. Butter, Cinnamon and Sugar Drizzle: Heat 2 tablespoons of unsalted butter in the cast iron skillet until melted. Off the heat, mix in ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon and a tablespoon coconut sugar (or brown sugar or maple syrup) into the melted butter. Either dip or drizzle roasted chestnuts with the mixture.
    3. Rosemary & Butter: If you’d rather go the savory route, you can heat some butter in the cast iron skillet, add in a teaspoon of chopped fresh rosemary and season it well with sea salt and black pepper. Cook just until butter is melted and everything is mixed. Serve it on the side or place roasted peeled chestnuts on a plate and drizzle them all over with the mixture.
    4. Use them in a recipe: Make popular recipes like Creamy Chestnut Soup, Chestnut Paste, or Chestnut Stuffing.

    Expert Tips:

    • Safety: It goes without saying, be careful around fire, especially if there are kids around. Cooking chestnuts on an open fire requires close supervision, so do not leave the site as they are roasting.
    • Do not skip on scoring: While it is a pain to have to score every single chestnut, if you skip doing so, you may end up with a scary explosion in your backyard. Unscored raw chestnuts might explode as they are roasting, so take the time to properly score each chestnut.
    • Be careful not to burn your fingers: It is expected that you will burn a little bit as a part of the roasted chestnut experience. I think we can all agree that it is a part of the fun, but be safe. Let it cool for a few minutes, especially when you are peeling chestnuts with your kids.
    • Single layer is the way to go: Do not crowd the pan. Each chesnut should touch the surface of the pan as it roasts. If need be, use tongs to turn them to ensure even roasting.
    • Can I do this on a fireplace? Yes, you can. However, I recommend investing in a chestnut roaster for fireplace roasting for safety and ease. Most roasters that are sold in the market can also be used for making popcorn so you can get a dual use out of your investment.
    • Buy more chestnuts than you need: If you need a pound of peeled chestnuts, I recommend buying a pound and a half. After you remove the shell peels and the bad ones, you will probably end up with a pound.
    person holding a fire roasted chestnut in his hand

    FAQs

    How to store roasted chestnuts?

    After they are fully cooled, store chestnuts in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

    What is a chestnut roasting pan?

    A chestnut pan is usually made of stainless steel. It has a number of holes in the bottom (similar to a grill basket) to allow for greater direct exposure over the fire. It also helps with even cooking.

    How long does it take to roast chestnuts in an open fire?

    The time of roasting depends on the size, age, and type of chestnuts. However, it usually takes about 10-12 minutes when roasted in an open fire in a cast-iron skillet.

    You Might Also Like:

    If you try this recipe on roasting chestnuts on an open fire or any other chestnut recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    chestnuts roasted on an open fire over a hot bed of coals
    Print

    Chestnuts Roasting On An Open Fire Recipe

    Learn how to roast chestnuts on an open fire and get all my tips on easy peeling. This is a perfect holiday activity to enjoy with family and friends.
    Course Healthy Snacks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes
    Soaking time 1 hour
    Total Time 1 hour 22 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 222kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 lbs chestnuts*

    Instructions

    • Start by scoring chestnuts: Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board. The rounded side, (aka the belly side) should be facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife or a chestnut knife, if you have. Then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
    • Place scored chestnuts in a bowl, cover them with cold tap water and let them soak for an hour.
    • Prepare the charcoal grill or open fire pit. When the briquettes are ready, distribute them evenly to create a flat bed that the cast iron skillet can rest on. If you have a grill grate, place it on top. Carefully place the cast iron skillet on the hot coals (or grate) and let it warm for 5-10 minutes.
    • Add scored chestnuts to the cast iron skillet in a single later. If they don’t fit in one layer, you may have to do this in two batches.
    • Depending on the type of chestnuts you are using, they should open up as soon as they hit the pan.
    • Let them cook, stirring occasionally, for about 10-12 minutes*. There might be some smoke coming out and that is normal. You will know that they are cooked once the outer skin is fully opened up exposing the inner yellow nut. However, the best way to check doneness is to peel one and give it a taste. If it is soft and creamy it should be done.
    • If it is not fully roasted at the end 10-12 minutes, you can put a lid on it for a few minutes to trap the air inside. However, I highly recommend keeping a close eye on it and checking every few minutes.
    • When they are fully roasted and opened up nicely, let them cool for a few minutes and peel them right away.
    • If they are difficult to peel then let them steam for a few minutes. To do so, carefully remove the cast iron skillet from the grill and transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a tea towel. Collect the edges of the towel in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 5-10 minutes. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag trapping the steam inside and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
    • Transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X”, peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside. Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside.
    • Enjoy roasted chestnuts on their own or use it with your favorite herbs or seasoning.

    Video

    Notes

    • I find that American and Italian chestnuts are better for roasting on an open fire. They are also easier compared to Chinese chestnuts. When shopping for chestnuts, do your best to pick ones that are similar in size for even roasting. 
    • The cooking time might change based on the age, size, and type of chestnuts. During my recipe testing with various different type of chestnuts, I learned that 10-12 minutes of roasting delivered perfectly roasted chestnuts, but for foolproof results follow my tips on how to check doneness.
    • How to roast chestnuts on a gas grill? If you are using a gas grill, preheat the grill at 450 degrees F. Follow the recipe as written by scoring and soaking chestnuts. Preheat the cast iron skillet as instructed as well. When cooking, you can put the lid on the gas grill but do not leave it unattended. Keep a very close eye on it and check it every 1-2 minutes.
    • As I mentioned in the recipe, I used a cast iron skillet. If you are using a chestnut roasting pan, the roasting time might be shorter. Follow my tips to check on doneness to prevent burning.
    • An important note on safety: It goes without saying, be careful around fire, especially if there are kids around. Cooking chestnuts on an open fire requires close supervision, so do not leave the site as they are roasting.
    • Do not skip on scoring: While it is a pain to have to score every single chestnut if you skip doing so, you may end up with a scary explosion in your backyard. Unscored raw chestnuts might explode as they are roasting, so take the time to properly score each chestnut.
    • Single layer is the way to go: Do not crowd the pan. Each chesnut should touch the surface of the pan as it roasts. If need be, use tongs to turn them to ensure even roasting.
    • Can I do this on a fireplace? Yes, you can. However, I recommend investing in a chestnut roaster for fireplace roasting for safety and ease. Most roasters that are sold in the market can also be used for making popcorn so you can get a dual-use out of your investment.
    • Storage: Leftover fire-roasted chestnuts can be stored in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-chestnuts-open-fire/feed/ 0
    How to Roast Chestnuts in The Oven https://foolproofliving.com/roast-chestnuts-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/roast-chestnuts-in-oven/#comments Wed, 22 Dec 2021 19:28:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47197 It is no secret that roasted chestnuts are synonymous with the holiday season. But for me, growing up in Turkey, …]]>

    It is no secret that roasted chestnuts are synonymous with the holiday season. But for me, growing up in Turkey,  starting from early October all the way through late December, roasting chestnuts in the oven and peeling and snacking on them in front of the TV was a favorite pastime.

    Today, we are going back to basics and discovering how to make roasted chestnuts in the oven using my mom’s method. I think this is the easiest way to cook chestnuts.

    Roasted chestnuts in a bowl from top view

    However, this post is a sequel to my three other favorite methods – Boiled Chestnuts, Roasting Chestnuts in An Open Fire, and Air Fryer Chestnuts. So, if you want to branch out and try different methods to cook your own chestnuts, be sure to check them out as well.

    Where to buy and what type of chestnuts are used for roasting?

    You can find fresh chestnuts during the fall and winter months in your local grocery store and even in farmer’s markets.

    Most US grocery stores carry either American chestnuts (most likely grown in Michigan), Chinese chestnuts, or European chestnuts (mainly from Italy). While they are not sold at markets, I think it is important to mention that horse chestnuts are not edible as they are toxic. (Source)

    As I was working on this recipe, I was able to get my hands on Chinese and Italian chestnuts. I found that Italian chestnuts were easier to work with especially when it comes to peeling them after they were roasted. It was almost impossible to peel Chinese chestnuts and I had such a hard time getting them to open up even after the cooking time was completed.

    Unfortunately, where I live (Atlanta, Georgia), American chestnuts are not widely available. But if you can get your hands on them, they will work just as well.

    What to Look For When Buying Chestnuts

    As it is with any 1-ingredient recipe, the quality of the ingredient determines the fate of the end product. It is imperative to know how to pick out good chestnuts for the most delicious and evenly roasted chestnuts. Below is what you should look for:

    1. If you can, I recommend hand picking chestnuts to ensure that they are equal in size. Since we are roasting them in the oven, chestnuts of even size will roast at the same rate.
    2. Look for those that are plump, smooth, shiny, and blemish and mold free. Feel it in between your fingers to make sure the skin is not dry.

    How To Prepare Chestnuts for Roasting

    Preparing chestnuts for cooking takes a bit of advance planning but I promise it is worth it. Simply:

    person rinsing chestnuts in a colander
    1. Rinse: Wash chestnuts under cold water to get rid of any debris. 
    Person scoring chestnuts on a cutting board from the top view
    1. Score: Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board with the rounded side (aka the belly side) facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife or a chestnut knife, if you have one. Then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an “X”. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
    1. Soak: Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover with cold tap water and let them sit for an hour. Do not skip the soaking as it plays a crucial role in easy peeling later on.

    How to roast?

    1. Preheat the oven: My preferred temperature to roast chestnuts in the oven is 425 degrees F. So go ahead and preheat the oven. 
    roasted chestnuts before and after on a sheet pan
    1. Roast chestnuts: Drain chestnuts and place them on a baking sheet pan in a single layer. Roast for 25-30 minutes keeping a close eye on them and turning a few times, if necessary. They should be fully roasted when the skins have pulled back/opened and the flesh inside has softened.

    While I listed the roasting time as 25-30 minutes, I recommend that you keep an eye on the chestnuts after the 20-minute mark. In my experiments, some chestnuts were fully opened while the others were not, even after the full 30 minutes of roasting. So, it is a good idea to remove the ones that are fully opened and let the rest bake for a little longer, if necessary.

    How To Peel Roasted Chestnuts?

    Person placing chestnuts in a kitchen towel and letting them cool before peeling
    1. Let them steam: Remove from the oven and place the now-roasted chestnuts in a clean kitchen towel or cloth. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 10-15 minutes.
      Alternatively, you can use a paper bag. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag trapping the steam inside and let it steam for 15 minutes.
    2. Gently crack: Being careful not to burn yourself, gently squeeze chestnuts using the kitchen cloth or the paper bag as a shield to help remove the skins. You should hear the crackling sound of the roasted skins as you do so. 
    person peeling oven roasted chestnuts
    1. Peel: Transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X”, peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside. Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside. 

    A Word on Easy Peeling

    If you do a quick Google search on how to easily peel chestnuts, you will see a lot of headlines claiming to share the easiest method that will get you perfectly and easily peeled chestnuts.

    During the course of three weeks, in preparation for this post, I have tried several of those “easy” peeling methods. I learned one thing and it is that the ease of peeling depends on the type of chestnut you use. Yes, the method of cooking is important and you want to make sure they are fully cooked, but be aware that not every chestnut is created equal. 

    During my recipe testing, I found that Chinese chestnuts were very hard to peel, especially when it came to the inner skin (the fuzzy part), whereas Italian chestnuts were easier. However, even with the Italian chestnuts, there were some that broke as I was peeling.

    It is also important to mention that the size and age of the chestnut play an important role when it comes to peeling. Based on all this, I think the rule of thumb when it comes to peeling is to be patient and keep a paring knife nearby if it gets hard to peel by hand.

    How To Store?

    What I love about roasted chestnuts is that you can easily bake a big batch, eat some right away, and store or freeze the rest for later. However, regardless of what you are planning to do with them, be sure to peel them while they are still warm as it will be very difficult to remove them from their shells after they are cooled to room temperature. 

    • Store: Place roasted chestnuts in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Freeze: Place peeled chestnuts in a freezer bag, get the air out as much as you can, tightly seal, and freeze for up to 3 months.
    • Thaw: Remove from the freezer and defrost in the fridge overnight.
    Whole roasted chestnuts in a bowl

    Seasoning Ideas:

    While roasted chestnuts are perfect for snacking as they are, you can take them to the next level, especially during the holiday season. Here are a few ways to jazz up one pound of peeled chestnuts:

    • My version of “Christmas Chestnuts”: Mix 4 tablespoons of melted butter with 1 tablespoons of sugar (or maple syrup) and ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon. Drizzle over the nuts or serve on the side for dipping. *This is my favorite way to serve on Christmas morning.*
    • Apple pie spice flavored: Mix together 2 tablespoons of unsalted butter with 1 teaspoon apple pie spice and a pinch of ground nutmeg and drizzle over the baked chestnuts.
    • Savory flavors: If you prefer more of a savory seasoning for roasted chestnuts, try mixing melted butter with your favorite herbs (such as chopped fresh rosemary or sage), sea salt, and black pepper.

    How to Serve – What To Do With Chestnuts?

    Use the below recipe to enjoy it by itself or use it in popular chestnut recipes such as:

    Expert Tips

    While roasting chestnuts is a pretty straightforward process that doesn’t require much, there are a few things to know. Below are a few tips to help you succeed:

    • Do not skip the scoring: I get it is not fun to have to go over every single chestnut and score them one by one. However, if you skip this part, it will likely explode in the oven. It happened to me and it was scary.
    • Peel them while they are still hot: As soon as they are cool enough to handle, start peeling them or otherwise it will be very hard to remove them from their shells after they cooled down.
    • Get more than you need: If you need a pound of shelled roasted chestnuts, I recommend you purchase a pound and a half. You will likely end up with a pound after you have removed the shells and tossed the ones that have gone bad. 
    • Toaster Oven: I tested this recipe both in my regular oven and toaster oven. If your toaster oven can go up to 425 degrees Fahrenheit, you can place them in a shallow roasting pan and follow the recipe as written.
    • Soaking Time: Some people let the chestnuts soak overnight. During my testing, I tried both ways and found no difference in the end product. I also tried the method where you soak it in a bowl of hot water. But again, the end product was no different.

    FAQs

    What does a roasted chestnut look like?

    When roasted, the outer shell of the chestnut will burst open and reveal the golden-brown flesh on the inside.

    Do you have to boil chestnuts before roasting?

    It is not necessary to boil chestnuts before roasting. However, I do recommend soaking them for an hour.

    How do you score chestnuts?

    Place chestnut flat on a cutting board with the round side facing up. Hold it firmly in between your fingers and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife, a sharp serrated knife, or a chestnut knife, if you have one.

    How long do you roast chestnuts and at what temperature?

    I recommend roasting chestnuts for about 25-35 minutes at 425 degrees F. You can tell that they are done when the outer shells burst open revealing the golden flesh on the inside.

    How long will cooked chestnuts keep?

    As long as they are stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, roasted chestnuts will keep fresh for up to 4 days.

    Can you eat a raw chestnut?

    Yes, you can. However, according to this article on WebMD, they contain tannic acid which may result in stomach irritation, nausea, or liver damage in some people.

    What do roasted chestnuts taste like?

    Roasted chestnuts have a slightly sweet, earthy, and nutty flavor with a buttery soft texture. Some people even find the flavor similar to a cooked sweet potato.

    Where can I buy chestnuts?

    Store raw chestnuts, still in their shells, in a cool and dry place for about a week. If you want to store them longer, place them in a plastic bag and keep them in the fridge for up to a month.

    How To Eat Roasted Chestnuts?

    You can eat a roasted chestnut by itself or use it in recipes like chestnut soup, chestnut puree, or even stuffing.

    Other Snacks Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Before I share a few more snack recipes, please know that I also have a detailed article on How to Boil Chestnuts and Roasting Chestnuts on an Open Fire. If you want to learn other ways of cooking chestnuts be sure to check those out.

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    If you found this post on How To Roast Chestnuts in Oven helpful and roasted chestnuts in your own kitchen, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    oven roasted chestnuts in a bowl
    Print

    How to Roast Chestnuts in Oven – Oven Roasted Chestnuts Recipe

    Learn how to roast chestnuts in the oven and get my tips on peeling chestnuts. Once you learn my quick and easy method, roasting chesnuts in the oven will be a breeze.
    Course Healthy Snacks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes
    Resting time 10 minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 222kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 lbs Chestnuts preferably Italian (or European) or chestnuts from Michigan
    • Water

    Instructions

    • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
    • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board. The rounded side, (aka the belly side) should be facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and cut horizontally across the rounded side using a sharp paring knife or a chestnut knife, if you have. Then turn the chestnut 90 degrees and make a second cut forming an X. As you are cutting, do your best not to score the inner skin. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
    • Transfer the now-cut chestnuts into a bowl. Cover it with cold tap water and let them sit for an hour.
    • Preheat it to 425 F degrees (218 C). Drain chestnuts (no need to dry) and place them on a baking sheet pan in a single layer. Roast for 25-30 minutes*1 keeping a close eye on it and turning a few times if necessary. They should be fully roasted when the skins have pulled back/opened and the flesh inside has softened.
    • Remove from the oven and place the now-roasted chestnuts in a kitchen cloth. Collect the edges of the cloth in the middle and turn it into a small pouch. Let them steam in the “pouch” for 10-15 minutes. Alternatively, you can use a paper bag. Simply place the hot roasted chestnuts in it, roll the bag trapping the steam inside and let it steam for 10-15 minutes.
    • Being careful not to burn yourself, gently squeeze chestnuts using the kitchen cloth or the paper bag as a shield to help remove the skins. You should hear the crackling sound of the roasted skins as you do so.
    • To peel, transfer the roasted chestnuts onto a platter and remove the outer shell of the chestnuts when they are still hot by gently pulling back on the scored “X”, peeling away the papery skin and exposing the yellow flesh inside. If you are unable to remove the fuzzy inner skin by hand, use a small sharp knife to peel it, being careful not to pierce the yellow nut inside.*2 Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside.
    • Enjoy roasted chestnuts on their own or use it with your favorite herbs or seasoning.

    Video

    Notes

    • Roasting time *1: While I listed the roasting time as 25-30 minutes, I recommend that you keep an eye on the chestnuts after the 20-minute mark. In my experiments, some chestnuts were fully opened while the others were not, even after the full 30 minutes of roasting. So, it is a good idea to remove the ones that are fully opened and let the rest bake for a little longer, if necessary.
    • A word on peeling *2: During the course of three weeks, in preparation for this post, I have tried several of the “easy” peeling methods I found in various websites and books. I learned one thing and it is that the ease of peeling depends on the type of chestnut you use. Yes, the method of cooking is important and you want to make sure they are fully cooked, but be aware that not every chestnut is created equal.
      During my recipe testing, I found that Chinese chestnuts were very hard to peel, especially when it came to the inner skin (the fuzzy part), whereas Italian chestnuts were easier. However, even with the Italian chestnuts, there were some that broke as I was peeling.
      It is also important to mention that the size and age of the chestnut play an important role when it comes to peeling. Based on all this, I think the rule of thumb when it comes to peeling is to be patient and keep a paring knife nearby if it gets hard to peel by hand.
    • Store: Place roasted chestnuts in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Freeze: Place peeled chestnuts in a freezer bag, get the air out as much as you can, tightly seal, and freeze for up to 3 months.
    • Thaw: Remove from the freezer and defrost in the fridge overnight.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/roast-chestnuts-in-oven/feed/ 30
    Boiled Chestnuts https://foolproofliving.com/boiled-chestnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/boiled-chestnuts/#comments Wed, 22 Dec 2021 19:27:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=47175 New to cooking chestnuts? Be sure to check out our posts on How to Roast Chestnuts in Oven, Air Fryer…]]>

    New to cooking chestnuts? Be sure to check out our posts on How to Roast Chestnuts in Oven, Air Fryer Chestnuts, and Roasting Chestnuts in an Open Fire.

    Boiled chestnuts are being scooped out by a person from boiling water.

    What You Will Need?

    For boiled chestnuts, all you need is raw chestnuts, water, and optional seasonings. However, it is important to note that not all chestnuts are created equal.

    • Chestnuts: You can find fresh chestnuts at your local grocery store and farmers markets during the fall and winter months. I tested this steamed chestnuts recipe using Chinese and European chestnuts (primarily from Italy), which are both widely available. Italian chestnuts were easier to peel compared to Chinese ones so I would recommend buying those if you can get your hands on them.
      Also, if you can find American chestnuts, they would work as well.
    • Seasonings: While they are optional, you can flavor the boiling water with bay leaves, orange peel, or cinnamon sticks.
    • Water: I used tap water.

    Preparing Chestnuts for Boiling:

    Start by scoring the chestnuts. This is a crucial step for easy peeling later on. 

    Person showing how to score chestnuts

    To do so:

    1. Place a chestnut on a cutting board, flat side down, securing it firmly in between your index finger and thumb.
    2. Using a paring knife, chestnut knife, or a sharp serrated knife, make a small incision (approximately ½ inch lengthwise) horizontally over the rounded side of the chestnut. You do want to cut through the outer shell and the inner fuzzy skin, but do your best not to cut through the flesh too much.

    How To Boil?

    Boiling chestnuts on the stovetop is an easy process and require no special equipment. Simply:

    Two images showing how to boil chestnuts
    1. Boil water in a saucepan: Fill a saucepan with cold water. You should have enough water to cover the chestnuts fully. Bring it to a boil. Place chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for approximately 15-20 minutes, or until the scored section opens up revealing the fuzzy skin on the inside.
    2. Check for doneness: Carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow flesh is fully cooked. If the pulp is soft and creamy, it is cooked.
      If so, use a slotted spoon to remove the chestnuts into a bowl. Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel and let it cool for 10 minutes. If it is not fully cooked, cook it for another 3-4 minutes, checking doneness during the boiling process once or twice.

    How To Peel?

    When they are still hot, but somewhat cool enough to handle, peel chestnuts one by one. Start with the outer shell and then remove the inner skin. If you have a hard time removing the fuzzy skin, place it back in the water for a few more minutes or use a paring knife to remove it as much as you can.

    For recipes like the famous French Marron Glace (aka candied chestnuts), you would have to peel them slowly so that they will stay in one piece.

    Still, peeling chestnuts this way requires patience and you may end up with broken pieces along the way. 

    Person showing how to peel boiled chestnuts

    Alternatively, you can cut it down the middle and scoop out the nuts using a small spoon and collect the boiled and steamed chestnuts in a bowl. You will end up with broken pieces but it will still be delicious.

    I find that this is the easiest way to shell chestnuts, especially if you are using them in a recipe such as chestnut puree (to make Mont Blanc dessert), chestnut stuffing, or chestnut soup.

    Discard the bad chestnuts that are spoiled inside as you peel them.

    Expert Tips

    • It is easier to peel them while they are still warm: During my testing, I learned that boiled chestnuts were easier to peel when they were still warm, especially the fuzzy skin underneath the shell. It was harder to remove the shell after it was cooled down to room temperature. If your chestnuts cool down too much, pop them back in the pot of hot water for 3-4 minutes to rewarm, then drain and continue with peeling.
    • Should I add a splash of oil for easy removal?: As I was doing my research for this post, I found a few sources recommending adding a splash of olive oil claiming that it would help with peeling. I did not find this to be helpful at all so I wouldn’t recommend it.
    • Be patient: Peeling boiled chestnuts requires patience. It is also important to mention that age and size matter when it comes to cooking time and peeling. If your chestnuts are not equal in size then it might take shorter/longer to cook. As always, check for doneness along the way.
    • Use the proper size saucepot: The size of the saucepot and the amount of water you use depends on the amount of chestnuts you are boiling. If you are cooking a lot, then use a large pot and more water.
    Peeled chestnuts are on a plate from the top view

    How To Store, Freeze & Thaw?

    • Storage: Place boiled and peeled chestnuts in an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
    • Freeze: Place peeled chestnuts in a freezer bag, push out as much air as possible, seal, label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
    • Thaw: Remove from the freezer and defrost in the fridge overnight.

    FAQs

    How Long to Cook Chestnuts in Water?

    The time it takes for chestnuts to fully cook largely depends on the age and size of the chestnuts. Start by boiling for 15 minutes and check for doneness. If not fully cooked, check for doneness every 5-6 minutes thereafter.

    How to Tell if the Chestnuts are Fully Cooked?

    If the outer skin is open revealing the fuzzy skin, you can fish them out. However, it is possible that some of them might not fully open. Because of this, the best way to test doneness is to check one. It is cooked when the inside is soft, with a buttery texture.

    How To Cook Frozen Peeled Chestnuts?

    Defrost frozen chestnuts in the fridge overnight. Bring to room temperature. Boil them in water for 10-15 minutes or roast them in a preheated 400 degrees F oven for 15-20 minutes. Since cooking time depends on the size and age of the chestnut, be sure to test one before completing the cooking process.

    What’s the easiest way to peel chestnuts?

    Scoring chestnuts before boiling or roasting helps with removing them from their shells. Once fully cooked, peel the outer layer using the scored shell and then peel away the inner skin. If it is not peeling easily, you can use a sharp paring knife to help you along the way.

    Other Snacks You Might Like:

    Before I share more snack recipes you might also like please know that I also shared my methods on Roasting Chestnuts in the Oven and Cooking Chestnuts in an open fire so feel free to check those out as well.

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    If you try this Boiled Chestnuts recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    Boiled chestnuts being removed from the pot
    Print

    Boiled Chestnuts Recipe

    Learn how to boil chestnuts using my foolproof method. Plus, get all my tips on peeling chestnuts to use in recipes such as soups, purees and cakes or to serve it as a healthy snack.
    Course Healthy Snacks
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Cooling time 10 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 222kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 lbs chestnuts* preferably Italian or American chestnuts
    • Water

    Instructions

    • Place chestnuts in a colander and rinse under cold running water. Drain.
    • Place the flat side of the chestnut down on a cutting board with the rounded side facing up. Hold the chestnut firmly and using a sharp knife (or a chestnut knife, if you have one) cut it horizontally across the rounded side to make a small incision (about ½ to 1 inch). Turn it 90 degrees and score once again, making an X. As you are cutting, make sure you are cutting through the inner skin without going too much into the yellow flesh. Continue with the rest of the chestnuts.
    • Fill a saucepan with water and bring it to a rolling boil. Place the scored chestnuts into the boiling water and cook for 15-20 minutes or until the scored section opens up and the inside of the chestnut is exposed.
    • To check doneness, carefully remove one chestnut and peel to check if the yellow nut inside is fully cooked. If it is not fully cooked, cook it for another 3-4 minutes, checking doneness during the boiling process once or twice.
    • Do not discard the hot water.
    • Using a slotted spoon, transfer boiled chestnuts into a bowl and let them cool for 10 minutes. When still hot, but somewhat cool enough to handle, peel chestnuts one by one first starting with the outer shell and then removing the inner skin. If you have a hard time removing the fuzzy skin, put them back in the hot water for a few more minutes or use a paring knife to remove it as much as you can.
    • Alternatively, if it is hard to peel, you can cut it in the middle and remove the flesh using a small spoon and collect the boiled chestnuts in a bowl. You will end up with broken pieces but it will still be delicious.

    Notes

    • The boiling time and the ease of peeling largely depends on the size, age, and type of your chestnut. This recipe was tested with Italian chestnuts that I hand-picked one by one while making sure that each piece was somewhat equal in size. If your chestnuts are in different sizes, the time of cooking might change. Please check doneness (following my tips) after the first 15 minutes of boiling and cook them longer if need be.
    • Boiled chestnuts were easier to peel when they were still warm, especially the fuzzy skin underneath the shell. It was harder to remove the shell after it was cooled down to room temperature. If your chestnuts cool down too much, pop them back in the pot of hot water for 3-4 minutes to rewarm, then drain and continue with peeling.
    • Seasonings: While they are optional, you can flavor the boiling water with bay leaves, orange peel, or cinnamon sticks.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 549mg | Vitamin A: 29IU | Vitamin C: 46mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/boiled-chestnuts/feed/ 4
    Roasted Carrot Hummus https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/#comments Tue, 12 Oct 2021 15:48:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14848 Today’s recipe, Roasted Carrot Hummus, is the newest addition to our collection of easy appetizers. Similar to some of the…]]>

    Today’s recipe, Roasted Carrot Hummus, is the newest addition to our collection of easy appetizers. Similar to some of the other reader favorites like my Baked Goat Cheese Dip, Italian Bread Dipping Oil, and Muhammara, it is ready in less than 20 minutes.

    Roasted Carrot Hummus in a bowl with vegetables and olives around it

    Why Should You Make This Recipe?

    • Next-level flavor: The caramelized flavor of roasted carrots mixed in with tahini, chickpeas, and a squeeze of lemon juice is surprisingly flavorful and can be a great alternative to the classic hummus recipe with only one quick step (aka adding roasted carrots)
    • Easy to customize: While the recipe as written is great, if you are having to accommodate different diet restrictions, perhaps requiring it to be made without tahini or chickpeas (for Whole 30), you can easily make a few ingredient swaps to customize it to your needs. It is also vegan, gluten-free and paleo friendly.
    • Versatile: Entertain in style by serving it with crudite vegetables (like I did) or simply use it to spread your morning/avocado toast for a delicious breakfast.

    List of Ingredients:

    To make this carrot hummus recipe you will need three sets of ingredients. The list below might look long but I bet you have all of them in your pantry.

    For Roasting Carrots:

    In terms of veggies, you will need carrots and whole garlic cloves. Make sure to wash and chop your carrots and don’t be afraid to mix them up with some colorful carrots such as purple or yellow. 

    the ingredients for roasted carrots are laid out on a marble backdrop

    I like to cut them into equal (2-inch) pieces to make sure they roast evenly. You will also need a few garlic cloves, olive oil, ground cumin, and salt and black pepper.

    For The Hummus:

    Regular hummus ingredients are portioned out and placed on a marble backdrop

    For the hummus ingredients, gather tahini (aka sesame paste), olive oil, fresh lemon juice, water, salt and black pepper, and chickpeas.

    For The Toppings:

    You can certainly serve this roasted carrot hummus without any toppings, but toppings are usually the fun part. A few of my favorites include black or white sesame seeds, chopped fresh herbs like parsley or dill, and a drizzle of olive oil.

    How To Make It?

    carrots being roasted on a sheet pan
    1. Roast the vegetables: Arrange carrot and garlic cloves in a single layer on a baking sheet. Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt and pepper. Roast in a preheated 400 degrees F oven for 30-35 minutes. Set aside to cool.
    person showing steps of making carrot hummus in four photos
    1. Prep the tahini mixture: Meanwhile, whisk together tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, water, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Place roasted carrots, garlic and drained chickpeas in a food processor.
    2. Process: Pulse 4-5 times to break them. Then while the machine is running, pour the tahini dressing through the opening. 
    3. Scrape: Stop and scrape the sides of the bowl to incorporate any unmixed chunks. Give it a taste and add more seasoning if necessary.
    4. Garnish & Serve: Transfer into a bowl, drizzle it with a tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle it with fresh parsley.
    roasted carrot hummus with veggies around it

    Variations:

    What I love most about this Roasted Carrot Hummus is that you can easily accommodate various dietary needs with a few simple ingredient adjustments. Here are a few variations I tried:

    • Carrot Hummus without Chickpeas: Not allowed to eat legumes because you’re following the Whole30 diet? No worries! Simply replace the can of chickpeas with 2 or 3 more carrots or a ½ cup of cauliflower florets. 
    • Carrot Hummus without Tahini: If you’re not crazy about the taste of sesame paste, use an equal amount of unsalted and unsweetened peanut or almond butter in place of tahini.
    • Carrot Turmeric Hummus: For a little extra boost of seasoning, add ½ teaspoon of dried turmeric but keep in mind that a little goes a long way.
    • Moroccan Spiced Carrot Hummus: If you want to add a unique flavor straight from the Middle East, try adding a mix of ¼ teaspoon each of ground cinnamon, ginger, coriander, and all spice to the hummus while blending in the food processor.
    • Carrot Sriracha Hummus: Like your dip with a little bit of kick? Try mixing in 1 tablespoon of sriracha!
    • Switch up the flavors with toppings: Inspired by the way I serve my Whole Roasted Carrots, you can top it off with crumbled feta, fresh dill, and pomegranate seeds.

    How and What to Serve With?

    There are so many options when it comes to serving this carrot hummus dip and no wrong way to eat it! Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve this appetizer:

    Carrot hummus is being served as a part of cheese platter
    • Serve it with crackers & raw vegetables: Pita chips, crackers, root vegetable chips, raw veggies (like snap peas, cauliflower, and broccoli) provide a colorful serving option.
    • Serve it as a part of a charcuterie board: Present this homemade hummus as part of a meat and cheese platter for a unique spin on an appetizer display.
    • Use it as sandwich spread: On the next day, use it to spread over toasted bread and top it off with sliced avocado for a delicious vegan breakfast.

    How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw

    • To Store: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (make sure that it is at room temperature)  and store in the fridge for upto 3 days. 
    • To Freeze: As long as it is kept in an airtight container, carrot hummus will keep fresh for upto a month.
    • To Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight. You may have to give it a stir before serving as ingredients tend to separate. Thawed out hummus is good for up to 5 days and should not be refrozen.

    Expert Tips

    • Chunky or smooth: If you prefer chunkier hummus, keep an eye on the food processor and stop it before it becomes too well blended. For fluffy hummus with a smooth texture, allow the processor to mix the ingredients for a longer period of time. 
    • Scrape the bowl: Like it is with any dip recipe, it is a good idea to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times to make sure it is processing evenly.
    • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste before serving and season accordingly.
    • Don’t have a food processor? While a food processor is your best option, a high speed blender (such as Vitamix) will work as well. However, since they are more powerful it is a good idea to keep a close eye on it as it blends.

    FAQs

    Do I have to peel the carrots when making this carrot hummus recipe?

    This is a personal choice. If you wash it well and scrub it lightly with a kitchen brush to get rid of any of the debris, you do not need to peel the carrots, especially if your carrots are organic.

    How many calories are in carrot hummus?

    A serving of this carrot hummus is around 188 calories.

    Is carrot hummus Keto-diet friendly?

    Hummus is considered keto-friendly. However, due to the high carb content of chickpeas and carrots, they should be consumed in small amounts.

    Other Carrot Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Whether you are a fan of Food Network / Giada’s Carrot Hummus or have always loved Bon Appetite’s Roasted Carrot Hummus recipe, I hope you give my version a try. I know those are favorited by many people but I promise you that my version is just as good, if not better.

    And if you have some leftover carrots, here are a few more recipes to try”

    [/su_note]
    roasted carrot hummus in a bowl close up from the top view
    Print

    Roasted Carrot Hummus Recipe

    This Roasted carrot hummus has all of the creaminess of classic hummus, but with the volume turned up. The sweetnees coming from caramelized roasted carrots mixed with tahini and chickpeas take the simple hummus recipe to a whole new level. Serve this easy dip as an appetizer or as a part of your meat and cheese boards.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 188kcal

    Ingredients

    For the Roasted Carrots:

    • 8-10 medium carrots scrubbed well and cut into big chunks ( about 1 1/4 pounds)
    • 2 cloves garlic peeled
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

    For the Hummus:

    • 2 tablespoons tahini sesame paste
    • 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons water more if needed
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • ¾ cup canned chickpeas rinsed and drained

    Optional Garnish:

    • 1 teaspoon black or white sesame seeds
    • Drizzle of olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Place the carrots and garlic onto the prepared sheet, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with ground cumin, salt and pepper. Roast for 30 minutes. Let them cool for 10 minutes.
    • Whisk together the tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, water, salt and pepper in a bowl until thoroughly combined.
    • Transfer the roasted carrots and garlic into the bowl of a food processor. Add in the chickpeas. Pulse 4-5 times, scrape the sides of the bowl and then turn the processor on. As it runs, drizzle the tahini mix through the tube. Let it run until the hummus is creamy. You might have to stop and scrape the sides of the bowl a few times.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in more salt and pepper if necessary.
    • Garnish with a drizzle of olive oil, sesame seeds, and parsley if using.

    Notes

    • This carrot hummus recipe yields 1 1/2 – 2 cups of carrot hummus.
    • To Store: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (make sure that it is at room temperature)  and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. 
    • To Freeze: As long as it is kept in an airtight container, carrot hummus will keep fresh for up to a month.
    • To Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight. You may have to give it a stir before serving as ingredients tend to separate. Thawed out hummus is good for up to 5 days and should not be refrozen.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 188kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 330mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 13598IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/feed/ 29
    Spinach Quesadilla https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-quesadilla/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-quesadilla/#comments Wed, 11 Aug 2021 16:35:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43466 This Spinach Quesadilla pleases your tastebuds, wallet, and picky eaters with nothing but simple, fresh, and flavorful ingredients. After all,…]]>

    This Spinach Quesadilla pleases your tastebuds, wallet, and picky eaters with nothing but simple, fresh, and flavorful ingredients. After all, who can resist the rich taste of sauteéd spinach, hearty garlic, and buttery cheese? Plus, when served with Mr. Spice’s zesty, vegan Tangy Bang sauce, this spinach quesadilla recipe really comes to life.

    Add to your collection of Mexican party food by serving this spinach and cheese quesadilla alongside other fresh and savory recipes, like my Easy Mexican Street Corn and Quinoa Chili.

    Spinach Quesadilla cut into small pieces and served on a plate

    Ingredients

    You will need just a few simple ingredients to make this cheesy spinach quesadilla recipe. For the spinach filling, you will need:

    • Unsalted butter: Melted butter is needed to saute spinach and brush the tortillas before cooking them. Olive oil (or any other vegetable oil) can be used instead if preferred.
    • Spinach: I used fresh baby spinach. However, frozen spinach can be used. If you decide to go that route, be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight and squeeze all the juice out of it before using it as a filling.
    • Fresh garlic cloves: A small clove of minced garlic will help flavor the spinach, but if you want, you can omit using it.
    • Kosher salt & pepper
    Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a marble backdrop

    To prepare the spinach tortillas part of the recipe, gather:

    • Flour tortillas: I used store-bought 9-inch flour tortillas. However, gluten-free tortillas, corn tortillas, or even wheat tortilla quesadillas work just as well for those following a special diet.
    • Monterey Jack Cheese: While the authentic quesadilla recipe uses Qaxaca cheese, since it is not widely available most people use Monterey Jack cheese when making quesadillas. If you can get your hands on Qaxaca cheese, go for it. Alternatively, you can use shredded Mexican cheese blends that are available in most grocery stores.
    • Mr Spice’s Tangy Bang Sauce (Optional): To add a bold, citrusy heat to this easy quesadilla recipe, Mr. Spice’s Tangy Bang sauce is just what you need. Not only is this sauce GMO-, gluten-, and sodium-free, but it’s also low-calorie and low-carb! For another healthy flavor addition, you can also try Mr. Spice’s Garlic Steak sauce to give your quesadillas a meaty, smoky twist.

    Optional Add-Ins & Variations

    Whether you want to add a tender protein, a crisp vegetable, or a diet-friendly twist to this dish, spinach quesadillas are one of the easiest recipes to make your own.

    Here are a few ideas to make it your own:

    • Mushrooms: Get an irresistible umami flavor by turning this recipe into a spinach mushroom quesadilla. All you need is 1 cup of sliced and sauteéd baby portobello or sauteed shiitakes.
    • Chicken: To make a chicken and spinach quesadilla, just add cubed baked chicken breasts or leftover rotisserie chicken. Only 1 cup is necessary for 4 tortillas.
    • Shrimp: Bring the smoky, summer taste of the grill to your quesadilla by adding in grilled shrimp.

    How To Make Spinach Quesadillas?

    Because these spinach and cheese quesadillas can be made in four steps and less than 20 minutes, they’re the perfect dish for any cook on a time crunch.

    Person showing how to saute spinach
    1. Sauteé the spinach: Melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a 10- or 12-inch, large nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add the spinach, put on the lid, and cook for 3-4 minutes. Once the spinach has lost most of its volume, add in the garlic, Tangy Bang sauce, salt, and pepper. Stir, and then transfer the fully cooked spinach onto a plate or small bowl. Use a paper towel to clean the skillet and set it aside.
    Person showing how to assemble spinach and cheese tortillas with photos
    1. Assemble the tortillas: Lay 4 flour tortillas on a flat work surface. Place ½ cup shredded cheese on one half of each tortilla. Then, divide the cooked spinach mixture equally among the tortillas and place it on top of the cheese. Fold the plain half of the tortilla on top of the spinach. Brush each tortilla with melted butter.
    Person showing how to pan sear quesadillas
    1. Cook the quesadillas: Place the large skillet over medium heat and place the quesadillas butter side down. Then brush the top with the rest of the melted butter. Cook them 1-2 minutes on each side, until the cheese melts and they’re golden brown. Transfer the cooked quesadillas to a cutting board and repeat the cooking process with the remaining quesadillas.
    spinach cheese quesadilla cut into small pieces on a cutting board
    1. Serve: Slice the quesadillas into wedges and garnish with cilantro leaves. If desired, serve the quesadillas with a side of Tangy Bang sauce and sour cream for dipping.

    How to Store and Reheat?

    • Storage: Crispy, gooey, and hot off the skillet, quesadillas are best on the day they’re made. However, leftovers can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 2 days.
    • Reheating leftovers: To reheat, set the oven to 300 degrees F. and place the quesadillas inside for 5-8 minutes.

    Serving Ideas:

    While you can serve these cheese and spinach quesadillas by themselves (and they are wonderful that way) or with a side of Mr. Spice’s Tangy Bangy sauce, you can take them up a notch by serving them with some of the classic Mexican condiments such as:

    • Guacamole: If I am serving quesadillas to a crowd, I usually make a big batch of my 4-ingredient Guacamole recipe. People can use it to top them off or as a dip on the side.
    • Salsa: During the summer months, when cherry tomatoes are in abundance, I make a batch of my Cherry Tomato Salsa to serve as a sauce/dip on the side.
    • Mexican Street Corn Salad: Serve this humble quesadilla recipe with my Mexican Street Corn Salad to transform it into a delicious meal.
    Person dipping spinach quesadillas in a sauce

    Expert Tips:

    This is a rather easy recipe, but there are a few things that I’d like to mention to help you succeed on the first try. Be sure to read the expert tips below before you start making the recipe:

    • Liquid in spinach: After sauteing spinach, be sure to drain any excess liquid to prevent your quesadillas from becoming mushy.
    • Don’t overfill your quesadillas: While it is tempting to fill them to the brim, it is best to follow the recipe as written and avoid overfilling the quesadillas. Otherwise, they could potentially fall apart when you flip them.
    • Reheat your skillet: The secret to getting quesadillas that are crispy on the outside and soft and cheesy on the inside is to brush them with melted butter and cook them in a preheated hot skillet. I usually preheat the skillet over medium-high heat first. Then turn it down to medium as soon as I put my spinach quesadilla on top so that it won’t burn.

    Why Should You Try This Recipe?

    Need more convincing? These spinach and cheese quesadillas are one of the most beloved Mexican recipes. With toasty tortillas and melty cheese, what’s not to love about this delicious side dish?

    • Quick and easy, this dish is so simple that you can make it for breakfast on your busiest mornings without skipping a beat.
    • These veggie quesadillas are a great way to get fussy eaters (hello, toddlers!) to eat leafy greens and even ask for seconds.
    • Customize this spinach quesadillas recipe with hundreds of delicious add-ons, from sauteéd mushrooms to smoky grilled shrimp.

    FAQs

    When scouting out a new recipe, you deserve to know what’s in it! Learn all you need to know about nutrition information and ingredients right here.

    What’s the best cheese for Quesadillas?

    The best cheese for quesadillas is Qaxaca cheese. However, since it is not widely available, most people use Monterey Jack cheese. Alternatively, you can make your own cheese blend by mixing Monterey Jack, mozzarella, and cheddar cheese.

    Can you use mozzarella cheese for quesadillas?

    Though it’s not the traditional choice, mozzarella can be used as a creamy and easy-to-melt quesadilla cheese. Add some basil and tomato, too, and you can even make Caprese quesadillas!

    How many calories are in spinach quesadillas?

    Each serving of spinach quesadillas is around 386 calories.

    Are spinach quesadillas healthy?

    Spinach quesadillas are an excellent source of dairy, leafy greens, and fiber, making them both a delicious and nutritious choice. Plus, spinach is packed with vitamins and minerals that boost the immune system, iron levels, and skin health.

    Got Some Leftover Spinach? Try These Recipes:

    If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those who are planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the whole Foolproof Living community.

    Spinach Quesadilla cut up and served on a plate with sauce on the side.
    Print

    Spinach Quesadilla Recipe

    These delicious Spinach Quesadillas are to cheer your picky eaters. This gooey, cheesy, and easy to make recipe is Ready in 15 minutes and it can be served as breakfast or a light snack.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine Mexican
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 386kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Spinach Mixture:

    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 5 cups baby spinach rinsed and spin-dried
    • 1 clove garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon Tangy Bang sauce (optional) plus more to serve as a dip on the side
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    For The Spinach Tortillas

    • 4 flour tortillas mine are 9-inch in diameter – use gluten-free tortillas if preferred
    • 2 cups shredded monterey jack cheese or a combination of monterey jack, Oaxa cheese
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted

    Optional:

    • Sour cream
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped cilantro

    Instructions

    • Heat 1 tablespoon of butter in a 10 or 12-inch nonstick skillet with a lid over medium heat.
    • Add the spinach in. Put the lid on and let it cook for 3-4 minutes or until spinach starts to lose most of its volume. Add in the garlic, Tangy Bang sauce (if using) and season it with salt and pepper and and give it a stir. Transfer the now-fully cooked spinach onto a plate and set it aside. Clean the skillet with a paper towel and set it aside. No need to wash it.
    • To assemble the tortillas, lay 4 flour tortillas on a flat surface, add ½ cup shredded cheese on one half of each tortilla. Divide the cooked spinach amongst the tortillas mounting it onto the cheese. Fold the other half over the filling.
    • Place the skillet over medium heat. Brush each tortilla with melted butter and transfer 2 of them onto the skillet. Cook 1-2 minutes on each side (or until it turns golden brown). Once cooked, transfer them onto a cutting board to cool off. Repeat the same process with the rest of the quesadillas.
    • Slice them into wedges. If using, garnish with cilantro leaves. Serve with more Tangy Bang sauce and sour cream on the side for dipping.

    Notes

    • Yields: This recipe makes four spinach quesadillas ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
    • Can you use mozzarella cheese for quesadillas? Though it’s not the traditional choice, mozzarella can be used as a creamy and easy-to-melt quesadilla cheese. 
    • Storage: Leftovers of these spinach quesadillas can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 2 days. To reheat, set the oven to 300 degrees F. and place the quesadillas inside for 5-8 minutes.
    • For a gluten-free quesadilla recipe be sure to buy gluten-free quesadillas.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 830mg | Potassium: 309mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 4221IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 495mg | Iron: 2mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-quesadilla/feed/ 17
    Eggplant Yogurt Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/#comments Mon, 02 Aug 2021 03:37:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4161 This Eggplant Yogurt Recipe is a Turkish appetizer that will make your mouth water with every bite. Fire-roasted eggplant adds…]]>

    This Eggplant Yogurt Recipe is a Turkish appetizer that will make your mouth water with every bite. Fire-roasted eggplant adds a smoky flavor to this tangy and bold dish, and fresh lemon juice gives it a tantalizing citrus bite. Whether you serve it as a side dish or as an eggplant yogurt dip with pita chips, this recipe is guaranteed to satisfy!

    Spain has tapas and Italy has antipasti, but in my opinion, Middle Eastern mezze is the most delicious. If you’re craving even more appetizing mezze recipes, you’ll love my Muhammara Recipe, Roasted Eggplant Red Pepper Spread, and Hummus Dip. You can also try my Yoghurt Dressing and Turkish Stuffed Eggplant for even more Turkish Cuisine inspiration.

    Aubergine yogurt recipe in a bowl garnished with parsley

    Why You Should Try This Recipe

    With all the best flavors of Mediterranean cuisine, this eggplant and Greek yogurt recipe will be your new go-to dish to serve at parties and in your own home!

    • This recipe is a great alternative to Baba Ganoush if you don’t have tahini on hand or simply want to try out a new Middle Eastern spread.
    • You can serve this recipe as Turkish eggplant dip or as a side dish, depending on how you present it.
    • Take the stress out of meal prep by making this dish up to 2 days in advance.

    Ingredients

    Who knew eating around the world could be so easy? This authentic Israeli dish is just as scrumptious as other Yotam Ottolenghi dips, but it only uses a handful of pantry staples.

    Ingredients for eggplant dip with yogurt

    Eggplants

    Whether you have globe eggplants or long and lean Japanese eggplant, both work perfectly for this recipe. Just be sure to adjust how many eggplants you gather depending on their size. You’ll need 4 medium eggplants or 2 large ones.

    Pro Tip: The best eggplants are those that are firm, heavy for their size, shiny on the outside, and unbruised. Choosing the freshest produce will ensure that your Turkish grilled eggplant tastes as smoky, tender, and non-bitter as possible. (Source)

    Greek Yogurt Mixture

    For the yogurt mixture, gather Greek yogurt, garlic cloves, olive oil, fresh lemon juice, salt, black pepper, and Italian parsley.

    How To Make It

    If you love the taste of Turkish smoked eggplant, with a little planning, you will find that the steps of making this easy side dish are a breeze.

    Photos showing how to roast brinjal on stove top
    1. Fire roast the eggplants: Turn the gas stove on low and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Use a pair of tongs to turn the eggplants every 3-5 minutes until they’re blackened and soft. Remove them from the flame and cover them with aluminum foil to steam further. (For more instructions, tips, and tricks be sure to check out my guide on How To Cook Eggplant on Gas Stove)
      Alternatively, if you want a more hands off approach for cooking eggplants, you can roast whole eggplants in the oven, scoop out their flesh using a spoon, and use the flesh in this recipe.
    2. Peel the eggplant skins: When the eggplants reach about room temperature, run them under cool water and gently peel off as much of their black outer layer as possible. Place in a colander placed over a bowl and let them sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes. 
    3. Cut the flesh: If you choose to, remove both the eggplant flesh and any large chunks of seeds. Then, cut the flesh into small pieces and place them in a medium bowl.
    Showing steps of making the yogurt eggplant dip greek style
    1. Make the yogurt mixture: In a large bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon juice, salt, and pepper until creamy.
    2. Combine the eggplant: Spoon yogurt sauce over the slices of eggplant and mix with a fork. Make sure that there are no large chunks and each piece of eggplant is evenly coated in yogurt. You may find you need more or less yogurt depending on how much eggplant you have.
    3. Serve: Transfer the mixture to a serving platter, and put pita chips or pita bread on the side. Garnish with parsley and/or sesame seeds, and it’s ready to eat!

    PRO TIP: Because the amount of eggplant used varies so greatly, you may find you need more salt than listed in the recipe to give your dish enough flavor. Make sure you taste this recipe as you go and add extra seasoning as needed. 

    Turkish Eggplant Dip on a plate with chopped parsley on top

    Expert Tips & Variations

    I always have so much fun playing with recipes to make them my own. Satisfy your taste buds with this classic Israeli yogurt dip by using these genius variations:

    • Take the stress out of fire roasting by roasting whole eggplants instead. Just poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant using a fork and place them on a rimmed baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Roast them in the oven at 400 degrees F. for 50-60 minutes, making sure to turn them halfway through. Then, remove the eggplants from the oven and set them aside to cool. You can find complete instructions for this hands-free method in my guide on how to Roast Whole Eggplant in Oven.
      Alternatively, you can cut eggplants in half lenghtwise and bake eggplant halves in the oven. Then scoop out the flesh to use in this recipe.
    • Don’t worry if you can’t get off all the burnt eggplant skin when peeling it in the sink. These charred bits will actually add more smoky flavor to the recipe.
    • Add a drizzle of sumac and pomegranate molasses for a delicious, tart twist to this eggplant dip with yogurt.
    • Pita chips, crackers, and even slices of pita bread pair perfectly with this Middle Eastern appetizer.
    • Transform this dish into aubergine yoghurt salad by adding a little bit less yogurt mixture to your roasted eggplant.
    • Give your spice rack a spin by using any fresh herbs you want in this recipe. Parsley, dill, fresh mint, or even a combination of them all make this eggplant dip Greek style.
    • Sprinkle it with this Homemade Everything Bagel Seasoning for extra crunch and flavor.
    • Prefer a version of this without the yogurt sauce? Try this Roasted Eggplant Dip

    How to Make Ahead and Store

    Whether you’re preparing a side dish for a dinner party or a quick snack for when you’re on the go, this aubergine yoghurt is the perfect recipe for meal prep.

    • Make ahead: When making this recipe ahead of time, prepare the fire roasted eggplant and yogurt mixture separately. This way, the eggplant won’t absorb too much liquid, and it will better retain its gentle smoky flavor.
    • Store: This eggplant dip with yogurt can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Before serving, be sure to stir the mixture to keep the yogurt, lemon, and olive oil from getting watery.
    • Freeze: Although this dip keeps well in the fridge, I don’t recommend freezing it.

    Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like:


    Eggplant yogurt dip recipe in a bowl garnished with parsley
    Print

    Eggplant Yogurt Dip Recipe

    This Eggplant yogurt recipe is made by roasting eggplants on the stove top and then mixing it with a garlic yogurt sauce. Served with pita chips on the side, it is the perfect side dish or appetizer that you can make with eggplants.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine Turkish
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 190kcal

    Ingredients

    • 4 medium size eggplants or 2 large eggplants* – no need to peel them.
    • 1 cup full fat plain Greek yogurt
    • 3 cloves garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil plus more to drizzle at the end
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
    • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper
    • 1/4 cup Italian parsley chopped
    • Pita chips for serving
    • 1 tbsp sesame seeds or Z'aatar as garnish – optional

    Instructions

    • To fire roast the eggplants on the stove: Place eggplants directly on the gas stove. Roast them on direct flames, turning it every 3-5 minutes until they are charred, soft and collapsing. Set them aside to cool.
    • When cool enough to handle, peel them gently under cold running water. At this point, all you want to do is to remove the outer black layer as much as you can. And if some pieces make it to the dip, that is perfectly fine.
    • Remove the flesh. If there are large chunks of seeds, you can remove them as well. This is an optional step and it would be okay if you didn’t remove them, especially if you are making this during the eggplant season when they are the freshest.
    • Cut the eggplant flesh into small pieces and place it in a medium sized bowl.
    • While the eggplant is cooking, whisk together the yogurt, fresh garlic, olive oil, lemon juice, salt and pepper in a bowl until creamy.
    • Pour the yogurt mixture over the cooked eggplant. Mix with a fork, gently breaking the large chunks of eggplants and making sure that they are all coated with the yogurt mixture.
    • Garnish with parsley
    • Serve with pita bread or pita chips on the side.

    Notes

    • After roasting the eggplants, you should have about 3 1/2 to 4 cups of eggplant flesh for this recipe.
    • Make ahead: When making this recipe ahead of time, prepare the fire roasted eggplant and yogurt mixture separately. This way, the eggplant won’t absorb too much liquid, and it will better retain its gentle smoky flavor.
    • Store: This eggplant dip with yogurt can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. Before serving, be sure to stir the mixture to keep the yogurt, lemon, and olive oil from getting watery.
    • Freeze: Although this dip keeps well in the fridge, I don’t recommend freezing it.
    • For cooking eggplants, if you prefer a more hands-off approach try roasting them as a whole: To do so, poke 7-10 holes in each eggplant using a fork and place them on a rimmed baking sheet lined with aluminum foil. Roast them in the oven at 400 degrees F. for 50-60 minutes, making sure to turn them halfway through. Then, remove the eggplants from the oven and set them aside to cool. You can find complete instructions for this hands-free method in my guide on how to Roast Whole Eggplant in Oven.
     

    Nutrition

    Calories: 190kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 1185mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 482IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 1mg

    This eggplant yogurt recipe was originally published in August 2014. It has been updated with new photos and helpful text in August 2021.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-eggplant-with-garlic-yogurt-and-zaatar/feed/ 19
    Roasted Delicata Squash https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-delicata-squash/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-delicata-squash/#comments Tue, 29 Sep 2020 09:28:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15150 Every time I go to the farmer’s market I find myself wanting to buy everything. Truth be told, in the…]]>

    Every time I go to the farmer’s market I find myself wanting to buy everything. Truth be told, in the past, there have been instances where I purchased more than we can consume. Sadly, things ended up going bad and later in the trash. Nowadays, I go there with a detailed ingredient list for what I plan to cook for the week, but the urge is still there.

    Recipe for Roasted Delicata Squash garnished with pumpkin seeds with a spoon on the side

    I did not plan on cooking delicata squash recipe this week. At least until I overheard two ladies talking about how yummy they are as a healthy snack at the farmstand. We have been trying different versions of delicata squash recipes but it’s been a while since we roasted them in the oven.

    Coincidently, on the same day, I received Athena Calderone’s new cookbook, Cook Beautiful, in the mail and the first recipe that got my attention was her roasted delicata squash agrodolce.

    Talk about a sign from above.

    sliced Delicata Squash rings and Seeds on the side with honey in a bowl
    long striped squash seeds

    If you are new to cooking delicata squash like I am, I thought it would be helpful to answer some of the FAQs. Here are some of the questions I had:

    What is Delicata Squash?

    If you are new to cooking delicata squash, you might be wondering what it is. As the name suggests, it is a squash with delicate skin. According to this Wikipidia article, even though it is mostly consumed as winter squash, it belongs to the same species of summer squash like zucchini and pattypan squash.

    Some people also call it, long striped squash.

    When is It is in Season?

    Depending on where you live, delicata squash season usually starts from early September and is available through late January.

    How To Pick Delicata Squash?

    When buying delicata squash look for the well-shaped ones that are heavier for their size. Touch all sides and examine the skin for soft spots. As long as there is no softening in the flesh and it has a light yellowish creamy color with long green stripes, it should be good to go. If it is more on the orange side then it might be overly mature.

    How to Cook Delicata Squash?

    My favorite way to cook delicata squash rings is to roast them in the oven but below I will also share with you how I cook in the microwave as well.

    How to roast?

    To roast them, simply place sliced and deseeded delicata squash rings on a sheet pan, drizzle it with some olive oil, salt, and pepper, and roast it in a 375-degree F oven.

    Additionally, while roasting it with a little bit of oil, salt and pepper would do it, there are a few ways to take it to the next level. My favorite one is to add a few tablespoons of honey (or maple syrup would work too) into the dressing.

    The added sweetness mixed in with the already sweet delicata winter squash helps it get caramelized during the roasting process and brings out its nutty and sweet flavors even more.

    If you prefer, you can use maple syrup or brown sugar in place of honey as well.

    How Long To Roast?

    It takes around 30 minutes for the delicata squash slices to fully cook. Though I recommend flipping them halfway through the roasting process.

    What To Do With the Seeds?

    Don’t throw away the delicata squash seeds. I have not tried this just yet, but most people rinse and drain them and then roast it in the oven under the broiler for a few minutes. Also, this Toasted Delicate Squash Seeds recipe looks really good.

    a woman is drizzling delicata squash with honey
    A person is serving a plate full of healthy Delicata Squash rings

    How To Prepare For Roasting?

    To prepare delicata squash for roasting, slice it in 1-inch slices, scoop out the seeds and discard the ends. If you want, you can also cut the delicata squash lengthwise and remove the seeds to roast the halves on a sheet pan.

    Can I Eat The Skin?

    Yes, you can. As a matter of fact, you should because it is full of nutritional fiber. Plus, since it is super thin it disappears in your mouth.

    What Does This Dish Taste Like?

    Baked delicata squash tastes sweeter than most other squash including butternut squash and sweet potato squash. It tastes somewhere between sweet corn and pumpkin pie making it a perfect healthy snack to munch on.

    The Microwave Cooking Method

    While I know that I am a fan of roasting it, you can also cook delicata squash in the microwave. To do so:

    1. Place the rings in a microwave-safe bowl.
    2. Add in 1/2 cup of water or vegetable broth.
    3. Cover it with a lid or stretch film.
    4. Cook 4 minutes. Flip each ring and cook for another 4 minutes or until they are easily pierced with a knife.
    5. Drain the liquid and enjoy.
    roasted delicata squash rings topped off with pumpkin seeds

    Sweet & Sour Drizzle Sauce To Take This Recipe To The Next Level

    Another way to truly up your roasted delicata squash game is to drizzle it with agrodolce sauce as Athena Calderone did in her book, Cook Beautiful.

    To be honest, when I first saw the recipe I didn’t know what “agrodolce” meant. Come to find out, it is a traditional Italian sauce made by reducing sour and sweet elements like vinegar and sugar. In her recipe, Athena drizzles the freshly roasted crispy delicata squash rings with this traditional sauce. In her version of agrodolce, she uses minced habanero chili, white wine vinegar, and honey.

    While you might think of this sauce as an unnecessary step, I beg to differ. The sweet, sour and spicy sauce elevates the humble roasted delicata squash to a restaurant-quality dish.

    There you have it… Whether you want to enjoy it as a healthy snack or serve it as a side dish in your upcoming holiday parties, this easy-to-make roasted delicata squash recipe is guaranteed to impress.

    If You Liked This Healthy Recipe, You Might Also Like

    roasted delicata squash rings on a plate
    Print

    Roasted Delicata Squash Recipe

    Whether you serve it as a healthy snack or a luxurious side dish, this roasted delicata squash recipe is an autumn classic that will impress.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 235kcal

    Ingredients

    For the roasted squash:

    • 2 Delicata squash 1 pound each, rinsed, seeds removed & cut into ½-inch slices
    • 3 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    For the sweet & sour (agrodolce) drizzle sauce: (optional)

    • 1 small ½ teaspoon red habanero (or any other hot) chili, minced
    • cup white wine vinegar
    • Zest of a lime
    • Juice of a lime 2-3 tablespoons, freshly squeezed
    • Pinch of salt
    • 2 tablespoons pepitas aka pumpkin seeds

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat the oven to 375 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Place the squash onto the baking sheet. Drizzle it with olive oil and honey. Sprinkle it with salt and pepper. Toss to coat evenly. Make sure that all the delicata squash slices are evenly distributed throughout the sheet pan.
    • Bake for 12-15 minutes on each side (25-30 min. in total), flipping the squash halfway through the baking process.
    • If prefered, while the squash is baking make the sweet and sour drizzle sauce. Place the chili, vinegar, zest and juice of a lime, and salt in a small saucepan and heat in medium heat. Let it come to a boil, turn down the heat to medium-low and simmer until the mixture is syrupy, 10-12 minutes.
    • When ready to serve, arrange the slices roasted delicata squash in a large plate, drizzle it with the sweet and sour sauce, and sprinkle it with pepitas.
    • Serve immediately.

    Notes

    Alternatively, you can microwave delicata squash. To do so:
    1. Place the rings in a microwave-safe bowl.
    2. Add in 1/2 cup of water or vegetable broth.
    3. Cover it with a lid or stretch film.
    4. Cook 4 minutes. Flip each ring and cook for another 4 minutes or until they are easily pierced with a knife.
    5. Drain the liquid and enjoy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 235kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 448mg | Potassium: 833mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 3120IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg

    This recipe is adapted from Athena Calderone’s cookbook with minor changes, Cook Beautiful.

    This recipe post was originally published in October 2017. It has been updated with additional information with no changes to the originally published recipe in September 2020.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-delicata-squash/feed/ 20
    12+ Creamy & Tangy Goat Cheese Recipes https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-recipes/ https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-recipes/#comments Wed, 02 Sep 2020 04:43:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=26499 If you are a lover of goat cheese, I think you’ll agree that it is one of those magical ingredients…]]>

    If you are a lover of goat cheese, I think you’ll agree that it is one of those magical ingredients that immediately elevates any dish. Simply crumble a log of goat cheese over a salad or bake it in a ramekin and voila, just like that you are in for a treat for a luxurious dish with almost no effort.

    Over the years of sharing my favorite recipes on this blog, goat cheese has been one of my favorite ingredients that I have used in many salads, meat dishes, appetizers, and breakfast recipes.

    Easy goat cheese recipes: A round up of my most delicious made with goat cheese

    In today’s post, I want to talk about creative ways you can use this humble ingredient in your daily cooking, along with some of the goat cheese recipes I shared on my blog throughout the years.

    But before that, let’s go back to basics and answer a few questions about goat cheese.

    What is Goat Cheese?

    Simply put, goat cheese is cheese made from goat’s milk. Originally called by its French name, Chèvre, it has a slightly tangy flavor that lends itself beautifully in many sweet and savory dishes.

    A woman is spreading goat cheese dip on a cracker

    As in most cheeses, goat cheese comes in a variety of forms. The most popular form of goat cheese is fresh (or white) goat cheese that is usually sold in the form of a log. While you can find this simple fresh cheese in its original form, nowadays goat cheesemakers also sell it rolled in varies spices, herbs, and fruits. This version of the chévre is usually the most affordable and versatile one to use in cooking.

    Another popular goat cheese variety is aged goat cheese, which comes in various shapes and sizes. It is usually covered in ash or herbs to prevent it from drying out and to protect its fluffy middle and creamy exterior. As it is more expensive to its fresh version, most people use aged goat cheese as a part of cheese boards on special occasions.

    Need a recommendation for a great goat cheese brand? My favorite goat cheese brand in the market is Vermont Creamery. I love them not only because they are a Vermont company but also because they are very innovative.

    They have an extensive collection of goat cheeses that are sold in log form with or without flavorings. I always keep a tub of their spreadable goat cheese and a log of wild blueberry and lemon-flavored goat cheese (affiliate link) in my fridge.

    Full disclosure: Even though I have worked with Vermont Creamery in the past, this post is not sponsored by them.

    What is the best way to store goat cheese? 

    If you are buying packaged goat cheese, the best way to store it is in the fridge in its packaging. Once opened, it is best to wrap it in wax paper and seal it tightly in a plastic container to prevent it from drying out.

    Warm baked goat cheese dip photographed from the top with fresh and roasted vegetables

    How long is goat cheese good for?

    As long as it is tightly sealed and kept in the fridge, goat cheese will last for 2 to 3 weeks.

    How to crumble goat cheese for salads and other recipes?

    Nowadays most supermarkets sell crumbled goat cheese in their cheese section. However, you can easily crumble a log of fresh goat cheese in your own kitchen.

    To crumble goat cheese at home:

    • Remove a log of fresh goat cheese from its packaging, cut it in half, and place it in the freezer for 15 to 20 minutes. This will help dry out some of its moisture. 
    • Take it out of the freezer and immediately break it into small parts with the help of a fork. I do not recommend using your fingers to do this as the temperature of your body will melt the cheese and make it too creamy to crumble.

    What to do with goat cheese?

    Now that we answered some of the popular FAQs, let’s talk about what to make with goat cheese. Below are some recipes without recipes (yes, there is such a thing) and some of my favorite goat cheese recipes that I shared on this blog over the years.

    Easy Goat Cheese Appetizers and Snacks:

    I’ll be honest, I would be content with munching on a log of fresh goat cheese with a box of multi-grain crackers on the couch. However, when it comes to snacks and appetizers, goat cheese has the potential to be a star ingredient.

    Here are a few ways I use goat cheese to create next-level easy appetizers and snacks:

    01

    Make Goat Cheese A Part Of Your Cheese Boards


    I have never met a cheese lover who doesn’t enjoy a colorful cheese board that is decorated with various cheeses, fruits, nuts, and vegetables. Whether it is fresh or aged goat cheese, my go-to soft and creamy cheese for cheese boards is goat cheese.

    I have never met a cheese lover who doesn’t enjoy a colorful cheese board that is decorated with various cheeses, fruits, nuts, and vegetables. Whether it is fresh or aged goat cheese, my go-to soft and creamy cheese for cheese boards is goat cheese.

    Easy goat cheese appetizers - goat cheese platter set up with olives and fruits

    Love cheese boards? Check out my Ultimate Guide for the Best Cheese and Meat Platter.

    Here are a few FAQs answered about what to serve with goat cheese for your next meat and cheese platter:

    • What other cheese goes with goat cheese? I love pairing goat cheese with semi-hard cheeses like gruyere and manchego and aged and firm cheeses like cheddar and aged gouda.
    • What fruit goes well with goat cheese? It is no secret that the tangy and creamy flavors of goat cheese pairs well with fruits. According to, The Vegetarian Bible (affiliate link), my go-to book for matching flavors, apples, figs, grapes, pomegranate seeds, and apricots pair beautifully with goat cheese.
    • What meat goes with goat cheese? My two favorite types of charcuterie meat for pairing with goat cheese are salami and prosciutto.

    Best Crackers To Pair with Goat Cheese:

    I think we can all agree that a great cheese board needs some delicious crackers. Lucky for us, nowadays most supermarkets carry a variety of cracker selections to help us up our cheese and meat platter game. Below are a few of my favorite cracker brands that I love and recommend.
    The below links are affiliate links.

    • Seeded Crackers: These are my favorite homemade crackers. They are packed with superfoods like chia, hemp, flax, pumpkin, and sunflower seeds. They are also gluten-free, vegan, and keto-friendly.
    • Jan’s Farmhouse Crisps: A small Vermont business, Jan’s Farmhouse Crisps has a variety of crackers you can choose from. My favorite one in their selection is salted almond.
    • Castleton Crackers: Another Vermont business, Castleton crackers offer a variety of all-natural artisan crackers with different flavors. My favorite ones are salted maple and alehouse cheddar.
    • Raincoast Crisps: You can find these crackers in most supermarkets in the US. They too offer a variety of flavors. My favorite one is the one flavored with salty dates and almonds.

    02

    Baked Goat Cheese Balls


    If you want to up your cheese board game to another level, you should try my baked goat cheese balls. This finger food like goat cheese snacks can be made ahead and kept in the freezer until you are ready to bake them right before serving. They are warm, deliciously creamy, and not-so surprisingly addictive.

    Warm Baked Goat Cheese balls are photographed as they are being served

    03

    Baked Goat Cheese Dip


    This melted goat cheese dip recipe is one of my go-to dishes for potlucks, holiday parties during the winter months and picnics during the summer months.

    Warm goat cheese dip as a part of easy goat cheese appetizers round up.

    Made with whipping a combination of goat, parmesan, and cream cheese, it is one of the easiest appetizers you can make. Serve it warm with crackers, fruits, honey, and/or vegetables, and accept compliments from all of your party guests.


    04

    Butternut Squash Bruschetta


    During the holiday season, when there is leftover cranberry sauce, this butternut squash bruschetta is what I make. Simply roast butternut squash (or my roasted delicata squash) in the oven. While it is roasting, spread a generous amount of goat cheese and cranberry sauce (or jam) on a toast. Then top it off with the roasted squash, sliced almonds and fresh herbs. Finally, finish it off with a drizzle of honey.

    This makes an incredible goat cheese appetizer/ finger food that you can also serve on crackers.

    Goat cheese bruschetta with roasted butternut squash is being drizzled with honey

    Goat Cheese Breakfast and Brunch Ideas:

    01

    Add Goat Cheese To Omelets


    This is a recipe without a recipe, but I can’t imagine a better way to take a simple omelet to a whole other level.

    Simply crumble goat cheese and mix it in your omelet with mushrooms and spinach. I usually use 1/2 cup of crumbled fresh goat cheese for an omelet made with 4 eggs (2 servings).


    02

    Goat Cheese and Mushroom Asparagus Tart with Puff Pastry


    Spread a generous amount of creamy goat cheese over puff pastry, top it off with asparagus, and bake it in the oven for a delicious asparagus tart that you can serve as a breakfast or brunch dish.

    Asparagus Tart with Goat Cheese sliced from the top view

    03

    Berry and Goat Cheese Bread Pudding


    Stir in crumbled goat cheese in a buttery brioche pudding sweetened with maple syrup and sweet berries.

    This is my go-to brunch dish come springtime when berries are at their peak. It is one of those luxurious goat cheese desserts / baked recipes that make people swoon.

    Goat cheese berry pudding in a casserole dish from the front view

    04

    Goat Cheese and Caramelized Onion Quiche


    Fill a buttery pie crust with goat cheese, caramelized onions, and egg custard for a next-level quiche recipe that is guaranteed to impress.

    Goat cheese quiche with green salad on the side.

    05

    Tomato Galette with Goat Cheese


    tomato galette with a slice taken out

    If you are a fan of sweet galette recipes, you should try this savory version as well. This tomato galette recipe is made by spreading galette dough with herbed goat cheese and spreading it with sliced heirloom tomatoes.

    It is fairly easy to make and perfect for any breakfast or brunch gathering when you want to impress.


    Goat Cheese Salad Recipes:

    When in doubt, add some crumbled goat cheese to your salads. It is the easiest ingredient I know that provides creamy and tangy deliciousness to any green salad. I usually pair it with fresh fruits and nuts for the most delicious salads.

    01

    Roasted Beet and Goat Cheese Salad


    This citrusy roasted beet and goat cheese salad have a little bit of everything, roasted beets, black-eyed peas, walnuts, and of course, goat cheese. I usually make it for our New Years’ Eve dinner as my Southern husband loves it when I incorporate black-eyed peas into our menu.

    Not so surprisingly, goat cheese adds in an additional layer of flavor even in such a salad with so much going on.

    Salad with oranges in a bowl held by a woman

    02

    Shaved Brussels Sprouts with Goat Cheese and Apples


    Shredded raw brussels sprouts flavored with sliced apples, roasted hazelnuts, dried cranberries, and creamy goat cheese. This make-ahead salad is my favorite fall/holiday salad that I make as soon as brussels sprouts are in abundance.

    Salad made with apples and goat cheese in a bowl

    03

    Baked Goat Cheese Salad


    Remember those baked cheese balls that I shared earlier? This simple green baked goat cheese salad was one of the first recipes I shared on this blog (as you can probably tell from the photos.) However, it is still one that I make often. It is easy to make, and it never fails to impress.

    Goat cheese salad in a bowl

    04

    Roasted Pear Salad


    roasted pear salad in a bowl with a few spoons on the side

    I think it is not right to make a list of things to make with goat cheese and not include a fruity savory salad recipe like this Roasted Pear Salad. Creamy goat cheese mixed with salad greens, lightly honey-roasted pear slices, and toasted walnuts delivers an incredibly delicious yet easy salad that you can make any time of the year.


    Goat Cheese With Main Dishes:

    From adding it to simple vegetarian pasta dishes to chicken or meat dishes, incorporating goat cheese into your main dishes is such an easy way to elevate a recipe.

    01

    Add A Cup Of Crumbled Goat Cheese Into Vegetable Pasta


    This is another recipe without a recipe. I make it when I need to put dinner on the table quick.
    Simply put, I cook some pasta. When that is cooking, I saute some veggies ( like asparagus, zucchini, mushrooms, etc.)  in a little bit of oil in a large pan. Then add in the cooked pasta into the sauteed vegetables. Stir in some sun-dried tomatoes and a cup of crumbled goat cheese. 


    02

    Goat Cheese Stuffed Chicken


    If you are a lover of Barefoot Contessa, you probably watched her make this chicken with goat cheese and basil in her show before. This weeknight Goat Cheese Stuffed Chicken dish is a version of that recipe. Made by stuffing chicken breasts with goat cheese and sauteed spinach, it is a showstopper dinner great for entertaining.

    Person serving goat cheese stuffed chicken sliced on a plate.

    FAQs

    Can you freeze goat cheese?

    Yes, you can. If it is in its original packaging, you can just put it in the freezer. It should be fresh for up to 3 months. If it is already opened, it should be wrapped up in stretch film and placed in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) to prevent freezer burn.

    What to do with leftover goat cheese?

    You can add leftover goat cheese to omelets and salads or use it as a spread on your morning toast.

    How to soften goat cheese?

    The best way to soften goat cheese is by removing it from the fridge 30 minutes before you are ready to use it.

    Can you melt goat cheese?

    Goat cheese will not melt like mozzarella cheese. Instead, when heated, it will get a creamy spreadable texture.

    One of Our Favorite Baked Goat Cheese Recipes

    Baked Goat Cheese Dip Recipe Image
    Print

    Baked Goat Cheese Dip Recipe

    This Baked Goat Cheese Dip recipe is a super easy and quick to make appetizer that you can serve throughout the year for all your entertaining needs.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 18 minutes
    Total Time 28 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 224kcal

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces Vermont Creamery Goat Cheese
    • 4 ounces cream cheese
    • ¼ cup grated parmesan cheese
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more for coating at the end
    • 1 tablespoon minced chives

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat oven to 400 degrees. Place goat cheese, cream cheese, parmesan cheese, black pepper, and olive oil in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse a few times to break the goat cheese logs and then process until fully mixed, 30 seconds or so.
    • Transfer to an oven-proof bowl. Smooth out the top with the back of a spoon and brush it with a little bit of (no more than ½ teaspoon) olive oil.
    • Bake in the oven for 16-18 minutes or until it starts bubbling.
    • Serve immediately with crackers, veggies, and fruits.

    Video

    Notes

    • Can I use a different cheese than parmesan? Yes, as a matter of fact I recommend trying this with shredded cheddar (instead of Parmesan cheese) and turning it into a yummy hot cheddar goat cheese dip. If you decide to do so, you can use the same amount of cheddar.
    • Can I make it ahead? Yes, you can. Simple whip everything up in the food processor, place the mixture into the bowl you plan on baking, cover it with stretch film, and keep it in the fridge. Bake it right before you are ready to serve to make sure that it is nice and warm.
    • Can I freeze it? I wouldn’t recommend freezing this dip.
    • What can I do with leftovers? I doubt that you’ll have leftovers, but if you do you can use this dip to spread on a piece of toast and top it off with roasted vegetables, like I did in this Herbed Goat Cheese Bruschetta with Butternut Squash and Cranberry Jam recipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 224kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 42mg | Sodium: 264mg | Potassium: 36mg | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 680IU | Calcium: 118mg | Iron: 1mg

    This list is nowhere near finished. I plan on updating as I share more goat cheese recipes in the weeks, months, and years to come. So be sure to bookmark this page and come back for updates.

    This post was originally posted in November 2019. It was updated with new recipes in December 2022.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/goat-cheese-recipes/feed/ 10
    Deviled Eggs Without Mayo https://foolproofliving.com/avocado-deviled-eggs/ https://foolproofliving.com/avocado-deviled-eggs/#comments Tue, 07 Apr 2020 13:31:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=13788 I have always had a love and hate relationship with mayonnaise. It’s one of those condiments that I can only…]]>

    I have always had a love and hate relationship with mayonnaise. It’s one of those condiments that I can only consume in small doses. If you are like me, not a fan of mayo, I have some good news for you. I finally figured out the best substitute for mayo in deviled eggs and how to make deviled eggs without mayo (or sour cream).

    The answer is simple: Use creamy avocados in place of mayonnaise. Inspired by my homemade avocado salad dressing, the avocado filling is a great mayonnaise alternative that surprisingly tastes like mayonnaise. Not to mention, it makes a guilt-free and healthy deviled eggs recipe with a modern twist. It is also a tasty appetizer to serve everyone in your family or any of the mayo haters in your life.

    A plate filled with deviled eggs without mayo are photographed from the top view.

    As we are getting closer to the Easter weekend, I plan on serving them along with my Five Bean Salad, No Mayo Coleslaw, and Deviled Egg Potato Salad.

    These healthy avocado deviled eggs are perfect for potlucks, picnics, game day, and even as a protein-pack snack or an easy appetizer. If you are looking for an alternative to classic flavors and want to try something new, make this your new Easter eggs recipe.

    Recipe Ingredients

    The main ingredients for this avocado deviled eggs recipe are large eggs, avocado, olive oil, white wine vinegar, capers, dijon mustard, jalapeno, garlic, fresh cilantro, paprika, radishes, and chives.

    Ingredient Notes Substitutions:

    • Ripe Avocados: Be sure to pick out a ripe avocado. Softer, ready-to eat avocados make the most delicious creamy avocado filling
    • Vinegar: You can use apple cider vinegar in place of white wine vinegar. If you do not have vinegar, you can use an equal amount of the pickle juice of capers as well.
    • Not a fan of cilantro? Either omit it or use fresh parsley or chives instead
    • Mustard: I like the kick that I get from Dijon mustard but yellow mustard can also be used
    • Additional seasoning: I used the good old salt and black pepper here, but feel free to season it with your favorite spices. A sprinkle of paprika, cayenne pepper, ground cumin, or Everything but the bagel seasoning are a few good examples.

    How To Make Deviled Eggs Without Mayo?

    Start by cooking eggs:

    Before I talk more about how to make this easy recipe, I want to talk about how I cook my eggs. Because as you know, the backbone of deviled eggs is perfectly cooked hard boiled eggs. As someone, who had her fair share of overcooked eggs (with black spots around the edges of the egg yolks), I feel like I nailed it down.

    First, make sure that your eggs are at least a week old. If you use freshly picked eggs, it will be really hard to peel them later. Second, make sure that your pan is big enough to accommodate all of the eggs in a single. If your pan is too small the eggs will not cook evenly.

    Place the eggs in a pan and cover them with 2-inches of water. Bring them to a full boil (or some people call it, rolling boil).

    As soon as it does, take your eggs off the heat, put the lid on, and let them sit for 10-12 minutes. Meanwhile, prep an ice water bath by placing cold water in a bowl with a few ice cubes. Using a slotted spoon fish out the eggs and place them into the ice bath to stop the cooking process.

    Crack each hard boiled egg and peel it under running water: Simply, crack the egg, roll it on the counter and peel it under cold running water.

    How To Make The Egg Filling:

    The secret to the most delicious deviled eggs without mayonnaise is the creamy avocado filling. The ingredient list might look long, but I bet you already have everything in the pantry. Follow the basic steps below to make it:

    Two photos showing how to make deviled eggs without mayo
    1. Get the ingredients ready: Place the cooked yolks, a ripe avocado, seeded jalapenos, fresh cilantro, capers, dijon mustard, and a splash of vinegar in the bowl of a food processor.
    2. Process in the food processor: Give it a few pulses, stop the machine, and scrape the sides. Continue to do this until the avocado filling is nice and smooth.
    3. Prep for assembly: Once the mixture is ready, use a disposable piping bag (affiliate link) or a plastic bag with a star tip to fill the white halves.

    How To Pipe Deviled Eggs

    My favorite part of making deviled eggs for Easter is the assembly. To pipe deviled eggs to create your masterpiece follow the steps below (or watch the video in this post for a visual):

    1. Use a disposable piping bag with a star tip: Cut the bottom part of a disposable piping bag (or a freezer bag) with a pair of scissors. Place a star tip (affiliate link) at the bottom.
    2. Use a tall glass: Place it in a tall glass and fold the excess liner over the rim.
    3. Fill it with the avocado filling: Spoon the creamy mixture into the bag and push it gently towards the bottom.
    4. Start piping: Collect the edges of the piping bag, get the air out as much as you can. Hold the piping bag at a 45-degree angle in the middle of an egg white and fill using a gentle swirling motion. Continue with the rest of the egg whites.
    A plate filled with healthy deviled eggs avocado

    How To Make Ahead Store:

    If you were planning to make these healthy mayo-free deviled eggs with avocado ahead, I would recommend:

    1. Doing it only a day before
    2. Assembling them right before you are ready to serve them.

    Here is why; If you have ever made guacamole you know that avocado starts browning as it sits. The same thing happens in this avocado deviled egg recipe. If you fill the egg whites too early, the filling starts to brown.

    This doesn’t affect the taste, but the beautiful green color turns brown. You can slow down the browning by drizzling a few drops of freshly squeezed lemon juice (or lime juice), but it will still brown if it sits for a long time.

    If you decide to make them ahead, this is what I would do:

    1. Egg Whites: Place the cooked egg whites on a plate in a single layer, cover with stretch film, and keep them in the fridge.
    2. The avocado yolk mixture filling: Transfer it to a bowl, place a plastic wrap directly on the surface (to minimize the browning of the avocado) making sure that it is completely covered, and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container until you are ready to assemble.
    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    Similar Recipes You Might Also Like:

    All in all this healthy and deliciously creamy deviled eggs recipe makes the best gluten-free and dairy-free appetizer. Whether you serve it during Easter, as a part of your game day food, or your other spring/summer gatherings, it is guaranteed to impress. Below are a few more recipes that you might also like:

    If you try this Deviled Eggs No Mayo recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    deviled eggs no mayo on a plate garnished with radishes
    Print

    Deviled Eggs Without Mayo Recipe

    These Deviled Eggs Made Without Mayo are guaranteed to be the first to disappear in any of your gatherings. They are creamy, tangy and oh-so good. Plus, they are much healthier than the mayo filled deviled eggs. So why not change things up a bit and give this recipe a try?
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes
    Servings 12 egg halves
    Calories 80kcal

    Ingredients

    • 6 large eggs
    • 1 ripe avocado
    • 2 tablespoon extra virgin olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    • 1 teaspoon capers
    • ¼ teaspoon Dijon mustard or grainy or yellow mustard
    • 1 tablespoon jalapeno seeded and minced
    • 1 small clove of garlic peeled and minced
    • 1 tablespoon fresh cilantro
    • pinch paprika
    • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 radish thinly sliced as garnish
    • 1 tablespoon chives chopped as garnish

    Instructions

    • Place eggs in a single layer at the bottom of a saucepan. Cover them with 2-inches of water. Bring it to a full (or rolling) boil. Remove from the heat, cover the pan with a lid, and let it sit for 10-12 minutes. As you are waiting, place a large bowl with cold water and a few cubes of ice. Remove your eggs with a slotted spoon and place them into the cold water. This will stop the cooking. Let them cool for a minute and then start peeling.
    • Slice each egg in half, lengthwise and remove the yolks. Set egg whites on a plate and set it aside.
    • Place egg yolks in the bowl of a food processor. Add in the avocado, olive oil, vinegar, capers, mustard, jalapeno, cilantro, paprika, salt and pepper. Pulse 4-5 times in 1-second intervals. Scrape the bottom and sides of the bowl with a spatula and repeat until it is perfectly pureed. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    • Place the yolk mixture in a piping bag fitted with the star tip. Alternatively, you can use a clean Ziploc bag and cut a small opening in the corner. Pipe the mixture into the hole of each egg white.
    • Garnish each egg with a slice of radish and some chives. Serve.

    Video

    Notes

    • Make-Ahead Instructions: If you were planning to make these healthy mayo-free deviled eggs with avocado ahead, I would recommend doing it only a day before and assembling them right before you are ready to serve them. Here is why; If you have ever made guacamole you know that avocado starts browning as it sits. The same thing happens in this avocado deviled egg recipe. If you fill the egg whites too early, the filling starts to brown.
      This doesn’t affect the taste, but the beautiful green color turns brown. You can slow down the browning by drizzling a few drops of freshly squeezed lemon/lime juice, but it will still brown if it sits for a long time. If you decide to make them ahead, this is what I would do:
      1. Egg Whites: Place the cooked egg whites on a plate in a single layer, cover with stretch film, and keep them in the fridge.
      2. The avocado yolk mixture filling: Transfer it to a bowl, place a plastic wrap directly on the surface (to minimize the browning of the avocado) make sure that it is completely covered, and keep it in the fridge until you are ready to assemble.
    • As you will see in the recipe above, I only used 6 large eggs to make this no mayo deviled eggs recipe. I think it is important to mention that, even after you place all the ingredients in the food processor it barely fills the bottom of the food processor. If you are like me, using a 9-cup food processor, you might have to stop the machine a few times and scrape the bowl (and the sides) to get a really smooth mixture. And if you are making it for a crowd, you can always multiply the recipe.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 82mg | Sodium: 87mg | Potassium: 115mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/avocado-deviled-eggs/feed/ 11
    The Best Homemade Chunky Granola Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/chunky-homemade-granola/ https://foolproofliving.com/chunky-homemade-granola/#comments Tue, 11 Feb 2020 22:42:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=483 While I know that it is convenient to purchase granola from the store, I hope that with my easy-to-follow steps,…]]>

    While I know that it is convenient to purchase granola from the store, I hope that with my easy-to-follow steps, helpful tips (especially for the most addictive granola clusters) and foolproof recipe that uses wholesome everyday ingredients you will give this chunky granola recipe a try.

    A jar filled with homemade chunky granola recipe photographed from the top view.

    And hopefully, put this easy granola recipe on the weekly rotation. If you are in, let’s break it down together.

    What’s in granola – Recipe ingredients

    This vegan granola recipe has three sets of ingredients. Wet ingredients, dry ingredients, and optional add-ins (i.e., dried fruit and superfoods.)

    Wet Ingredients:

    • SweetenersMaple Syrup and Coconut Sugar: When I first started making this baked granola recipe, I used to use a combination of maple syrup and brown sugar. However, after deciding to stop using refined sugars in my cooking (back in 2016), I now make it with coconut sugar instead of brown sugar. I think the difference in taste is not recognizable. And I believe, as long as it is consumed in moderation, it is a healthier sweetener as it doesn’t spike up your blood’s glucose and insulin level like brown sugar does due to its low glycemic index value. (Source)
      In place of maple syrup, you can use the same amount of agave nectar and honey as well. 
    • Vanilla Extract: As in most sweet baked goods, the vanilla extract helps with enhancing the flavors of all the other ingredients used in the recipe.
    • Salt: Similar to vanilla extract, salt is an essential ingredient used in baking as it brings out the sweetness of the baked goods. Over the years, I used mostly Kosher and table salt to make this recipe. I think they all work well. 
    • Vegetable Oil: Any oil that you have on hand. When I feel like making this a coconut granola recipe, I use coconut oil to continue with the flavors coming from coconut sugar and unsweetened coconut flakes (that we add in the end.)
      However, in the past, I also made this recipe using other vegetable oils like avocado and grapeseed oil and thought that they all worked well.
    Healthy Granola Recipe with Clusters photographed in a glass jar from the front view

    Dry ingredients:

    • Old Fashioned Rolled Oats: This recipe only works with old fashioned rolled oats. I wanted to mention this because if you mistakenly pick up the quick-cooking oats this recipe will not work. If you are not sure which one to use, here is everything you need to know about the difference between rolled oats and quick oats.
      I usually get my rolled oats from Trader Joe’s as they sell gluten-free certified rolled oats (affiliate link). Using their rolled oats comes handy when I want to make sure that this is a gluten-free granola recipe for my friends who suffer from celiac disease.
      However, you can also use rolled oats brands like Quaker Oats (affiliate link), or even Bob’s Red Mills’ extra-thick rolled oats (affiliate link).
    • A combination of your favorite nuts: This recipe uses 2 cups of chopped, unsweetened and unsalted nuts. The best part about it is that you can use any of your favorite nuts. I went for walnuts and almonds as I like the flavor combo, but feel free to use whatever you want or have on hand.
      Be sure to give them a good chop.

    Optional Add ins

    The following ingredients are optional to add-in to this chunky granola recipe after it is baked. The fact that you can easily change it up is what I like most about this basic granola recipe in that you can change it up with add-ins in any way you want.

    Here are a few options:

    • Dried Fruit: The recipe below suggests adding 1 ½ cups of dried fruit into the granola after it is baked and cooled. Similar to nuts, you can use any dried fruit you like. I love raisins, dried cranberries (I love the orange juice sweetened version), dates, dried figs, and goji berries. 
      With this being said, if you are after a low sugar granola recipe, you can skip adding dried fruit. I think that this recipe is sweet enough without the addition of dried fruits. Alternatively, if you want more sweetness, you can pair it with fresh fruit when you are serving it.
    • Ground Spices: When I make this during the fall and later in the holiday season, I spice it up by adding ground spices like cinnamon, cardamom, allspice, ginger, and nutmeg.
    • Superfoods: I love adding superfoods like unsweetened coconut flakes, ground flaxseeds, chia seeds, and hemp seeds into my granola. I think it is such an easy way to make it a healthier and more nutritious snack option.
    • Chocolate Chips: Now, I know chocolate chips are not considered as a healthy ingredient, but we all need to treat ourselves every once in a while. If you feel like chocolate cravings are creeping up on you, feel free to add in a cup of your favorite chocolate chips in your granola. 

    How to make your own granola?

    There are just a few steps to putting it all together, and it happens in less than 10 minutes. Follow the steps below to make your own chunky granola recipe at home:

    A woman is whisking ingredients for granola
    • Mix the wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together maple syrup, coconut sugar (or brown sugar), vanilla extract, vegetable oil, and salt.
    • Mix the dry ingredients: Either in that same large bowl or another one, mix together the rolled oats and nuts. 
    • Mix the wet and dried ingredients together: Using a spatula, mix them together until all the oats and nuts are covered with the wet ingredients.
    A woman is using a ramekin to distribute Crunchy Homemade Granola evenly throughout the pan
    • Transfer it to a baking sheet: Lay a baking sheet with parchment paper or reusable silicone liner such as Silpat (affiliate link). Transfer the granola into the baking sheet and spread it with the help of a spatula. 
      Using a ramekin with a flat bottom press the granola gently and distribute evenly throughout the pan make it compact (More on why we do this is below).

    3 Tips on how to make granola clusters:

    If you are after those addictive homemade granola clusters (some people also call them clumpy granola) the tips below will help you get them in no time:

    1. Use a flat bottom ramekin: Once you spread the granola on the baking sheet, gently press on the granola with the bottom of a ramekin to make it compact. This might seem like an extra step, but doing so helps with getting those lovely clumpy granola pieces with every bite.
    2. Let it cool on the counter: I know it is no fun to wait, but resist the urge to dig in. Let it cool for at least 30 minutes (until it comes to the room temperature) before breaking the chunks.
    3. Be gentle as you break it into chunks: When ready to break it apart, use a large spatula to break it into chunks. I also recommend being gentle as you transfer it into a jar or another airtight container.
    4. Incorporate the additional goodies after it is cooled: Once your granola is baked and cooled, break it into clusters and transfer to another bowl. Add in whatever else you want to add (dried fruit, superfoods, etc.) and give it a gentle toss.
    The Best Low Sugar Chunky Granola Recipe is placed in a bowl and photographed from the front view as it is being drizzled with milk

    How to serve

    While I mostly snack on this chunky granola just by itself, I also serve it as a part of my breakfast or when I need a pick-me-up in the afternoon. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve to inspire you to make this easy and healthy granola recipe at home.

    If you want to watch me prepare these, be sure to watch the video in the recipe card below.

    1. Serve it as a cereal: This is my favorite way to serve. Simply, fill a bowl with a few scoops of this homemade granola cereal and drizzle it with your favorite milk. I usually top it off with a spoon of almond (or peanut) butter and a handful of fresh fruit, especially if I am serving it for breakfast.
    2. Serve it with yogurt and make Greek Yogurt Parfaits: Layer yogurt, fresh fruit, and granola in mason jars for a grab and go snack, just like they do it in Starbucks.  Or you can also use it as a topping for Greek Yogurt Overnight Oats and Chia Yogurt Pudding.
    3. Top your oatmeal off with granola: Whether you make overnight steel cut oats, slow cooker steel cut oatmeal, or almond milk oatmeal, this basic granola recipe is the perfect topping for your oatmeal in the morning.
    Easy and Healthy Granola Recipe (Vegan and Gluten Free) placed on a bed of granola and fruit as a topping and photographed from the top view.

    FAQs

    What temperature to cook granola?

    Over the years of baking this granola, I found that a lower temperature oven does a better job, so I bake my granola in a pre-heated 325 degree oven for 20-25 minutes.

    How long to bake granola?

    It takes about 20-25 minutes for this granola to bake. The visual cue is when it turns golden brown.

    How long does homemade granola last?

    This basic granola usually lasts about 5-7 days on the kitchen counter as long as it is stored in an airtight container. I usually store it in this glass jar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite containers would work. Keeping it in an airtight jar is the key to keeping your granola crunchy. If you want to include it in your kids’ lunch bag, these Stasher bags (affiliate link) are perfect for it.

    Other creative granola recipes you might like:

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    If you make this granola recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

    Recipe adapted from America’s Test Kitchen.

    Chunky Granola Recipe Image - A bowl of chunky granola topped off with fruit served in a bowl
    Print

    Chunky Granola Recipe

    Recipe for a deliciously homemade chunky granola that you can make in less than an hour. Simply put everything in a bowl, give it a mix, bake in the oven and enjoy throughout the week. Once you try this recipe, you will never want to go back to store bought granola. Guaranteed.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes
    Total Time 1 hour
    Servings 8 cups
    Calories 470kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1/3 cup maple syrup
    • 1/3 cup packed coconut sugar or brown sugar
    • 4 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1/2 teaspoon table salt
    • 1/2 cup vegetable oil grapeseed, coconut, and avocado oil would all work
    • 5 cups old-fashioned rolled oats
    • 1 cup walnuts chopped
    • 1 cup raw almonds chopped
    • 1/2 cup raisins chopped
    • 1/2 cup cranberries chopped
    • 1/2 cup goji berries chopped
    • 1/2 cup dates chopped
    • 1/2 cup unsweetened coconut flakes

    Instructions

    • Adjust the oven rack to upper middle position. Heat oven to 325 °F.
    • Line your sheet pan with parchment paper. (it helps tremendously when it is time to clean.)
    • Whisk maple syrup, brown sugar, vanilla, salt and oil in a BIG bowl.
    • Add the oats, almonds and walnuts in to the liquid mixture and fold until thoroughly mixed.
    • Transfer the oat mixture onto baking sheet and spread it to make an even layer.
    • Using the back of a ramekin* or a spatula, compress oat mixture until it is very compact.
    • Bake for 20-25 minutes rotating pan once halfway through baking.
    • Once baked, remove it from the oven and let it cool for 15-30 minutes.
    • Break cooled granola into pieces of your desired size.
    • Mix in the chopped dried fruit and shredded coconut.

    Video

    Notes

    • This granola recipe yields about 8-9 cups of granola.
    • Use a flat bottom ramekin: Once you spread the granola on the baking sheet, gently press on the granola with the bottom of a ramekin to make it compact. This might seem like an extra step, but doing so helps with getting those lovely clumpy granola pieces with every bite.
    • Let it cool on the counter: I know it is no fun to wait, but resist the urge to dig in. Let it cool for at least 30 minutes (until it comes to the room temperature) before breaking the chunks.
    • Be gentle as you break it into chunks: When ready to break it apart, use a large spatula to break it into chunks. I also recommend being gentle as you transfer it into a jar or another airtight container.
    • Incorporate the additional goodies after it is cooled: Once your granola is baked and cooled, break it into clusters and transfer to another bowl. Add in whatever else you want to add (dried fruit, superfoods, etc.) and give it a gentle toss.
    • Storing: This basic granola usually lasts about 5-7 days on the kitchen counter as long as it is stored in an airtight container. I usually store it in this glass jar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite containers would work. Keeping it in an airtight jar is the key to keeping your granola crunchy.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 470kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Sodium: 174mg | Potassium: 367mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/chunky-homemade-granola/feed/ 72
    Homemade “Kind” Breakfast Bars https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-kind-breakfast-bars/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-kind-breakfast-bars/#comments Tue, 09 Apr 2019 10:39:07 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1881 We all love breakfast bars because they give us a quick boost of energy and they are delicious with nuts…]]>

    We all love breakfast bars because they give us a quick boost of energy and they are delicious with nuts and dried fruits. However, the store-bought ones that are sold as “organic” and “healthy” are still full of preservatives used to increase their shelf life.

    homemade kind breakfast bar recipe photographed from the top view after it is sliced.

    Making my homemade version of healthy nut bars at home is easy. You can make them in less than 20 minutes. And as long as they are individually wrapped in wax (or parchment) paper in an airtight container, they keep fresh for 5 to 6 days.

    The best part of it is that you can use whatever nuts and dried fruit you have at home.

    Homemade Kind Bars stacked on top of each other and photographed from the front view

    What is a kind bar?

    Kind Bars are a brand of breakfast bars that are mostly sold in supermarkets and coffee shops. Made up of nuts, dried fruits, sugar, and other various granola ingredients, they are considered as one of the most popular snacks in the US.

    As their popularity increased, they extended their arsenal and added different types of KIND bars, ranging from crunchy breakfast bars to nut butter protein bars.

    My version here, the following homemade KIND bar copycat recipe, follows a similar set of ingredients and combines cereal, nuts and dried fruit for a chewy granola bar.

    Are Kind bars vegan friendly?

    Yes, they are. KIND granola bars contain wholesome, familiar ingredients like nuts, dark chocolate and spices.

    healthy nut bars placed on a plate

    The formula – How to make Homemade Kind Bars

    This quick and easy recipe for homemade KIND bars gives you a formula as simple as mixing together your nuts, fruit and other dry ingredients, heating up the brown rice syrup adhesive that will bind the bars together, and finally letting them cool.

    Below is my step by step guide to making them at home with substitutions to some of the ingredients used in the recipe so that you can easily create your own version.

    Step 1: Line an 8×8 baking pan with aluminum foil (you can use parchment paper as well), leaving a couple inches overhanging the sides. You can see a visual of this in the how to video below.

    Step 2: Mix the dry ingredients below in a large bowl. Below, you will find the ingredients I used along with a few suggestions and tips to help you create your own version.

    • 1 ½ cups puff cereal – You can use brown rice cereal (Nature’s Path is my favorite brand (affiliate link)), kamut puffs, or rice puffs would also work.
    • 1 ½ cups nuts (preferably unsalted) I used a combination of walnuts, almonds, and pistachios, but any unsalted nuts you have would work. Cashews, hazelnuts, pecans, etc. would all deliver delicious nut bars.
    • 1 cup dried fruit (no sugar added) I opted for dried apricots, mulberries, and figs, but any combination of dried fruit would work here. Feel free to play with seasonal dried fruits like dried apples and cranberries in the fall and dried cherries and berries in the summer.
    • ½ cup shredded coconut flakes (unsweetened)This is an optional, but I think it gives a great chewy texture to the granola bar.
    • 1 tablespoons chia seeds – It is no secret that chia seeds are full of antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins. While I recommend adding them to your granola mixture, if you do not have any at home, you can omit from the recipe.
    Healthy nut bars covered in chocolate photographed close up from the front view

    Step 3: Prep the liquid mixture – Whisk all the ingredients in a small saucepan. Stirring constantly, heat it over medium heat for 2 minutes. It should be a very smooth mixture.

    • ½ cup brown rice syrup: Brown rice syrup is a natural sweetener that has a similar consistency to corn syrup. It is less sweet than sugar and can be used as a substitute when baking or cooking. Most commercial granola bars use brown rice syrup instead of sugar. You can find it at a health food store or online (Lundberg is my favorite brand) – affiliate link
    • ¼ cup unsalted nut butter: In the kind bar recipe below I used almond butter, but you can also use peanut butter. To keep it healthy, I always use butters with no sugar, salt, or preservatives.
    • 2 tablespoons natural sugar (optional): I try not to add in extra sugar, but if your dried fruit is not enough, you can use additional sugar. If you decide to add sugar, I would recommend natural sugars liked date, maple or coconut sugars.
    • 1/4 teaspoon salt: Salt really enhances the sweet and earthy flavors of the nuts and fruit so do not skip it. I am a big fan of sea salt and that is what I used in this recipe.

    Step 4: Pour the hot mixture over the nuts and fruits mixture. Stir it until all nuts and fruits are coated with the liquid mixture.

    Step 5: Transfer everything to the lined baking pan. Spread the nut mixture out evenly, flattening it with the bottom of a ramekin or back of a spatula. It will be sticky, but you do want to make it as compact as possible so that it will be nice and thick.

    Step 6: Place it in the fridge for 2 hours or preferably overnight. Once cooled, use the overhanging foil to lift the block of granola out of the pan. Place it on a cutting board and cut it into bars.

    What is the best way to store these Kind energy bars? Can I freeze them?

    Once they are fully cooled, I usually slice them into 6 or 9 equal pieces and then wrap them individually with parchment paper (wax paper would also work). Then I place them in an airtight container (Ziploc or a container with a tight lid) to make sure that they have a longer shelf life.

    Yes, you can keep them in the freezer. Since these copycat KIND bars are mostly made from nuts, they don’t freeze rock hard. As long as they are wrapped individually (like I did in the video) and kept in an airtight container, they would be good for up to 2 months in the freezer.

    And the best part is that there’s no need to thaw them (or wait for them to come to room temperature) before eating, just grab and go. I hope you agree that making them at home is much more convenient and budget-friendly than spending $4 on a KIND energy bar at the coffee shop.

    Homemade Kind Bars served with milk

    Can I substitute brown rice syrup with honey?

    While honey can be a great substitute for other sweeteners, honey in this recipe will be much too sweet and will not bind the ingredients as strongly as brown rice syrup. The same goes for maple syrup and agave.

    A Few helpful tips for the best healthy homemade kind bars

    • Can I make this without using any sugar? Absolutely. I personally find that the sugar amount that the dried fruits provide is more than enough. If you feel the same way, want to make homemade KIND bars with low sugar content, simply omit the 2 tablespoons of natural sugar used in the recipe.
    • Want your KIND Bars to be thinner? Simply, use a larger pan to make a greater quantity of less thick bars.
    • Can I drizzle them with chocolate? You sure can. To do so, melt your favorite chocolate in the microwave for 45 seconds or until it is fully melted and then drizzle your kind bars with it.
    • How Many Calories in a KIND Bar? These bars are 359 calories and only have 9 grams of sugar. They contain healthy fats from nuts and 6 grams of protein. See the printable homemade bar recipe at the bottom of the page for the full KIND breakfast bar nutrition information.
    homemade kind bars half drizzled with chocolate photographed from the top view.

    The combinations for this DIY KIND bar recipe are endless. Use whatever nuts and fruit you have in the house to experiment with your favorite flavors and make the best KIND bars.

    Other Healthy Breakfast Options You Might Like


    Homemade “Kind” Breakfast Bars
    Print

    Homemade Kind Breakfast Bar Recipe

    Have you ever wanted to make your own version of “Kind” bar in your very own kitchen?
    This post gives you the formula to create VEGAN Homemade “Kind” Breakfast Bars. Be as creative as you want and/or make it with whatever you have on hand.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes
    Servings 8 bars
    Calories 353kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Dry Ingredients:

    • 1 1/2 cups rice puff cereal
    • 1/2 cup unsalted almonds
    • 1/2 cup unsalted walnuts
    • 1/2 cup unsalted pistachios
    • 1/3 cup dried figs chopped
    • 1/3 cup dried mulberries chopped
    • 1/3 cup dried apricot chopped
    • 2 tablespoons chia seeds
    • 1/2 cup unsweetened coconut flakes

    For The Wet Ingredients:

    • 1/2 cup brown rice syrup
    • 1/4 cup unsalted almond butter
    • 2 tablespoons coconut sugar – Optional
    • 1/4 teaspoon sea salt

    Instructions

    • Line an 8X8-baking pan with parchment paper leaving a couple inches overhanging on the sides.
    • Mix puff cereal, almonds, walnuts, pistachios, figs, mulberries, apricots, chia seeds, and coconut flakes in a large bowl. Set aside.
    • Whisk brown rice syrup, almond butter, and sugar (if using) in a small saucepan. Stirring constantly, heat it over medium heat until they are all fully combined and melted, a minute or two. It should be a very smooth mixture.
    • Pour the hot mixture over the nuts and fruits mixture. Stir until all nuts and fruits are coated with the liquid mixture.
    • Transfer them into the lined pan. Spread them evenly. Using the back of a ramekin (or back of a spatula or spoon) press to make it compact.
    • Place it in the fridge for 2 hours, or preferably, overnight.
    • Using the overhanging parchment paper, take the block of granola out of the pan and place it on a cutting board. Cut it into smaller pieces.
    • Individually wrap them in wax or parchment paper and keep them in an airtight container.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 101mg | Potassium: 389mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 23g | Vitamin A: 215IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 116mg | Iron: 2mg

    This post was originally published in December of 2013, but updated with new photos, a how-to video, and more helpful information to help you as you make your own healthy homemade breakfast bars.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-kind-breakfast-bars/feed/ 37
    Spicy Candied Nuts https://foolproofliving.com/spicy-candied-nuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/spicy-candied-nuts/#comments Mon, 19 Dec 2016 14:21:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11764 We decided to stay home for Christmas this year. Since we already spent Thanksgiving with family, we are going to…]]>

    We decided to stay home for Christmas this year. Since we already spent Thanksgiving with family, we are going to have a quiet day at home. I am happy about this, because I really do not feel like travelling. Like I usually do, I will make a big pot of roast and serve it along with a few appetizers and a bottle of wine. However, this year for New Years Eve, we are planning to have a small party at our house. Nothing too big, just a couple of friends… Of course, I am in charge of food. Since a few of our friends are vegetarian, I am planning on a meat-free spread. The plan is to play games, eat and drink good food, and watch the fireworks in downtown Atlanta.


    This post has been sponsored by Kroger. All thoughts and opinions are my own.

    Platter of Spicy Candied Nuts

    So the menu… When it comes to entertaining friends at home, I have a few go-to recipes. Since it is not going to be a formal sit-down dinner, I always start with a couple of appetizers that people can serve themselves. And what is better than a cheese plate with lots of fresh fruits, a few different kinds of cheese, and some dips served with crackers. I usually include a few different kinds of nuts as well, but this year I am taking it a step further and including these spicy candied nuts in my cheese plate. They are delicious, addictive, and perfect for entertaining.

    Close up view of a small bowl of Nuts

    About the Nuts:

    One thing I love about this recipe is that you can use any nuts you like. Just mix them up as you please. Here, the important thing is to make sure to purchase the freshest nuts you can get your hands on. Here in Atlanta, I go to our local Kroger, because they have a new line of products called Simple Truth. Their products are mostly organic, natural, and free from artificial flavors. Plus, in addition to a wide variety of nuts, you can pick from different kinds of tasty snacks like toasted corn, chips, and trail mix. Perfect for all my entertaining needs.

    Person playing nuts on a sheet pan
    Nuts in a bowl and pre - packaged nuts

    About This Spicy Candied Nuts Recipe:

    The process of making these spicy candied nuts could not be easier. You make a simple syrup flavored with a bunch of spices and roast the nuts with the mixture. Once it is cooled, it is ready to serve. I used a few sprigs of fresh rosemary, because we love rosemary. If you are not a fan, just omit it.

    In terms of the simple syrup, I initially planned on using coconut sugar. As you may have read in my coconut sugar cookies recipe post, coconut sugar is my new favorite ingredient to use in my baking. However, for this recipe it did not provide the results that I was hoping for. The simple syrup that I made with coconut sugar did not pair well with the spices and ended up having a bitter and unpleasant taste. Certainly not something I was aiming for. So I made another one, but this time I used sucanat (aka natural cane sugar) and it was perfect.

    In terms of nuts, I used hazelnuts, cashews, pecans, and almonds. Though like I mentioned earlier, any nuts would work. The nuts I used were all raw and unsalted, but if you prefer you can use already roasted and salted nuts. Though if you do, I recommend adjusting the amount of salt you use in your sucanat simple syrup. In the recipe below, you will see a long list of spices. If you are missing one or do not care for it, simply omit it.

    Spicy Candied Nuts arranged on a sheet pan

    How to Serve:

    As you can see in the photos, I served them with a few kinds of cheese, dried and fresh fruit, some unshelled nuts (just because they are fun), crackers, my homemade Mediterranean hummus, and some snacks like roasted corn and soy nuts on a wood cutting board. I usually fill the cutting board with as much as I can and use small bowls and plates to serve around the board. This way everyone can treat him/herself as they please. Plus, I think it makes it easier when it comes to replenishing it throughout the night.

    Sweetener being drizzled over Spicy Candied Nuts on a sheet pan
    Close up view of Spicy Candied Nuts and grapes

    Everything you see in these photos was from our local Kroger. I love that I can find everything I am looking for in one quick visit and am able to find healthy and fresh ingredients every time I need to entertain. I highly recommend giving a try to the Simple Truth product line for all your holiday entertaining needs this season.

    Overhead view of Spicy Candied Nuts on a sheet pan



    Finally, the folks over at Kroger are allowing me to give one of my readers a $50 gift card. To get a chance to win, leave a comment below telling me about your plans for this New Year Eve before January 1st, 2017 – 12PM EST. I will announce the winner via e-mail and here in the blog post. This giveaway is open to U.S. residents only.
    Good luck friends!

    ***** THE GIVEAWAY IS CLOSED. Linda is the winner. *****

    Spicy Candied Nuts: These spicy candied nuts are the easiest snack/party favor/edible gift you can make all throughout the year.
    Print

    Spicy Candied Nuts

    Whether you use it for entertaining, edible gifts, or just to snack on for yourself, these Spicy Candied Nuts are totally delicious and addictive. They are naturally sweetened with natural cane sugar and flavored with cinnamon, cumin, red pepper flakes, and ginger. Ready in less than half an hour and guaranteed to impress.
    Course Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Servings 6 cups
    Calories 1018kcal

    Ingredients

    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
    • ½ teaspoon ground ginger
    • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper optional
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt divided
    • 1 cup Sucanat I used Wholesome brand
    • 1/3 cup water
    • 5 cups mixed unsalted and unroasted nuts cashews, almonds, pecans, hazelnuts, etc.*
    • 1 sprig of fresh rosemary leaves torn

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 F degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Mix together all the spices and ½ teaspoon salt in a bowl. Set aside.
    • Place sucanat, water, and rest of the salt in a saucepan. Stirring occasionally, bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Turn down the heat to medium-low and cook until it is slightly thickened, 4-6 minutes. Off the heat, stir in the spices.
    • Spread the nuts in the prepared baking sheet and roast for 5 minutes. Take it out of the oven and drizzle it with the mixture. Give it a big stir to make sure that the nuts are fully coated with the sugar syrup.
    • Bake for 20 more minutes, stirring and flipping the nuts three times during the process. You will see that as they bake the syrup will thicken and stick to the nuts.
    • Take the nuts out of the oven, stir in the rosemary leaves, and let them cool on the counter.
    • When ready to serve, break up the nuts if there are clustered, and serve.

    Notes

    -If you want you can make this recipe a day in advance, and once it is completely cooled, break the nuts apart and store them in an airtight container in room temperature. When ready to serve, you can re-heat them in a low temperature oven (250 F°) for a short amount of time (less 10 minutes).
    – If you have any leftovers, you can freeze them in an airtight container up to a month.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 1018kcal | Carbohydrates: 77g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 74g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 485mg | Potassium: 871mg | Fiber: 13g | Sugar: 40g | Vitamin A: 105IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 106mg | Iron: 6mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/spicy-candied-nuts/feed/ 70
    Cheesy Apple Bites https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-apple-bites-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-apple-bites-2/#comments Mon, 21 Nov 2016 14:38:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11446 This post is sponsored by Domex Superfresh Growers, but all opinions are mine. Can you believe that we are only…]]>

    This post is sponsored by Domex Superfresh Growers, but all opinions are mine.

    Can you believe that we are only 3 days away from Thanksgiving? This afternoon, we will be heading to the farmer’s market to pick up a few more groceries and then I will start prepping for the big day. But before then, I have a super simple, easy and quick to make appetizer recipe to share with you.

    Cheesy Apple Bites with Walnuts, Celery, and Pomegranate Seeds: T

    When I say ‘quick’ I mean it, because it literally takes 5 minutes to put these cheesy apple bites together. In the midst of all the cooking and prepping, I can’t imagine a simpler appetizer to serve family and friends alongside a glass of champagne.

    I know I will be serving them.

    Apples and a cheese board

    The thing about simple recipes is that in order for them to work you have to have incredible ingredients that are able to shine on their own. For this recipe, instead of using crackers to spread the cheese, I used thinly sliced apples. But they are not just any apples.

    They are the Autumn Glory Apples, a.k.a. the most delicious and juiciest apples I have ever had. They literally taste like candy with caramel and cinnamon undertones with every bite. And imagine what happens when they are spread with a little bit of cheese and topped off with a few fresh ingredients.

    Apples and cheese
    Apple, cheese and cracker board

    About this Apple Appetizers Recipe:

    As I mentioned earlier, putting these together cannot be easier.

    To start, lay the apple on its side and cut it thinly (1/4-inch) width-wise. If you prefer, you can use a pairing knife to remove the seeds. I only removed the seeds for the middle slices as the rest had very minimal seeds.

    Next, spread it with cheese. Now, if I was serving these just for us I would only spread it with blue cheese because we are a huge fan. However, I know a lot of people, who are not crazy about stinky cheeses. And since I am serving them for a crowd, I also spread them with whipped cream cheese, which is loved by most people I know.

    You can certainly, buy cream cheese, bring it to room temperature, and whip it yourself in a standing mixer. However, luckily nowadays most supermarkets carry already whipped cream cheese helping you save time on the prep.

    Cheese and Apple Cracker board

    In terms of condiments, I used chopped celery, walnuts, chives and a few pomegranate seeds to make them look festive. The apples are already super sweet, but if you want you can lightly drizzle them with a little bit of honey, especially for the ones spread with blue cheese.

    Autumn Glory Apples as “Crackers” On Your Cheese Plate:

    This year, in addition to these cheesy apple bites, I will also be putting together a cheese board. When it comes to cheese plates, my rule of thumb is to have only a few types of cheeses. I almost always have a creamy cheese (like Epoisse, goat cheese, herbed cream cheese), a stinky cheese (like blue cheese, gorgonzola, or Stilton), and a hard cheese (like cheddar, Manchego, Gouda).

    Apple appetizers with cheese, nuts, pomegranate seeds, and celery photographed from the top view

    Alongside with the cheese, I love serving a combination of fresh and dried fruits and some roasted nuts. This year, I am completely ditching the crackers and going for the flavorful and sweet Autumn Glory Apples. You can either slice them like I did or cut big bite-size chunks of them for easy snacking. Either way, they are the perfect pairing for any of your cheese plates and I cannot imagine a better combination.

    To get more information on Autumn Glory Apples, check out their website and follow them on Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, and Youtube.

    Other apple recipes you might also like:

    Cheesy Apple Bites with Walnuts, Celery, and Pomegranate Seeds: The easiest appetizer made with apple "crackers" topped off with cream cheese, walnuts, celery, and drizzled with honey.
    Print

    Cheesy Apple Bites

    These Cheesy Apple Bites are the easiest and the quickest appetizer you can serve to your guests during the holidays. They are made with Autumn Glory Apples that taste like candy with cinnamon and caramel undertones.Simply spread thinly sliced apples with cheese and sprinkle them with a few fresh condiments. And VOILA! Your gorgeously festive and delicious appetizer is ready to serve.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 126kcal

    Ingredients

    • 3 Apples
    • 6 ounces blue cheese or whipped cream cheese or BOTH
    • ¼ cup celery thinly sliced
    • 3 tablespoons chives chopped
    • 3 tablespoons of walnuts lightly toasted and chopped
    • handful of pomegranate seeds
    • 3-4 tablespoons honey optional, for drizzling
    • a few fresh thyme leaves optional, as garnish

    Instructions

    • Lay an apple on its side and slice it in ¼-inch thick slices. Slice the rest of the apples.
    • Place each apple slice on a large plate and spread it with cheese.
    • Sprinkle each slice with celery, chives, walnuts and pomegranate seeds. If preferred, drizzle them with honey and garnish with fresh thyme leaves.
    • Serve immediately.

    Notes

    * Alternatively, you can slice the apples in chunks and serve them on a cheese board.
    * I used only three apples, but if you are serving for more people feel free the double or even triple the recipe.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 10g | Calories: 126kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 58mg | Potassium: 102mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 308IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

    Editor’s Note: This post is sponsored by Domex Superfresh Growers. The compensation received in exchange for placement on Foolproof Living is used to purchase ingredients and props, write blog posts, take and edit photos and maintain this website in general.

    However, though compensation was received in exchange for coverage, the thoughts and opinions mentioned in this post are my own. Thank you for supporting brands that support Foolproof Living!

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-apple-bites-2/feed/ 13
    Baked Brie with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecans https://foolproofliving.com/blackberry-compote-spicy-pecan-baked-brie-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/blackberry-compote-spicy-pecan-baked-brie-recipe/#comments Tue, 08 Nov 2016 18:15:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11343 Today’s recipe comes from my friend Jennifer’s new cookbook, The Gourmet Kitchen. Jennifer is the author and photographer behind the…]]>

    Today’s recipe comes from my friend Jennifer’s new cookbook, The Gourmet Kitchen. Jennifer is the author and photographer behind the popular food blog, Savory Simple. I ran into Savory Simple over 3 years ago while I was looking for inspiration for a recipe.

    I still remember scrolling through her recipes and beautiful photographs and thinking to myself that she has a great deal of knowledge of cooking. Her recipes were written in a way that was easy to understand with tips that would guide the home cook along the process. Later, when I found out that she was a culinary graduate it all made sense: She knew what she was talking about.

    Baked Brie with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecan on a plate

    About this Spicy Candied Pecan Baked Brie Recipe:

    For years, baked Brie was my go-to recipe for entertaining. I have baked so many wheels of Brie that I lost count. It was the simplest dish I could think of, and quite honestly, I didn’t think of it as a recipe worth sharing. However, after reading Jennifer’s version and realizing that I was doing it wrong all along, I decided that it was about time to post a baked Brie recipe that will knock you sucks off.

    How do you bake your Brie?

    Until I read The Gourmet Kitchen’s version, I would cover my Brie with some sort of a jam and some nuts and bake it in the oven for 10-15 minutes and serve it that away. However, Jennifer does it differently, and I have to say, I think it is a much better way. Instead of baking Brie covered with condiments, she bakes it separately, just by itself. She also slices off the top rind. I loved this technique, because when you cut the top rind off and leave the sides intact, you basically create a “cup” that the cheese bakes in making all the gooey goodness stay in the “cup” and easier to serve.

    Baked Brie with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecan

    The Toppings:

    Now, you can certainly serve baked Brie with your favorite marmalade and nuts. However, in this pecan baked brie recipe we are taking things up a notch.

    First, make the spiced candied pecans by roasting pecans after coating them in a butter-maple syrup-cinnamon-cayenne mixture.

    Second, make a simple blackberry compote by reducing fresh blackberries with a little bit of lemon juice, honey and vanilla extract. Once you top your baked Brie with these condiments, you and your guest are in for a serious treat.

    Baked Brie with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecan

    With the holidays approaching, I just can’t imagine a better dish to entertain. Why not switch things up a little bit and give this luxurious baked Brie recipe a try? I know for a fact that it will not disappoint.

    Be sure to watch the how To Make Baked Brie Video below.

    Baked Brie with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecan
    Print

    Baked Brie Recipe with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecans

    Take your baked Brie game up to the next level with this Spicy Candied Pecan Baked Brie recipe flavored with homemade blackberry compote. This appetizer is not only easy-to-make, but also ridiculously flavorful. Perfect for all your upcoming holiday parties.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 248kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Spicy Pecans:

    • 1 cup pecan halves
    • ½ tablespoon unsalted butter melted and cooled
    • 1 ½ tablespoons natural cane sugar or light brown sugar
    • 2 teaspoons maple syrup
    • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper

    For The Blackberry Compote:

    • 2 cups blackberries plus more for garnish
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 1 tablespoon honey
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    For The Baked Brie:

    • 2 wheels Brie (8-ounces each) room temperature
    • handful of pomegranate seeds as garnish optional
    • a few fresh thyme leaves as garnish optional
    • crackers for serving

    Instructions

    To make the spicy candied pecans:

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350 F degrees.
    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Place pecans on the sheet and toast for 10 minutes or until fragrant.
    • While they are roasting, mix together the butter, cane sugar, maple syrup, cinnamon, salt, and cayenne pepper in a bowl.
    • Place the hot pecans into the mixture (be careful as it may sputter and hiss) and make sure that they are evenly coated. Spread them on the baking sheet on a single layer and place it back in the oven. Bake for another 10 minutes, stirring every 3-4 minutes. Remove from the oven and let it cool.

    To make the blackberry compote:

    • In a medium saucepan, heat the blackberries, lemon juice, honey, and vanilla in medium heat, stirring regularly. As liquid begins to release from the berries, turn the heat up to medium. Cook, stirring periodically, until it is reduced and the liquid is syrupy.
    • Pre-heat the oven to 350 F degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Carefully slice away the top of the Brie rinds and discard them. Leave the sides intact. Bake both wheels of Brie for 15 minutes or until melted through.
    • Top each baked Brie with blackberry compote and spicy candied pecans.
    • If preferred garnish them with a few blackberries, pomegranate seeds, and fresh thyme leaves.
    • Serve immediately.

    Video

    Notes

    • The instructions in the video is slightly different than the ones in the recipe, but either way would work.
    • You can make the blackberry compote and candied pecans a day ahead and store them in the fridge until you are ready to use them. If you do so, I recommend lightly warming up the compote before drizzling it over the baked brie.
    • I highly recommend baking brie at the last minute, right before serving. Not only, it fills your house with the most delicious cheese smells but also looks very appetizing when it first comes out of the oven.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 248kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 37mg | Sodium: 442mg | Potassium: 163mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 342IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 1mg

    This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from The Gourmet Kitchen.

    Baked Brie with Blackberry Compote and Spicy Candied Pecan
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/blackberry-compote-spicy-pecan-baked-brie-recipe/feed/ 33
    Quinoa Crunch https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-crunch/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-crunch/#comments Tue, 24 May 2016 21:20:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9278 Gluten-free and vegan Quinoa Crunch made with uncooked quinoa, raw sliced almonds, sesame seeds, and sweetened with maple syrup. Ready…]]>

    Gluten-free and vegan Quinoa Crunch made with uncooked quinoa, raw sliced almonds, sesame seeds, and sweetened with maple syrup. Ready in less than 30 minutes, this quinoa breakfast topping is a great alternative to granola. 

    Quinoa Crunch

    Hey there! Today, I am just popping in with a super quick recipe. This quinoa crunch is my current favorite snack. It is a recipe similar to granola, but much quicker to make. It embodies everything I love in a snack; it is crunchy, healthy, and easy to make. Plus, it is made with wholesome ingredients like sesame seeds, quinoa, and raw almonds. It also is a recipe that I used in a coconut quinoa porridge recipe that I will be posting tomorrow.

    Quinoa Crunch

    ABOUT THIS QUINOA CRUNCH RECIPE:

    This recipe is probably one of the easiest recipes on this blog.

    To make it, simply mix all the ingredients, spread them on a baking sheet, and bake in 375 F. degree oven for 10-12 minutes. And voila!!

    You made a delicious snack you can use to top off your morning cereals, porridges, ice cream or to enjoy just by itself.

    One thing I recommend here is to make sure to dry the uncooked quinoa after rinsing and draining it. Because doing so, helps with preventing sogginess of the end product.

    You can also substitute almonds with walnuts or any other nuts you have on hand. I know during the wintertime I will be making a winter-y version of this recipe with walnuts and ground cinnamon.

    As you probably guessed it, variations you can create using this recipe as a base are endless. Just give it a try and you’ll see what I am talking about.

    HOW TO USE THIS QUINOA CRUNCH TOPPING:

    I use this quinoa topping to top off my yogurt, overnight apple muesli, overnight steel cut oats, pressure cooker steel cut oats, and quinoa porridge (as shown in the image below).

    Coconut Quinoa Porridge with Berries and Quinoa Crunch Topping

    Quinoa Crunch
    Print

    Quinoa Crunch {Vegan + GF}

    A gluten free and vegan quinoa crunch made with uncooked quinoa, raw sliced almonds, sesame seeds, and sweetened with maple syrup. Ready in less than 30 minutes, this quinoa crunch is a great alternative to granola.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes
    Total Time 22 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 225kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup quinoa uncooked, rinsed, and drained well
    • 1/2 cup sliced raw almonds
    • 3 tablespoons raw sesame seeds
    • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
    • pinch of salt
    • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil coconut, canola, or safflower would work

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375 F degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • While the oven is heating, spread the quinoa onto a clean dry kitchen towel (or paper towels) to dry it as much as possible.
    • Place the quinoa, almonds, sesame seeds, maple syrup, salt, and vegetable oil in a bowl. Stir to make sure that all ingredients are homogenously distributed.
    • Spread the mixture evenly on the baking sheet. Bake 10-12 minutes or until fragrant.
    • Let it cool on the counter.

    Notes

    As long as it is kept in an airtight jar/container, it will keep its freshness up to a month.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 225kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 270mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Calcium: 87mg | Iron: 2mg

    This recipe is adapted from Megan Gordon’s cookbook Whole-Grain Mornings.

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-crunch/feed/ 10
    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Homemade Balsamic Reduction https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-ricotta-bruschetta-with-homemade-balsamic-reduction/ https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-ricotta-bruschetta-with-homemade-balsamic-reduction/#comments Mon, 13 Jul 2015 16:40:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6884 Have you ever heard the term The Holy Trinity of Flavor? In her book, My New Roots: Inspired Plant-Based Recipes for…]]>

    Have you ever heard the term The Holy Trinity of Flavor? In her book, My New Roots: Inspired Plant-Based Recipes for Every Season, Sarah Britton talks about how to enrich your cooking with using a simple technique.

    The story is that she gets a job in one of her favorite restaurants in Copenhagen as a cook. On her first day on the job, she makes a big batch of soup that she thought would blow away her coworker Daniel. However, after a quick taste he asks her, “What is your acid?” As she was caught by surprise, she responds, “My what?”

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    Later he explains that in anything she makes, if she wants to hit all notes and ensure that it doesn’t feel like something is missing, she should include three things in every recipe. And those are salt, sugar, and acid, or what Sarah calls: The Holly Trinity of Flavor.

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    Following his advice, Sarah goes back to her soup and pours a couple glugs of apple cider vinegar into it. After a quick sip she says, “Almost like a miracle, the taste goes from good to wow.

    Since the day I read about this technique, I started paying more to the rule of The Holly Trinity of Flavor. And I have to admit – it made a tremendous difference in my cooking. Who would know something so simple would make such a big difference?

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    You may ask, “What are some ingredients that I can use as salt, sugar, and acid?” The following is a list of options that I use, some of which are additions to Sarah’s list:

    Sweet
    : honey, maple syrup, dates, coconut sugar and nectar, fruit juice, apple juice, brown rice syrup, natural fruit juices, granulated sugar (as a last option)
    Salt: sea salt (such as –my favorite- Malton salt), soy sauce, miso paste, tamari
    Acid: lemon juice, apple cider vinegar, balsamic vinegar, ume plum vinegar

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    About this Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Homemade Balsamic Reduction Recipe:

    So as I was looking for a way to use the leftover strawberries from last week’s recipe (summer berry tart) for a party that we were invited, I knew I had to find a way to ensure that every single flavor note was included in my recipe for it to have the wow factor. As this was for a crowd, I decided to make a luxurious bruschetta that follows Sarah’s technique. To do that, I spread some homemade ricotta cheese on slices of thick toasted French baguette, topped them off with fresh peppery arugula and sliced strawberries (and some leftover pomegranate seeds), and then drizzled each slice with some balsamic reduction that I quickly made on the stovetop. And finally, for the “wow” factor, I sprinkled them with some coarse sea salt.

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.

    It ended up being a delicious finger food and a crowd pleaser that got some raving reviews from the people in the party. Many of them even asked for the recipe. So if you are getting ready to host a summer party or looking for a way to use some of the strawberries that are in abundance during this time of the year, why not give this bruschetta recipe a try?


    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Balsamic Reduction: French Baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.
    Print

    Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Homemade Balsamic Reduction

    This Strawberry-Ricotta Bruschetta with Homemade Balsamic Reduction is a great summer time appetizer that will WOW your guests. Imagine, Toasted French baguette slices spread with ricotta cheese, topped off with arugula leaves and strawberries, and drizzled with homemade balsamic reduction.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Servings 10 -12 Slices
    Calories 172kcal

    Ingredients

    For the Balsamic Reduction:

    • 1 cup balsamic vinegar
    • 2 tablespoons granulated sugar
    • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed

    For the Bruschetta:

    • 1 large French baguette sliced into 1-inch thick slices
    • 1-1/2 cups whole-milk ricotta cheese preferably homemade
    • 2 cups arugula washed and spin-dried
    • 3 pints fresh strawberries* hulled and sliced into small cubes
    • 1/3 cup pomegranate seeds optional
    • Maldon or any other coarse salt

    Instructions

    • Place balsamic vinegar, sugar, and lemon juice in a saucepan. Heat in medium heat. Let it simmer until it is reduced by half, 10-15 minutes. Transfer it to a bowl (or a glass jar) and let it cool on the kitchen counter.
    • Meanwhile, arrange baguette slices on a baking sheet and broil them until golden brown, 1-2 minutes on each side. Alternatively, you can toast them in a toaster or grill them on a grill.
    • Spread each slice with a generous layer of ricotta cheese. Top them off with arugula, strawberries, and pomegranate seeds (if using).
    • Drizzle each slice with balsamic reduction and sprinkle with Maldon salt.
    • Serve immediately.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 172kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 172mg | Potassium: 315mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 167IU | Vitamin C: 85mg | Calcium: 82mg | Iron: 2mg

    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/strawberry-ricotta-bruschetta-with-homemade-balsamic-reduction/feed/ 9
    Fully Loaded Breakfast Bars {Vegan} https://foolproofliving.com/fully-loaded-breakfast-bars-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/fully-loaded-breakfast-bars-2/#comments Sun, 10 May 2015 18:22:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6309 The recipe for these bars almost didn’t make it to the blog. And that was not because they were not…]]>

    The recipe for these bars almost didn’t make it to the blog. And that was not because they were not good or anything, it was because I had the hardest time photographing them.

    On the day I made these breakfast bars Dwight was off. We thought that it would be fun to find a nice shady area on the island, pack up some late lunch for a picnic, and photograph them while we were enjoying our time together.

    Healthy loaded breakfast bars placed on top of each other and photographed with a milk bottle in the background

    We decided to go to the historical part of the island, where the old sugar mills were located. In theory, it was a great idea as these beautiful mills were nested in a garden with picnic tables overlooking the ocean with the sunset view. However, we didn’t take one minor issue into consideration. And that was the no-see-ums.

    No-see-ums are tiny biting insects that live and breed in tropical climates. They are so tiny that you may not even see them (hence the name), but let me tell you something- there is no way you wouldn’t feel them. They love hanging out by the water, especially during the sunset. On that day, we were both wearing shorts and short sleeve t-shirts, and we had brought delicious food with us for our so-called “fun picnic”. As you can imagine, for no-see-yums it was a jackpot.

    a woman is holding a plate full of fully loaded snack bars in her hand

    At first, we put some mosquito repellent on our body thinking that it would keep them away. However, it wasn’t long after we realized that mosquito repellents keep mosquitos away, not no-see-ums. As I was photographing the breakfast bars, they were biting my legs so badly that I didn’t think that I could continue. I shoot these photos as quickly as I could and then we came back home. But little did I know, the worst was yet to come.

    The next morning, I was awaken by the worst itch ever. When I went into the bathroom and looked myself in the mirror, I couldn’t believe my eyes. I got bit from more than 200 places all over my body – legs, arms, neck, face, and even in between my toes. And the worst part was that every single one of them was itching like crazy. It hurt like hell so much so that I couldn’t concentrate on anything else.

    a woman is dipping a vegan breakfast bar into milk

    With the hopes of somewhat managing the itch, I went for a dip in the ocean, and literally stayed in there for 2 hours. But even after that, I was still itching like a mad person. Long story short, I had to go to the clinic and get some medicine to stop this madness. The doctor prescribed a topical steroid cream to put on and an antihistamine to take to minimize the swelling. Sadly, even with the medicine it took another 24 hours for the itching to stop. Needless to say, it was one of the worst things I have ever experienced in my life. But I learned a good lesson. From now on, you will never see me wearing shorts during sunset.

    Thankfully, a couple of the photos I took on that day came out well. I know I could have taken them again, but God knows I didn’t feel like doing anything that reminded me of that day.

    Apart from everything that happened on that day, these breakfast bars were delicious. They were loaded with healthy ingredients like oats, chia seeds, cinnamon, and white beans. Yes, you read it right – white beans.

    In the past, I have read bakers use white beans as a substitute for butter for healthy (or vegan) baking, but I have never tried it myself up until I made these breakfast bars. To be quite honest, I didn’t think that they would work well, but I know now – I was wrong. They made a great alternative to butter.

    A jar of vegan and gluten free breakfast bars photographed outdoors

    The process of making these breakfast bars is no different than making cookie dough. You basically stir the dry and wet ingredients separately, and then mix them together. You add the nuts and dried fruits before shaping them into bars. But the difference of this recipe is that instead of using all-purpose flour and butter, you use oat flour and white beans, which are obviously much healthier ingredients. Especially the white beans… As they are a great source of fiber and protein, when you eat one of these bars in the morning it keeps you full longer than many other breakfast options. And you know what?!

    The delicious flavorings (cinnamon, orange zest, coconut oil, and maple syrup) used in this recipe masks the taste of white beans so much so that you can’t even tell that they are a part of the ingredients list.

    I don’t know you, but in my book this qualifies them as the magical ingredient.

    Fully Loaded Breakfast Bars
    Print

    Fully Loaded Breakfast Bars

    Superfood packed breakfast bars made with white bean puree chia seeds, oats, dried fruit and nuts for a nutritious and healthy snack or a grab and go breakfast.
    Course Breakfast, Vegan
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes
    Servings 10 Bars
    Calories 333kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
    • 3 tablespoons of filtered water
    • 3 1/4 cups rolled oats (certified as gluten-free)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 2 teaspoons ground cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon coarse sea salt
    • 1 1/2 cup or (15 ounce) can cooked white beans, rinsed and drained
    • 1/4 cup coconut oil melted
    • 1/4 cup pure maple syrup or raw honey
    • zest of an orange
    • 1/4 cup unsweetened applesauce
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1/2 cup dried apricots or other dried fruit you have on hand, roughly chopped
    • 1/4 cup pumpkin seeds lightly toasted
    • 1 cup chopped 70% chocolate chopped (I used Valhrona brand) – Optional –

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 Degrees. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
    • Mix chia seeds and water in a small bowl and let it sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes.
    • Meanwhile, process 1 1/2 cups of the rolled oats in a food processor until it turns into flour. Transfer it to a large mixing bowl. Stir in the rest of the rolled oats, baking powder, baking soda, cinnamon, and salt. Set aside.
    • Place the white beans and coconut oil into the bowl of the food processor and process until creamy. Add in the chia seeds (with water), maple syrup, orange zest, applesauce, and vanilla extract. Pulse until everything is combined and it is smooth mixture.
    • Pour the white bean mixture over the rolled oats mixture. Add in the apricots, pumpkin seeds, and chocolate. Stir to combine. At this point, you may have to use your hands.
    • Shape the dough into 10 equal balls and then flatten them into patty shape. Place them on the prepared baking sheet and bake for 15-18 minutes, flipping the sheet halfway through the baking process.
    • Let them cool completely before serving. They can be kept in an airtight container in room temperature up to a week.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 333kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 391mg | Potassium: 430mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 243IU | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 3mg

     This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Sarah Britton’s cookbook My New Roots.


    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/fully-loaded-breakfast-bars-2/feed/ 13
    Almond and Raspberry Breakfast Bars https://foolproofliving.com/almond-and-raspberry-breakfast-bars/ https://foolproofliving.com/almond-and-raspberry-breakfast-bars/#comments Thu, 16 Apr 2015 17:25:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6181 Healthy Raspberry Breakfast Bars One of my all-time favorite Ina Garten recipe is her Raspberry Crumble Bars. It is safe…]]>

    Healthy Raspberry Breakfast Bars

    One of my all-time favorite Ina Garten recipe is her Raspberry Crumble Bars. It is safe to say that I made it more than ten times. And it has always been a hit with friends and family. However, as I read more and more about eating healthy and cooking whole foods, I find myself looking for alternatives for healthier versions of my favorite dishes.

    You know what they say; Knowledge is power. And as I flip through the pages of cookbooks full of recipes made with whole foods and healthier ingredients and learn from them, I find it much harder to go back to my old ways and bake things with lots of butter, sugar, and other processed ingredients.

    Side view of Almond and Raspberry Breakfast Bar on a plate

    Knowing that we are what we eat, I am choosing to pay attention to what is going into my body and make changes in my cooking habits accordingly. Do I know everything there is to know and cook and bake that way? Probably not. But I am willing to give it a try.

    Ingredients to make Almond and Raspberry Breakfast Bars

    With that being said, my journey of learning and experimenting with cooking (and baking) this way has been a rocky one. For one thing, I live on an island and it is hard to find certain ingredients. Even though I can order things online, not having them readily available is always a challenge. But more than that, the end product of cooking and baking with healthier ingredients requires a shift in my understanding of the tastes that I am used to.

    Here is what I mean by that. Take this breakfast bar recipe as an example. Unlike Ina’s recipe, in this one there is no all-purpose flour, no granulated sugar, and no butter. Therefore, it is not as crumbly and sweet. Instead, I used a little bit of coconut oil, oat flour (that I made with processing old fashioned oats in my food processor), a little bit of honey, and a ripe banana to sweeten it. As a result, though it was still delicious, I can’t say it tasted the same.

    Raspberry filling poured over breakfast bar mixture

    And to be perfectly honest, I didn’t succeed on my first try. My first attempt was literally inedible. Since I wanted to try taking out the oil completely (by using a couple of ripe bananas instead), it yielded a crust that was too hard to eat. I also wanted to see if I could eliminate any type of sugar and solely rely on the sugar coming from the fruit. It was hard and tart, hence making it an inedible disaster.

    Before I gave it another shot, I went online and checked out some of my favorite healthy food bloggers’ websites (this and this, in particular) to see how they do it, and finally came up with my own version.

    Chopped Almonds being pour raspberry mixture for breakfast bar

    I didn’t call it a crumble bar, because in my opinion in order for it to be a crumble bar it has to have a crumbly crust in addition to a crumbly topping. Since I didn’t use any butter, the crust was not crumbly. It was softer. Moreover, I used no processed sugar (like brown sugar or granulated sugar) in this recipe. I choose to sweeten it by using just a little bit of honey (you can also use maple syrup), which I thought worked perfectly. Here, I have to mention that this recipe relies on the sugar coming from the raspberries. I recommend adjusting the amount of honey you add after tasting your raspberries. Mine weren’t too sweet, so I added 2 tablespoons of honey. If yours are sweeter or you are using other fruit/s, give it a taste before adding more (or less) honey.

    Side view of Almond and Raspberry Breakfast Bar on a plate

    As I said earlier, the end product was not what I was used to eating, but it sure was delicious. Beyond the taste, I was glad that I was being nice to my body by fueling it with a breakfast bar made with healthier ingredients.

    Almonds being poured in Raspberry mix for Breakfast Bars
    Print

    Almond and Raspberry Breakfast Bars

    Almond Raspberry Breakfast Bars made healthier with an oat crust. Sweetened with fresh fruit, honey and a banana serve this breakfast bar recipe as a light treat with coffee in the morning or later with tea during the tea time
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 350kcal

    Ingredients

    For the crust:

    • 1 tablespoons chia seeds
    • 4 tablespoons of water
    • 2 +1/4 cups old-fashioned oats divided
    • 1 ripe banana medium size
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • 3 tablespoons coconut oil
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1/4 teaspoon almond extract optional
    • 1/2 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1/4 cup almond flour

    For the filling:

    • 4 cups fresh raspberries
    • 11/2 teaspoon nutmeg
    • 1/4 teaspoon salt
    • 1 zest of a lemon
    • 1/2 tablespoon cornstarch
    • 3-4 tablespoons honey

    For the topping:

    • 1 cup old fashioned oats
    • 2 tablespoons honey
    • 2 tablespoons coconut oil
    • 3/4 cup sliced almonds lightly toasted
    • 1/2 teaspoon cinnamon
    • pinch of salt
    • 2 tablespoons unsweetened coconut

    Instructions

    To make the crust

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350 degrees.
    • Line an 8X8-baking dish with parchment paper. Set aside.
    • Place the chia seeds in a small bowl and add the water. Stir until mixed. Set aside.
    • Process the 2 cups of oats in the bowl of a food processor until it turns into oat flour, 30-45 seconds.
    • Add in the banana, honey, coconut oil, vanilla & almond (if using) extracts, salt, and baking powder. Process for 30 seconds or until they are all combined.
    • Transfer the mixture to a mixing bowl. Stir in the 1/4 cup oats, almond flour, and the chia seed & water mixture. Be aware that it will be a very sticky dough.
    • Transfer the dough into the prepared baking pan. Using either your hands or the back of a spatula, press it down firmly (especially around the corners) to spread it evenly into the pan. If you use your hands, it will be easier to handle if you wet them a little bit.

    To make the filling:

    • Combine all ingredients in a mixing bowl and give it a gentle stir.

    *To make the topping:

    • Place all ingredients in a mixing bowl and toss to combine.To assemble: Distribute the filling equally on top of the crust.
    • Sprinkle the topping over the raspberry filling making sure to cover the all of the fruit.
    • Place it in the oven and bake 30-35 minutes, or until it turns slightly golden on top.Let it cool completely.
    • Cut it into 9 pieces and serve. It can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container up to 4 days.

    Notes

    • You can also use frozen raspberries. However, make sure to let them thaw first.
    • Before adding honey into the filling, taste the fruit. If it is already sweet add a little less or visa versa.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 350kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 244mg | Potassium: 331mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 26IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 116mg | Iron: 2mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/almond-and-raspberry-breakfast-bars/feed/ 13
    Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil https://foolproofliving.com/gorgonzola-walnut-bruschetta-with-truffle-oil/ https://foolproofliving.com/gorgonzola-walnut-bruschetta-with-truffle-oil/#comments Fri, 18 Jul 2014 16:11:51 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3806 Last week, while we were in Miami, we went to a couple of really good restaurants, two of which we loved…]]>

    Last week, while we were in Miami, we went to a couple of really good restaurants, two of which we loved so much that I wanted to share with you.

    Person placing greens on top of Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil

    Both restaurants are in a neighborhood called Wynwood. Wynwood is a trendy arts hub with more than 70 galleries and museums. As we walked through the streets, we got a chance to see some of the most amazing murals I have ever seen in my life. Also, we went into a couple of galleries and saw some exceptionally beautiful paintings, murals, and sculptures. If you have time, you could literally spend a whole day going in and out of these galleries in the area.

    Ingredients for Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil

    Wynwood also is home to some of the trendiest restaurants in Miami. We ate at a couple of them, and while they were all impressive, two in particular were really  something special.

    The first one is called Mandolin. It is an Aegean Bistro located on 4312 NE 2nd Avenue. It was our friends, Andrea and Thalia’s idea to go there. The minute we entered Mandolin, I felt the familiar, warm and welcoming feeling that made me feel like I was back home. From the color scheme to the happy and genuine smile of our server, I knew from the very beginning that I was going to enjoy this dinner. When we were handed the menu, it was confirmed that there was a Turkish chef in the kitchen. Come to find out, Mandolin is a restaurant owned by 2 people – one is Turkish and the other is Greek.

    The menu was full of Aegean classics from small plates – mezes to main dishes like chicken kebap and sea bass- levrek. To start with, we ordered Turkish chorizo, Kofte, and marinated octopus. Then for our entrées we both had the daily special, sea bass. I was so happy when I saw that they served the whole fish, just like they would do back home. To end our dinner, we had Turkish coffee and a couple of pieces of delicious homemade baklava.

    All in all it was a wonderful dinner that we enjoyed immensely. I strongly recommend anyone living or going to Miami to stop by and have a bite at Mandolin.

    Four sliced of Bruschetta with Truffle Oil on a sheet pan

    The second place we loved is called Joey’s. Located on 2506 NW 2nd Avenue, it is a modern Italian café. When we heard that they claim to be the best pizza in Miami, we knew we were going to have pizza for lunch that day.

    Joey’s menu offers some of the most popular Italian dishes from Bruschetta Fresca to Cocette Primavera to pizzas like Margherita and Parma e Funghi. We started with the Cocette Primavera, a dish similar to a summer vegetable gratin served in a small ovenproof bowl with toasted garlicky bread. Then we shared a pizza called Gorgonzola Tartufata – a pizza made with Gorgonzola cheese, walnuts and topped with arugula flavored with truffle oil. It was AMAZING. I thought the combination of Gorgonzola cheese and chopped walnuts together with truffle oil was just simply yummy.

    Two slices of Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil on two plates with flatware on the side

    I told Dwight that we would have to make this at home. On our way back to the hotel, we stopped by a supermarket and picked up a bottle of truffle oil.

    So the idea of this bruschetta came from Joey’s in Miami. I opted for a bruschetta because it is much quicker to put together. However, you could certainly use the combination as a pizza topping. If you decide to do that I would recommend making the pizza dough as thin as possible so that it would be light and crunchy. Just like they served in Joey’s.

    Close up view of 2 slices Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil on a cutting board

    Either way, I promise you with such flavors, your taste buds are in for a treat. The creamy and salty Gorgonzola cheese flavored with earthy and crunchy walnuts and topped off with peppery arugula tossed with truffle oil offer you a simple yet delicious treat. I served it with my Mint and Rosemary Lemonade with Vanilla for lunch. But it could also be served with wine as an appetizer for a dinner or a brunch party.

    Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil
    Print

    Gorgonzola-Walnut Bruschetta with Truffle Oil

    Gorgonzola Bruschetta with Truffle Oil: An easy to make yet incredibly flavorful bruschetta recipe flavored with mozzarella, gorgonzola, walnuts, and arugula drizzled with truffle oil. This is a restaurant style appetizer dish that will make your guests ask for the recipe.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 366kcal

    Ingredients

    • 8 slices of sourdough bread
    • 1 1/2 cup mozzarella cheese shredded
    • 3/4 cup gorgonzola cheese crumbled
    • 1/2 cup walnuts chopped
    • 2 cups arugula washed and spin-dried
    • 2 cloves of garlic pressed through a garlic press
    • 2 tablespoons of truffle oil

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees.
    • Line the bread slices on two baking sheets.
    • Divide the shredded mozzarella evenly on each bread slice. Continue the same process with the gorgonzola cheese and walnuts.
    • Place baking sheets in the oven and bake them for 10-12 minutes, or until the cheese is melted.
    • Place the arugula in a salad bowl. Add the garlic and truffle oil. Toss to combine.
    • Top each bruschetta with a handful of arugula.
    • Serve when it is still warm.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 366kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 609mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 341IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 207mg | Iron: 3mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/gorgonzola-walnut-bruschetta-with-truffle-oil/feed/ 8
    Vegan Cocoa Truffles https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-cocoa-truffles/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-cocoa-truffles/#comments Tue, 08 Apr 2014 12:38:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2887 I have friends, who go to the mall when they need a change of scene or to simply pass time.…]]>

    I have friends, who go to the mall when they need a change of scene or to simply pass time. When I need that, I go to Whole Foods Market. At least, I used to back when I was living in a city.

    Four Vegan Cocoa Truffles in a bowl with vegan cocoa powder

    I find Whole Foods to be a place of inspiration for my cooking and life, in general. I love the neatly organized aisles full of upscale grocery items ranging from organic nut butters to never-frozen meats to hand picked strawberries to perfume smelling body lotions.

    Prep for Cocoa Truffles on a round platter with chocolate chips cocoa powder

    Although I cannot afford to shop from there all the time, when I want to indulge in a handmade chocolate bar or a healthy snack, I choose to spend my money in Whole Foods. Every time I shop from there I feel like it is not bad for me. Even if it is a candy bar full of sugar and processed ingredients.
    Luckily, my favorite thing in Whole Foods, is a healthy snack called Chunks of Energy.

    Chunks of energy is sold in the bulk section, where customers can fill their own bags with organically grown rice, grains, beans, nut butters, dried fruits, snacks, etc. It is made up of a long list of healthy ingredients like dates, walnuts, sunflowers seeds, raisons, almonds, cocoa powder, sesame seeds, etc.

    Close up view of Vegan Cocoa Truffles in bowl

    It was not until the last time I spent $8 on a small bag full of Chunks of Energy, I thought to myself I should try to make this at home. I took a picture of the list of ingredients with my phone and decided to give it a try.

    And boy, was that a good idea??!

    Simply cheating from the list of ingredients and the good old trial and error method, I developed the homemade version recipe of my favorite snack. Since then I have made several different versions of this recipe and built a formula to make these amazing snacks in different ways.

    Here is how it goes:

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Step 1:

    Step 2:

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Step 3:

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Step 4:

     Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Step 5:

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Step 6:

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Once you decide on the ingredients you want to use, all you have to do is to put everything in a food processor and process until combined. Then you can easily make truffle sized bites and roll them in nuts or cocoa powder.
    It is that easy.

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    When I made these the first time, my husband did not know what they were made of. They were on the counter waiting to be photographed. He asked me if he can try one and I said yes.
    I would have loved you to see his face after the first bite. It was priceless. You could tell he thought it was made of chocolate and surprised that it was not. He said, “Wow, whatever this is, it is out of this world!!

    What can I say?? other than “mission accomplished” ?!!?

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles
    Print

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles

    Vegan Cocoa Truffles – If you are a fan of Whole Foods’ snack section and buy their chunks of energy snack balls, I’ve got good news for you. This vegan cocoa truffles recipe is created after purchasing way too many of them and deciding that it's about time to create this recipe at home. Made with healthier ingredients like dried (no sugar added) fruit, almond flour, and chia seeds, you can easily customize them to your liking with all my tips below.
    Course Healthy Snacks
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes
    Servings 20 truffles
    Calories 102kcal

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup 12-13 Medjool Dates
    • 1/2 cup Turkish Dried Apricot
    • 3/4 cup walnuts
    • 1/2 cup sunflower seeds
    • 1/4 cup raw pumpkin seeds
    • 5 3+2 tablespoons natural cocoa powder – divided and sifted
    • 2 tablespoons almond flour
    • 3 tablespoons unsweetened shredded coconut
    • 1 tablespoon chia seeds
    • 1 tablespoon flax seed meal
    • 1 tablespoon hemp seeds
    • 1/4 cup water*

    Instructions

    • Process dates, apricots, walnuts, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, 3 tablespoons of cocoa powder, almond flour, coconut, chia seeds, flax seeds, hemp seeds, and 1 tablespoon of water in a food processor until combined, 1-2 minutes, scraping down the bowl every 30 seconds with a rubber spatula.
    • Check the consistency. If it is too thick add more water and process. I would highly caution you to check the consistency before adding more water.
    • Using a tablespoon measure, shape the mixture into small balls by rolling between the palms of your hands. Place them on a large baking sheet.
    • Transfer the baking sheet into the fridge and let it sit there for at least 1 hour.
    • Place the rest of the (2 tablespoons) cocoa powder on a dinner plate. Roll the truffles in cocoa powder and serve.
    • They will keep fresh for 5-6 days as long as they are kept in an airtight container in the fridge.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 102kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 2mg | Potassium: 152mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-cocoa-truffles/feed/ 6